Manual Volvo S80 - 2016 (page 413 of 420) (English)

615841

413

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/420

W E B E D I T I O N

O W N E R ' S M A N U A L

DEAR VOLVO OWNER

THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving

pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been

designed for the safety and comfort of you and

your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in

the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to

satisfy all current safety and environmental

requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we

recommend that you familiarise yourself with the

equipment, instructions and maintenance infor-

mation contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
01
01 Introduction
Owner's Manual in the car's screen......... 13
Reading the owner's manual.................... 13
Digital owner's manual in the car.............. 16
Recording data......................................... 18
Accessories and extra equipment............ 19
Support and information about the car on
the Internet................................................ 20
Volvo ID..................................................... 21
Environmental philosophy......................... 22
The owner's manual and the environ-
ment.......................................................... 24
Laminated glass........................................ 24
02
02 Safety
General information on seatbelts.............. 26
Seatbelt - putting on................................. 27
Seatbelt - loosening.................................. 27
Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 28
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 28
Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 29
Safety - warning symbol........................... 29
Airbag system........................................... 30
Driver airbag.............................................. 31
Passenger airbag...................................... 32
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing*............................................................ 33
Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 35
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion..................................................... 36
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 36
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection)................................................. 37
WHIPS - child seats.................................. 38
WHIPS - seating position.......................... 38
When the systems deploy......................... 39
General information on safety mode......... 40
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car............................................................. 41
Safety mode - moving the car.................. 42
02
   
General information on child safety.......... 42
Child seats................................................ 43
Child seats - location................................ 47
Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 48
ISOFIX - size classes................................ 48
ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 50
Child seats - upper mounting points........ 52

Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
03
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, left-hand drive
car - overview........................................... 54
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview................................... 57
Combined instrument panel...................... 60
Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview.................................................... 60
Digital combined instrument panel -
overview.................................................... 61
Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 64
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols...................................... 65
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols................................... 67
Outside temperature gauge...................... 69
Trip meter.................................................. 69
Clock......................................................... 70
Combined instrument panel - license
agreement................................................. 70
Symbols in the display.............................. 71
Volvo Sensus............................................ 74
Key positions............................................ 75
Key positions - functions at different lev-
els.............................................................. 75
Seats, front................................................ 77
Seats, front - electrically operated*.......... 78
03
   
Seats, rear................................................. 79
Steering wheel.......................................... 80
Heating* of the steering wheel.................. 82
Light switches........................................... 82
Position/parking lamps............................. 85
Daytime running lights.............................. 85
Tunnel detection*...................................... 86
Main/dipped beam.................................... 86
Active main beam*.................................... 87
Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 89
Rear fog lamp........................................... 89
Brake lights............................................... 90
Hazard warning flashers........................... 90
direction indicators................................... 91
Interior lighting.......................................... 92
Home safe light duration........................... 93
Approach lighting...................................... 93
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat-
tern............................................................ 94
Wipers and washers................................. 98
Power windows......................................... 99
Sun blind*................................................ 101
Door mirrors............................................ 101
03
   
Windows and rearview and door mirrors
- heating.................................................. 103
Rearview mirror - interior........................ 103
Compass*............................................... 104
Sunroof*.................................................. 105
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel....................................................... 107
Menu overview - combined instrument
panel....................................................... 108
Messages................................................ 108
Messages - handling............................... 109
MY CAR.................................................. 110
Trip computer......................................... 111
Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel..................................... 112
Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel.............................................. 116
Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion.......................................................... 120
Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 121

Table of contents
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04
04 Climate control
General information on climate control... 123
Actual temperature................................. 124
Sensors - climate control........................ 124
Air quality................................................ 124
Air quality - passenger compartment fil-
ter............................................................ 125
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)*..................................................... 125
Air quality - IAQS*................................... 126
Air quality - material................................ 126
Menu settings - climate control.............. 126
Air distribution in the passenger com-
partment.................................................. 127
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 129
Heated front seats*................................. 130
Heated rear seat*.................................... 130
Ventilated front seats*............................. 131
Fan.......................................................... 132
Auto-regulation....................................... 132
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 132
Air conditioning....................................... 133
Demisting and defrosting the wind-
screen..................................................... 133
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 134
04
   
Air distribution - table............................. 136
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater*..................................... 138
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - direct start................ 139
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - immediate stop......... 140
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer.......................... 140
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages................. 142
Additional heater*.................................... 144
Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 144
Electric additional heater*....................... 145
05
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces....................................... 147
Tunnel console........................................ 149
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*................................................... 149
Glovebox................................................. 149
Inlay mats*.............................................. 150
Vanity mirror............................................ 150
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 150
Loading................................................... 151
Loading - long load................................. 152
Loading - ski hatch................................. 153
Roof load................................................. 153
Load retaining eyelets............................. 154
Loading - bag holder*............................. 154
12 V electrical socket, cargo area*......... 155

Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
06
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key................................. 157
Remote control key - losing ................... 157
Remote control key - personalisation*.... 158
Locking/unlocking - indicator................. 159
Immobiliser.............................................. 159
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*..................................... 160
Remote control key - functions............... 160
Remote control key - range.................... 162
Remote control key with PCC* - unique
functions................................................. 162
Remote control key with PCC* - range... 163
Detachable key blade............................. 164
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching................................................. 164
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 165
Privacy locking*....................................... 165
Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery.......................................................... 167
Keyless drive*.......................................... 168
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range....................................................... 168
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key.................................. 169
06
   
Keyless drive* - interference to remote
control key function................................ 170
Keyless drive* - locking........................... 170
Keyless drive* - unlocking....................... 171
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade ...................................................... 171
Keyless Drive* - lock settings................. 172
Keyless Drive* - antenna location........... 172
Locking/unlocking - from the outside..... 173
Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 173
Global opening........................................ 174
Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 174
Locking/unlocking - boot lid................... 175
Deadlocks*.............................................. 176
Child safety locks - manual activation.... 177
Child safety locks - electrical activation* 178
Alarm....................................................... 178
Alarm indicator........................................ 179
Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 180
Alarm - remote control key not working. 180
Alarm signals........................................... 180
Reduced alarm level............................... 181
Type approval - remote control key sys-
tem.......................................................... 181
07
07 Driver support
Active chassis - Four C*.......................... 183
Adjustable steering force*....................... 183
Electronic stability control (ESC) - gen-
eral.......................................................... 184
Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion.......................................................... 184
Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
bols and messages................................. 186
Road Sign Information (RSI)*.................. 188
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 188
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 190
Cruise control*........................................ 191
Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 191
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode.................................. 192
Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 193
Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 193
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*............... 193
Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 194
Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 196
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed...................................................... 197
Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter-
val............................................................ 198

Table of contents
6
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
   
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode............ 199
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle........................................ 200
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 200
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
tance....................................................... 200
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
control functionality................................ 202
Radar sensor........................................... 203
Radar sensor - limitations....................... 203
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action............................................... 205
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages................................................ 206
Distance Warning*.................................. 208
Distance Warning* - limitations............... 209
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 210
City Safety™........................................... 211
City Safety™ - function........................... 211
City Safety™ - operation........................ 212
City Safety™ - limitations....................... 213
City Safety™ - laser sensor.................... 215
City Safety™ - symbols and messages.. 217
07
   
Collision warning system*....................... 218
Collision warning system* - function...... 219
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists.................................................... 220
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians............................................. 221
Collision warning system* - operation.... 222
Collision warning system* - limitations... 223
Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations.......................................... 224
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages................................................ 226
Driver Alert System*................................ 228
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 228
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 229
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages................................................ 230
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 231
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - func-
tion.......................................................... 231
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion.......................................................... 232
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions........................................................ 233
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - sym-
bols and messages................................. 234
07
   
Park Assist*............................................. 235
Park assist syst* - function..................... 235
Park assist syst* - backward.................. 236
Park assist syst* - forward...................... 237
Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 238
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 238
Park assist camera*................................ 239
Park assist camera - settings................. 241
Park assist camera - limitations.............. 242
BLIS*....................................................... 242
BLIS* - operation.................................... 243
BLIS - symbols and messages............... 245
Type approval - radar system................. 246

Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
7
08
08 Starting and driving
Alcohol lock*........................................... 248
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation.. 248
Alcohol lock* - storage............................ 249
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine 249
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind................ 251
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
sages....................................................... 252
Starting the engine.................................. 253
Switching off the engine......................... 254
Steering lock........................................... 254
Remote start (ERS)*................................ 255
Remote start (ERS) - operation............... 255
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 257
Jump starting with battery...................... 258
Gearboxes............................................... 259
Manual gearbox...................................... 259
Gear shift indicator*................................ 260
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*........... 261
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*.......... 264
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 266
Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 267
All-wheel drive - (AWD)*.......................... 267
Start/Stop*.............................................. 268
08
   
Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 268
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 270
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 271
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start......................................................... 272
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox................................................... 273
Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 273
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 274
ECO*....................................................... 276
Foot brake............................................... 278
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 279
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers......... 280
Foot brake - emergency brake assis-
tance....................................................... 280
Parking brake.......................................... 281
Driving in water....................................... 285
Overheating............................................. 285
Driving with open tailgate/boot lid.......... 286
Overload - starter battery........................ 286
Before a long journey.............................. 287
Winter driving.......................................... 287
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 288
Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 288
08
   
Filling up with fuel................................... 288
Fuel - handling........................................ 289
Fuel - petrol............................................. 290
Fuel - diesel............................................. 290
Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 292
Catalytic converters................................ 292
Economical driving.................................. 293
Driving with a trailer*............................... 294
Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox.. 295
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gear-
box.......................................................... 295
Towing bracket/Towbar*......................... 296
Detachable towbar* - storage................. 296
Detachable towbar* - specifications....... 297
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal................................................... 297
Towing.................................................... 300
Towing eye.............................................. 301
Recovery................................................. 302

Table of contents
8
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - maintenance............................... 304
Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 305
Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 306
Tyres - air pressure................................. 306
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 308
Tyres - dimensions.................................. 308
Tyres - load index................................... 309
Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 309
Wheel bolts............................................. 310
Winter tyres............................................. 310
Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 311
Changing wheels - fitting........................ 313
Warning triangle...................................... 314
Tools....................................................... 315
Jack*....................................................... 315
First aid kit*............................................. 316
Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 316
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - general.................................... 317
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* -
adjust (recalibration)................................ 318
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - status...................................... 319
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti-
vate/deactivate....................................... 320
09
   
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec-
ommendations........................................ 320
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - driv-
eable punctured tyres*............................ 321
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti-
fying low tyre pressure............................ 321
Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)*............... 322
Emergency puncture repair*................... 323
Emergency puncture repair kit* - loca-
tion.......................................................... 324
Emergency puncture repair kit* - over-
view......................................................... 325
Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 325
Emergency puncture repair* - recheck-
ing........................................................... 327
Emergency puncture repair kit* - inflating
the tyres.................................................. 328
Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 329
Type approval - tyre pressure monitoring
(TPMS).................................................... 330
10
10 Maintenance and service
Volvo service programme....................... 337
Book service and repair*......................... 337
Raising the car........................................ 340
Bonnet - opening and closing................. 342
Engine compartment - overview............. 342
Engine compartment - checking............. 343
Engine oil - general................................. 344
Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 345
Coolant - level......................................... 348
Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 349
Power steering fluid - level...................... 350
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair....................................................... 351
Lamp replacement - general................... 351
Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 352
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 353
Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 353
Lamp replacement - main beam............. 354
Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 354
Lamp replacement - direction indicators
front......................................................... 354
Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 355
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps...................................................... 355

Table of contents
9
10
   
Lamp replacement - number plate light-
ing........................................................... 356
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area......................................................... 356
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light-
ing........................................................... 357
Lamps - specifications ........................... 357
Wiper blades........................................... 358
Washer fluid - filling................................ 360
Starter battery - general.......................... 360
Battery - symbols.................................... 362
Starter battery - replacement.................. 363
Battery - Start/Stop................................. 364
Electrical system..................................... 366
Fuses - general....................................... 367
Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 368
Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 372
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox................................................. 374
Fuses - in cargo area.............................. 376
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone................................................ 378
Car wash................................................. 380
Polishing and waxing.............................. 381
Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 382
10
   
Rustproofing........................................... 383
Cleaning the interior................................ 383
Paint damage.......................................... 384
11
11 Specifications
Type designations................................... 387
Dimensions............................................. 390
Weights................................................... 391
Towing capacity and towball load.......... 392
Engine specifications.............................. 393
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 394
Engine oil - grade and volume................ 395
Coolant - grade and volume................... 397
Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 398
Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 399
Power steering fluid - grade.................... 399
Fuel tank - volume.................................. 400
Specifications for air conditioning.......... 401
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 402
Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 404

Table of contents

12 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 406

Table of contents

INTRODUCTION

01 Introduction

}}

Owner's Manual in the car's screen

A digital version of the owner's manual is

available

on the car's screen. The owner's

manual provides information about how the

car works.

For cars with owner information in the screen,

the printed owner's manual is a supplement

and contains important text, the latest

updates, as well as instructions that can be

useful when, for practical reasons, it is not

possible to read the information on the

screen.

The owner's manual is also available on Vol-

vo's support page and can be downloaded as

a mobile app.

Changing the screen's language may mean

that certain information is no longer in

accordance with national or local laws and

regulations.

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the

vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that

applicable laws and regulations are fol-

lowed. It is also important that the car is

maintained and handled in accordance

with Volvo's recommendations in the

owner's information.

If there should be a difference between the

information on the screen and in the prin-

ted manual then it is always the printed

information that applies.

Reading the owner's manual

A good way of getting to know your new car

is to read the owner's manual, ideally before

your first journey.

Reading the owner's manual is a good way to

become familiar with new functions, get

advice on how best to handle the car in differ-

ent situations and learn how to make the best

use of all the car's features. Please pay atten-

tion to the safety instructions contained in the

owner's manual.

The specifications, design features and illus-

trations in the owner's manual are not bind-

ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-

tions without prior notice.

IMPORTANT

Do not remove this manual from the car -

should a problem arise then the informa-

tion required about where and how to seek

professional help would be missing.

Applies to certain car models.

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Owner's Manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The Owner's manual is available for down-

load as a mobile application (applies for

certain car models and mobile devices),

see www.volvocars.com.

The mobile application also includes video

and searchable content and easy naviga-

tion between different sections.

Options/accessories

All types of option/accessory are marked with

an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, the

owner's manual also describes options (fac-

tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories

(retrofitted extra equipment).

The equipment described in the owner's

manual is not available in all cars - they have

different equipment depending on adapta-

tions for the needs of different markets and

national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-

ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo

dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts appear if there is a risk of

injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of

damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili-

tate the use of e.g. features and functions.

Footnote

There is footnote information in the owner's

manual that is located at the bottom of the

page. This information is an addition to the

text that it refers to via a number. If the foot-

note refers to text in a table then letters are

used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts

In the car there are displays that show menu

texts and message texts. In the owner's man-

ual the appearance of these texts differs from

the normal text. Examples of menu texts and

message texts:

Media, Sending location.

Decals

The car contains different types of decal

which are designed to convey important

information in a simple and clear manner. The

decals in the car have the following descend-

ing degree of importance for the warning/

information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,

white text/image on black message field.

Used to indicate the presence of danger

which, if the warning is ignored, may result in

serious personal injury or fatality.

01 Introduction

}}

Risk of property damage

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black or blue warning field and message field.

Used to indicate the presence of danger

which, if the warning is ignored, may result in

damage to property.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated

in the owner's manual should be exact

replicas of those in the car. They are

included to show their approximate

appearance and location in the car. The

information that applies to your particular

car can be found on the decal on the car.

Procedure lists

Procedures where action must be taken in a

certain sequence are numbered in the

owner's manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for

step-by-step instructions each step is

numbered in the same way as the corres-

ponding illustration.

Lists of letters appear adjacent to the ser-

ies of illustrations where the order of the

instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-

bered and are used to illustrate a move-

ment.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a

movement when the reciprocal order is of

no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

step instructions then the different steps are

numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used

in overview images where different com-

ponents are pointed out. The number

recurs in the position list featured in con-

nection with the illustration that describes

the item.

Bulleted lists

A bulleted list is used when there is a list of

points in the owner's manual.

Example:

•

Coolant

•

Engine oil

01 Introduction

Related information

Related information refers to other articles

containing closely-associated information.

Images

The manual's images are sometimes sche-

matic and may deviate from the car's appear-

ance depending on equipment level and mar-

ket.

To be continued

}} This symbol is located furthest down to

the right when an article continues on the fol-

lowing page.

Continued from previous page

|| This symbol is located furthest up to the

left when an article continues from the previ-

ous page.

Related information

•

The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 24)

•

Support and information about the car on

the Internet (p. 20)

Digital owner's manual in the car

The owner's manual can be read on the

screen in the car

. The content is searchable

and it is easy to navigate between different

sections.

Open the digital owner's manual - press the

MY CAR button in the centre console, press

OK/MENU and select

Owner's manual.

For basic navigation, see Operating the sys-

tem. See below for a more detailed descrip-

tion.

Owner's manual, start page.

There are four options for finding information

in the digital owner's manual:

•

Search - Search function for finding an

article.

•

Categories - All articles sorted into cate-

gories.

•

Favourites - Quick access to favourite-

bookmarked articles.

•

Quick Guide - A selection of articles for

common functions.

Select the information symbol in the lower

right-hand corner in order to obtain informa-

tion about the digital owner's manual.

NOTE

The digital owner's manual is not available

while driving.

Applies to certain car models.

01 Introduction

}}

Searching using the character wheel.

Character list.

Changing the input mode (see following

table).

Use the character wheel to enter a search

term, e.g. "seatbelt".

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number and

letter buttons on the control panel in the

centre console can also be used.

2. Continue with the next letter and so on.

3. To change the input mode to numbers or

special characters, or to perform a

search, turn TUNE to one of the options

(see explanation in the following table) in

the list for changing the input mode (2),

press OK/MENU.

123/AB

Change between letters and

numbers with OK/MENU.

Change to special characters

with OK/MENU.

Perform the search. Turn TUNE

to select a search result article,

press OK/MENU to go to the

article.

a|A

Changes between lowercase

and uppercase letters with OK/

MENU.

| | }

Changes from the character

wheel to the search field. Move

the cursor with TUNE. Delete

any misspelling with EXIT. To

return to the character wheel,

press OK/MENU.

Note that the digit and letter

buttons on the control panel

can be used for editing in the

search field.

Enter with the numerical keyboard

Numerical keyboard.

Another way of entering characters is to use

the centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.

When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all

characters

under the button, e.g.

W, x, y, z

and 9. Quick presses on the button move the

cursor through these characters.

•

Stop with the cursor on the desired char-

acter in order to select it - the character is

shown on the enter line.

•

Delete/undo using EXIT.

To enter a number, hold in the corresponding

number key.

Categories

The articles in the owner's manual are struc-

tured into main categories and subcategories.

The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.

01 Introduction

The same article can be in several appropri-

ate categories in order to be found more

easily.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree

and press OK/MENU to open a category -

selected

- or article - selected . Press

EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Favourites

Located here are the articles that are saved

as favourites. To select an article as a favour-

ite, see the heading "Navigating in an article"

below.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list

and press OK/MENU to open an article.

Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Quick Guide

Located here is a selection of articles for get-

ting to know the car's most common func-

tions. The articles can also be accessed via

categories, but are collected here for quick

access.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide

and press OK/MENU to open an article.

Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Navigating in an article

Home - leads to the start page for the

owner's manual.

Favourite - adds/removes an article as a

favourite. You can also press the FAV

button in the centre console to add/

remove an article as a favourite.

Highlighted link - leads to linked article.

Special texts - if the article contains

warnings, important or note texts then an

associated symbol is shown here as well

as the number of such texts in the article.

Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or

scroll in an article. When the screen has

scrolled to the start/end of an article the

home and favourite options are accessed by

scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/

MENU to activate the selection/highlighted

link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous

view.

Recording data

Certain information about the vehicle's opera-

tion and functionality, and any incidents, are

recorded in the car.

Your vehicle contains a number of computers

whose function is to continuously check and

monitor the vehicle's operation and function-

ality. Some of the computers can record

information during normal driving if they

detect an error. In addition, information is

recorded in the event of a collision or inci-

dent. Parts of the recorded information are

required so that technicians can diagnose

and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic-

ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can

fulfil legal requirements and other regulations.

In addition to this, the information is used for

research purposes by Volvo in order to con-

tinually develop quality and safety, as the

information can contribute to a better under-

standing of the factors that cause accidents

and injuries.

The information includes details of the status

and functionality of various systems and

modules in the vehicle with regard to engine,

throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst

other things. This information may include

details regarding the way the driver drives the

vehicle, such as vehicle speed, brake and

accelerator pedal use, steering wheel move-

ment and whether or not the driver and pas-

sengers have used their seatbelts. For the

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

reasons given this information may be stored

in the vehicle's computers for a certain length

of time, but also as a result of a collision or

incident. This information may be stored by

Volvo as long as it can help to further develop

and further enhance safety and quality and as

long as there are legal requirements and

other regulations that Volvo needs to con-

sider.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-

bed information being disclosed to third par-

ties without the vehicle owner's consent.

However, due to national legislation and reg-

ulations Volvo may be required to disclose

such information to authorities such as police

authorities, or others who may assert a legal

right to have access to it.

To be able to read and interpret the informa-

tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle

requires special technical equipment that

Volvo, and workshops that have entered into

agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo

is responsible that the information, which is

transferred to Volvo during servicing and

maintenance, is stored and handled in a

secure manner and that the handling com-

plies with applicable legal requirements. For

further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of

accessories and extra equipment can nega-

tively affect the car's electronic system.

Certain accessories only function when asso-

ciated software is installed in the car's com-

puter system. Volvo therefore recommends

that you always contact an authorised Volvo

workshop before installing accessories or

extra equipment which are connected to or

affect the electrical system.

Heat-reflecting windscreen*

The windscreen is equipped with a heat-

reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat

radiation into the passenger compartment.

The positioning of electronic equipment, such

as a transponder, behind a glass surface with

heat-reflecting film may affect its function and

performance.

For the optimal function of electronic equip-

ment, it should be positioned on the part of

the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film

(see the highlighted area in the illustration).

Areas where IR film is not applied.

A is the distance from the top edge of the

windscreen down to the start of the field. B is

the distance from the top edge of the wind-

screen down to the end of the field.

Dimensions

A 47 mm

B 87 mm

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Support and information about the car

on the Internet

There is additional information regarding your

car on the Volvo Cars website and support

page. From the website, it is also possible to

navigate through to My Volvo, a personal web

page for you and your car.

Support on the Internet

Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR

code below to visit the page. The support

page is available for most markets.

QR code that leads to the support page.

The information on the support page is

searchable and can also be subdivided into

different categories. Available here is support

for options related to e.g. Internet connected

services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC)*,

the navigation system* and apps. Video and

step-by-step instructions explain different

procedures, e.g. how the car is connected to

the Internet via a mobile phone.

Downloadable information from the

support page

Maps

For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*,

there is the facility to download maps from

the support page.

Mobile apps

For selected Volvo models from model year

2014 and 2015, the owner's manual is availa-

ble in the form of an app. The VOC* app can

also be accessed from here.

Owner's manuals from previous model

years

Owner's manuals from previous model years

are available here in PDF format. The Quick

Guide and supplement can also be accessed

from the support page. Select car model and

model year in order to download the publica-

tion required.

Contact

On the support page there is contact informa-

tion for customer support and the nearest

Volvo dealer.

My Volvo on the Internet

From www.volvocars.com it is possible to

navigate through to My Volvo Web which is a

personal Web page for you and your car.

Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo

Web and get an overview of service, agree-

ments and warranties, amongst other things.

At My Volvo Web there is also information

about accessories and software adapted for

your car model.

Related information

•

Volvo ID (p. 21)

Applies to certain markets.

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo ID

Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides

access to various services

Examples of services:

•

My Volvo - Your personal web page for

you and your car.

•

In an Internet-connected car* - Certain

functions and services require that you

have registered your car to a personal

Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a

new address from a map service on the

Internet directly to the car.

•

Volvo On Call, VOC* - Volvo ID is used

when logging in to the Volvo On Call

mobile app.

Advantages of Volvo ID

•

One user name and one password to

access online services, i.e. only one user-

name and one password to remember.

•

When changing the username/password

for a service (e.g. VOC) it will also be

changed automatically for other services

(e.g. My Volvo)

Create a Volvo ID

To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a per-

sonal e-mail address. Then follow the instruc-

tions in the e-mail message that is automati-

cally sent to the specified address in order to

complete the registration. It is possible to cre-

ate a Volvo ID via one of the following serv-

ices:

•

My Volvo - Enter your e-mail address and

follow the instructions.

•

For an Internet-connected car* - Enter

your e-mail address in the app that

requires Volvo ID and follow the instruc-

tions. Alternatively, press the Connect

button

in the centre console twice and

select

Apps Settings and follow the

instructions.

•

Volvo On Call, VOC* - Download the lat-

est version of the VOC app. Choose to

create a Volvo ID from the start page,

enter e-mail address and follow the

instructions.

Related information

•

Support and information about the car on

the Internet (p. 20)

The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Environmental philosophy

Your Volvo complies with strict international

environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most

resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo

Car Corporation is constantly working on the

development of safer and more efficient prod-

ucts and solutions in order to reduce the neg-

ative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars' core

values, which influence all operations. We

also believe that our customers share our

consideration for the environment.

Volvo Cars has global ISO certification, which

includes the environmental standard ISO

14001 covering all factories and several of

our other units. We also set requirements for

our partners so that they work systematically

with environmental issues.

Fuel consumption

Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump-

tion in each of their respective classes. Lower

fuel consumption generally results in lower

emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox-

ide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel

consumption. For more information, read

under the heading "Contributing to a better

environment".

Efficient emission control

Your Volvo is manufactured following the

concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept

that encompasses a clean interior environ-

ment as well as highly efficient emission con-

trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are

well below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger

compartment

A passenger compartment filter prevents dust

and pollen from entering the passenger com-

partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system Interior Air

Quality System* (IAQS) ensures that the

incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf-

fic outside.

The system consists of an electronic sensor

and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-

tored continuously and if there is an increase

in the level of certain unhealthy gases, such

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

as carbon monoxide, then the air intake is

closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy

traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level

ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the

carbon filter.

Interior

The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-

sant and comfortable, even for people with

contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Extreme attention has been given to choosing

environmentally-compatible materials.

Volvo workshops and the environment

Regular maintenance creates the conditions

for a long service life and low fuel consump-

tion for your car. In this way you contribute to

a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work-

shops are entrusted with the service and

maintenance of your car it becomes part of

our system. Volvo makes clear demands

regarding the way in which our workshops

are designed in order to prevent spills and

discharges into the environment. Our work-

shop staff have the knowledge and the tools

required to guarantee good environmental

care.

Contributing to a better environment

It is easy to contribute to a better environ-

ment - here are a few tips:

•

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off

the engine when stationary for longer

periods. Pay attention to local regula-

tions.

•

Drive economically - think ahead.

•

Perform service and maintenance in

accordance with the instructions in the

owner's manual - follow the Service and

Warranty Booklet's recommended inter-

vals.

•

If the car is equipped with an engine

block heater*, use it before starting from

cold - it improves starting capacity and

reduces wear in cold weather and the

engine reaches normal operating tem-

perature more quickly, which lowers con-

sumption and reduces emissions.

•

High speed increases consumption con-

siderably due to increased wind resis-

tance - a doubling of speed increases

wind resistance 4 times.

•

Always dispose of environmentally hazar-

dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in

an environmentally safe manner. Consult

a workshop in the event of uncertainty

about how this type of waste should be

discarded - an authorised Volvo work-

shop is recommended.

Following this advice can save money, the

planet's resources are saved, and the car's

durability is extended. For more information

and further advice see Eco guide (p. 64),

Economical driving (p. 293) and Fuel con-

sumption (p. 402).

Recycling

As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is

important that the car is recycled in an envi-

ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the

car can be recycled. The last owner of the car

is therefore requested to contact a dealer for

referral to a certified/approved recycling

facility.

Related information

•

The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 24)

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The owner's manual and the

environment

The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual

comes from Forest Stewardship Council

cer-

tified forests or other controlled sources.

The FSC

symbol shows that the paper pulp

in a printed owner's manual comes from

FSC

certified forests or other controlled

sources.

Related information

•

Environmental philosophy (p. 22)

Laminated glass

The glass is reinforced which pro-

vides better protection against

break-ins and improved sound insu-

lation in the passenger compart-

ment. The windscreen and the side windows*

have laminated glass.

SAFETY

02 Safety

General information on seatbelts

Heavy braking can have serious consequen-

ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that

all passengers are using their seatbelts during

the journey.

Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the

diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

The hip strap must be positioned low down (not

over the abdomen).

It is important that the seatbelt lies against

the body so it can provide maximum protec-

tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back.

The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor-

mal seating position.

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-

ten their (p. 27) seatbelt by means of an

audio and visual reminder (p. 28).

Remember

•

Do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

•

The seatbelt must not be twisted or

caught on anything.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a

seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,

this may diminish the protection provided

by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-

son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-

self. Volvo recommends that you contact

an authorised Volvo workshop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major

load, such as in conjunction with a colli-

sion, the entire seatbelt must be replaced.

Some of the protective characteristics of

the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it

appears to be undamaged. In addition,

replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or

damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-

approved and intended for installation in

the same position as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information

•

Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 28)

•

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 27)

•

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 29)

02 Safety

Seatbelt - putting on

Put on the seatbelt (p. 26) before driving

starts.

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by

pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt

buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt

has locked.

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on

the shoulder.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the

rear seat

Remember

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

•

if it is pulled out too quickly

•

during braking and acceleration

•

if the car leans heavily.

Related information

•

Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 28)

•

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 27)

•

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 29)

•

Seatbelt reminder (p. 28)

Seatbelt - loosening

Loosen the seatbelt (p. 26) when the car is

stationary.

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle

and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt

does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so

that it does not hang loose.

Related information

•

Seatbelt - putting on (p. 27)

•

Seatbelt reminder (p. 28)

Certain markets.

02 Safety

Seatbelt - pregnancy

Seatbelt (p. 26) must always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in

the correct way.

G020998

The diagonal section should wrap over the

shoulder then be routed between the breasts

and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs

and as low as possible under the abdomen. –

It must never be allowed to ride upward.

Remove the slack from the seatbelt and

ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos-

sible. In addition, check that there are no

twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri-

vers must adjust the seat (p. 77) and steer-

ing wheel (p. 80) such that they can easily

maintain control of the vehicle as they drive

(which means that they must be able to easily

operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).

The aim should be to position the seat with as

large a distance as possible between abdo-

men and steering wheel.

Related information

•

Seatbelt - putting on (p. 27)

•

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 27)

Seatbelt reminder

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-

ten their (p. 27) seatbelt by means of an audio

and visual reminder.

G017726

The audio reminder is speed dependent, and

in some cases time dependent. The visual

reminder is located in the roof console and in

the combined instrument panel (p. 60).

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt

reminder system.

Rear seat

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two

subfunctions:

•

Provides information on which seatbelts

(p. 26) are being used in the rear seat. A

message appears in the combined instru-

ment panel when the seatbelts are in use,

or if one of the rear doors has been

opened. The message is cleared auto-

02 Safety

}}

matically after driving for approximately

30 seconds or after pressing the indicator

stalk OK button (p. 107).

•

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-

belts is unfastened during travel. This

warning takes the form of a message in

the combined instrument panel along with

the audio/visual signal. The warning stops

when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can

also be acknowledged manually by

pressing the OK button.

The message in the combined instrument

panel showing which seatbelts are in use is

always shown. Press the OK button to see

stored messages.

Certain markets

An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind

the driver and front seat passenger to use a

seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.

At low speed, the audio reminder will sound

for the first 6 seconds.

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts (p. 26) are equipped with belt

tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-

sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a

sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then

provides more effective restraint for the occu-

pants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger's

seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's

side. Always insert the tongue of the seat-

belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do

not make any damages on seatbelts nor

insert any foreign objects into a buckle.

The seatbelts and buckles would then

possibly not function as intended in the

event of a collision. There is a risk of

serous injury.

Safety - warning symbol

The warning symbol is shown if a fault is

detected during fault tracing or if a system

has been activated. Where required, the

warning symbol is shown together with a

message in the combined instrument panel

(p. 60) information display.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air-

bag system (p. 30) in the analogue combined

instrument panel.

02 Safety

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air-

bag system in the digital combined instrument

panel.

The warning symbol in the combined instru-

ment panel illuminates when the remote con-

trol key is in key position II (p. 75). The sym-

bol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided

the airbag system is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag sys-

tem remains illuminated or illuminates

while driving, it means that the airbag sys-

tem does not have full functionality. The

symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt ten-

sioner system, SIPS, the IC system or

some other fault in the system. Volvo rec-

ommends that you contact an authorised

Volvo workshop immediately.

If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warn-

ing triangle illuminates and

SRS airbag

Service required

or SRS airbag Service

urgent appears in the display. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop immediately.

Related information

•

General information on safety mode

(p. 40)

Airbag system

In the event of a frontal collision the airbag

system helps to protect the head, face and

chest of the driver and passenger.

G018665

Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-

drive car.

G018666

Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-

drive car.

02 Safety

The system consists of airbags and sensors.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors

and the airbag(s) are inflated and become

hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision

impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates

when compressed by the collision. When this

occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is

completely normal. The entire process,

including inflation and deflation of the airbag,

occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an

authorised Volvo workshop for repair.

Defective work in the airbag system could

cause malfunction and result in serious

personal injury.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending

on the nature of the collision and whether

or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies

to all belt positions.

It is therefore possible that only one (or

none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-

sion. The detectors sense the force of the

collision on the vehicle and the action is

adapted accordingly so that one or more

airbags are deployed.

Related information

•

Driver airbag (p. 31)

•

Passenger airbag (p. 32)

•

Safety - warning symbol (p. 29)

Driver airbag

To supplement the protection afforded by the

seatbelt (p. 26) the car is equipped on the

driver's side with an airbag (p. 30).

This airbag is fitted into the centre of the

steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked

AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the

belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this

may diminish the protection provided by

the airbag in the event of a collision.

Related information

•

Passenger airbag (p. 32)

02 Safety

Passenger airbag

To supplement the protection afforded by the

seatbelt (p. 26) on the passenger side, the car

is equipped with an airbag (p. 30).

The airbag is folded up into a compartment

above the glovebox. Its cover panel is

marked AIRBAG.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-

hand drive car.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-

hand drive car.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is

fitted in one of the following two locations in

the car:

Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen-

ger side sun visor.

Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-

ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible

when the passenger door is opened.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on a

seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail-

ure to follow this advice can lead to death

or serious injury to the child.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the

belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this

may diminish the protection provided by

the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag

deploys, passengers must sit as upright as

possible with their feet on the floor and

backs against the backrest. Seatbelts

must be secured.

02 Safety
02
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
33
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-
bag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deacti-
vated (p. 33) if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch).
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passen-
ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
then the airbag will always be activated.
Related information
•
Driver airbag (p. 31)
•
Child seats (p. 43)
Passenger airbag - activating/
deactivating*
Front passenger airbag (p. 32) can be deacti-
vated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
Switch - PACOS
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion. The remote control key's key blade
(p. 164) should be used to change position.
Location of airbag switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger
seat when the airbag is activated. This
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the air-
bag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 75) the warning symbol
(p. 29) for the airbag is shown in the com-
bined instrument panel for
approx. 6 seconds.
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.

02 Safety

G017800

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is

activated.

A warning symbol in the roof console indi-

cates that the airbag for the front passenger

seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a

booster cushion in the front seat if the air-

bag is activated and the symbol

the roof console is illuminated. Failure to

follow this advice could endanger the life

of the child.

G017724

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is

deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof con-

sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-

senger seat is deactivated (see preceding

illustration).

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-

senger seat if the message in the roof con-

sole indicates that the airbag is deacti-

vated, and if the warning symbol (p. 29) for

the airbag system is also displayed on the

combined instrument panel. This indicates

that there has been a severe malfunction.

Visit a workshop as soon as possible.

Volvo recommends that you contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above

can endanger the lives of passengers in

the car.

Related information

•

Child seats (p. 43)

02 Safety

Side airbag (SIPS)

In a side impact collision a large proportion of

the collision force is transferred by the SIPS

(Side Impact Protection System) to beams,

pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural

parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-

er's and front passenger seats protect the

chest area and the hip and are an important

part of the SIPS.

G032949

The SIPS bag system consists of two main

components, side airbag and sensors. The

side airbags are located in the front seat's

backrests.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors

and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag

inflates between the occupant and the door

panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.

The airbag deflates when compressed by the

collision. The side airbag is normally only

deployed on the side of the collision.

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

WARNING

•

Volvo recommends that repairs are

only carried out by an authorised Volvo

workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-

bag system could cause malfunction

and result in serious personal injury.

•

Do not put objects in the area between

the outside of the seat and the door

panel, since this area is required by

the side airbag.

•

Volvo recommends the use only of car

seat covers approved by Volvo. Other

seat covers may impede the operation

of the side airbags.

•

Side airbags are a supplement the

seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information

•

Driver airbag (p. 31)

•

Passenger airbag (p. 32)

•

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster

cushion (p. 36)

•

Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 36)

02 Safety
02
36
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 35).
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 43) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided
that the car does not have an activated airbag
(p. 33) on the front passenger side.
Related information
•
Passenger airbag (p. 32)
•
General information on child safety
(p. 42)
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their
heads on the inside of the car during a colli-
sion.
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part
of the SIPS system (p. 35) and the airbag sys-
tem (p. 30). It is fitted along both sides of the
headlining and helps protect the driver and
passengers in the car's outer seats. A suffi-
ciently violent collision trips the sensors and
the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side pan-
els. This could compromise the intended
protection. Volvo recommends that you
only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the windows in the
doors. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is con-
cealed in the headlining, may be compro-
mised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 26)

02 Safety

General information on WHIPS

(whiplash protection)

WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro-

tection against whiplash injuries. The system

consists of energy absorbing backrests and

specially designed head restraints in the front

seats.

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the

collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi-

cle all have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the

seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Seat properties

When the WHIPS system is deployed, the

front seat backrests are lowered backward to

change the seating position of the driver and

front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of

whiplash injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS

system yourself. Volvo recommends that

you contact an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Related information

•

WHIPS - child seats (p. 38)

•

WHIPS - seating position (p. 38)

•

General information on seatbelts (p. 26)

02 Safety
02
38
WHIPS - child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system
(p. 37).
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 43) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided
that the car does not have an activated airbag
(p. 33) on the front passenger side.
Related information
•
General information on child safety
(p. 42)
WHIPS - seating position
For optimum protection from the WHIPS sys-
tem (p. 37) the driver and passenger must
have the correct seating position and make
sure that the system's function is not obstruc-
ted.
Seating position
Set the correct seating position in the front
seat (p. 77) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
the centre of the seat with as little space as
possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Function
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's
backrest. Make sure you do not to
obstruct the function of the WHIPS sys-
tem.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact
with the folded backrest.

02 Safety
02
}}
39
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked.
Volvo recommends that it is checked by
an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seat appears to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
system checked even after a minor rear-
end collision.
When the systems deploy
In the event of a collision Volvo's different
personal safety systems work together in
order to minimise injury.
System Triggered
Seatbelt ten-
sioner (p. 29) front
seat
In the event of a
frontal collision,
and/or side-impact
collision, and/or rear-
end collision and/or
overturning
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or
overturning
Airbags
(Steering wheel
(p. 31) and pas-
senger airbag
(p. 32))
In a frontal collision
A
Side airbags
(SIPS) (p. 35)
In a side-impact
accident
A
System Triggered
Inflatable Curtain
IC (p. 36)
In the event of a
side-impact collision
and/or certain frontal
collisions
A
Whiplash protec-
tion WHIPS (p. 37)
In a rear-end collision
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags (p. 30) have deployed, the fol-
lowing is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an author-
ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.

02 Safety

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is

located in the centre console. If the centre

console is drenched with water or other

liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do

not attempt to start the car since the air-

bags may deploy. Recovering the car.

Volvo recommends that you have it con-

veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They

can make steering difficult. Other safety

systems may also be damaged. The

smoke and dust created when the airbags

are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita-

tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case

of irritation, wash with cold water. The

rapid deployment sequence and airbag

fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

General information on safety mode

Safety mode is a protective state that is

enforced when the collision may have dam-

aged any of the car's vital functions, such as

the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety

systems, or the brake system.

Warning triangle in the analogue combined

instrument panel.

Warning triangle in the digital combined instru-

ment panel.

If the car is involved in a collision, the text

Safety mode See manual may appear in the

combined instrument panel (p. 60) informa-

tion display. This means that the car has

reduced functionality.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset

the electronics yourself if the car has been

in safety mode. This could result in per-

sonal injury or the car not functioning as

normal. Volvo recommends that you

engage an authorised Volvo workshop to

check and restore the car to normal status

after

Safety mode See manual has been

displayed.

02 Safety

Related information

•

Safety mode - attempting to start the car

(p. 41)

•

Safety mode - moving the car (p. 42)

Safety mode - attempting to start the

car

If the car is set in safety mode (p. 40) then an

attempt to start the car can be made if every-

thing seems normal and the absence of fuel

leakage has been checked.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the

car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have

checked for indications of fuel leakage, you

may attempt to start the car.

Remove the remote control key and open the

driver's door. If a message is now shown to

the effect that the ignition is on, press the

start button. Then close the door and reinsert

the remote control key. The car's electronics

will now try to reset themselves to normal

mode. Then try to start the car.

If the message

Safety mode See manual is

still shown on the display then the car must

not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery

service (p. 302) used instead. Even if the car

appears to be driveable, hidden damage may

make the car impossible to control once mov-

ing.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt

to restart the car if it smells of fuel when

the

Safety mode See manual message

is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be

towed. It must be transported from its

location. Volvo recommends that it is

transported to an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Related information

•

Safety mode - moving the car (p. 42)

02 Safety
02
42
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Safety mode - moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset after attempting
to start the car (p. 41) , the car can be moved
carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
Related information
•
General information on safety mode
(p. 40)
General information on child safety
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the
choice of equipment are dictated by the
child's weight and size; see Child seats
(p. 43).
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro-
vides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child safety locks
The rear doors and rear door windows* can
be blocked manually (p. 177) or electronically
(p. 178)* from opening from the inside.
Related information
•
Child seats - location (p. 47)
•
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)
•
Child seats - upper mounting points
(p. 52)

02 Safety

}}

Child seats

Children should sit comfortably and safely.

Make sure that the child seat is being used

correctly.

G020739

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is

important to read the installation instruc-

tions included.

WARNING

Do not secure the straps of the child seat

to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,

springs or the rails and beams under the

seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the

child seat for the correct fitting.

02 Safety

Recommended child seats

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing

child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys-

tem.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-

facing child seat, secured with the car's

seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant

Seat) - rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-

facing child seat, secured with the car's

seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and

straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child

Seat) - rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Child seats which are universally

approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally

approved.

(U)

With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

02 Safety

}}

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo

Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and

straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo

Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-

facing child seat, secured with the car's

seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and

straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child

Seat) - rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured

with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Child seats which are universally

approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally

approved.

(U)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo

Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and

straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo

Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

02 Safety

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo

Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo

Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child

seat (Volvo Convertible Child

Seat) - front-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and without backrest

(Booster Cushion with and without

backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest

(Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without

backrest (Booster Cushion with

and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo

Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster

Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest

(Volvo Booster Seat with

backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

Related information

•

Child seats - location (p. 47)

•

Child seats - upper mounting points

(p. 52)

•

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

•

General information on child safety (p. 42)

02 Safety

Child seats - location

Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 43)

in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti-

vated (p. 33). If a child is sitting on the front

passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri-

ous injury if the airbag deploys.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is

fitted in one of the following two locations in

the car:

Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen-

ger side sun visor.

Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-

ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible

when the passenger door is opened.

You may place:

•

a child seat/booster cushion on the front

passenger seat provided there is no acti-

vated airbag on the front passenger side.

•

one or more child seats/booster cushions

in the rear seat.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on a

seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail-

ure to follow this advice can lead to death

or serious injury to the child.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a

booster cushion in the front seat if the air-

bag is activated.

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front

of the front passenger seat.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever

sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag

is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above

can endanger life.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel

braces or some other design that could

rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but-

ton must not be used, as they could cause

the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child

seat to rest against the windscreen.

Related information

•

General information on child safety (p. 42)

•

Child seats - upper mounting points

(p. 52)

•

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

02 Safety

Child seat - ISOFIX

ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats

(p. 43) that is based on an international stand-

ard.

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system

are concealed behind the lower section of the

rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indi-

cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery

(see preceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access the

mounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions when connecting a child seat to

the ISOFIX mounting points.

Related information

•

ISOFIX - size classes (p. 48)

•

ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 50)

•

General information on child safety (p. 42)

ISOFIX - size classes

There is a size classification for child seats

using the ISOFIX (p. 48) fixture system in

order to assist users in choosing the correct

type of child seat (p. 50).

Size

class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child

seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-

facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac-

ing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing

child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left-

hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-

hand

02 Safety

WARNING

Never place the child in the passenger

seat if the car is fitted with an activated air-

bag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-

cation, the car model must be included on

the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an

authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-

tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo

recommends.

02 Safety

ISOFIX - types of child seat

Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in

different sizes. This means that not all child

seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod-

els.

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

02 Safety

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X

(IUF)

B1 X

(IUF)

A X

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class

(p. 48) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 48) fixture

system.

02 Safety

Child seats - upper mounting points

The car is equipped with upper mounting

points for child seats (p. 43). These mounting

points are located on the parcel shelf and are

concealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the

plastic covers to access each respective

mounting point.

For cars with folding head restraints on the

outside seats the head restraints should be

folded to facilitate installation.

The upper mounting points are primarily

intended for use with front-facing child seats.

Volvo recommends that small children should

sit in rear-facing child seats for as long as

possible.

For detailed information on how the child seat

should be tensioned in the upper mounting

points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always be

drawn through the hole in the head

restraint leg before they are tensioned at

the attachment point.

Related information

•

General information on child safety (p. 42)

•

Child seats - location (p. 47)

•

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

03 Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls, left-hand

drive car - overview

The overview shows where the car's displays

and controls are located.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Overview, left-hand drive cars

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
56
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function See
Menus and mes-
sages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
(p. 107),
(p. 109),
(p. 91),
(p. 86) and
(p. 120).
Manual gear chang-
ing in an automatic
gearbox*
(p. 261).
Cruise control* (p. 191) and
(p. 193).
Horn, airbags (p. 80) and
(p. 30).
Combined instru-
ment panel
(p. 60).
Menu navigation,
audio control,
phone control*
(p. 110) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 253).
Ignition switch (p. 75).
Screen for infotain-
ment system and
display of menus
(p. 110) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Function See
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 90).
Door handle -
Control panel (p. 173),
(p. 178),
(p. 99) and
(p. 101).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu naviga-
tion
(p. 110) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Control panel for cli-
mate control
(p. 129).
Gear selector (p. 259),
(p. 261) or
(p. 264).
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 183).
Wipers and washing (p. 98).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 80).
Parking brake (p. 281).
Bonnet opener (p. 342).
Function See
Seat adjustment* (p. 78).
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and boot lid
(p. 82),
(p. 288) and
(p. 175).
Related information
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 69)
•
Trip meter (p. 69)
•
Clock (p. 70)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Instruments and controls, right-hand

drive car - overview

The overview shows where the car's displays

and controls are located.

03 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
Function See
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 90).
Screen for infotain-
ment system and
display of menus
(p. 110) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 253).
Ignition switch (p. 75).
Manual gear chang-
ing in an automatic
gearbox*
(p. 261).
Cruise control* (p. 191) and
(p. 193).
Combined instru-
ment panel
(p. 60).
Horn, airbags (p. 80) and
(p. 30).
Menu navigation,
audio control,
phone control*
(p. 110) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Wipers and washing (p. 98).
Function See
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and boot lid
(p. 82),
(p. 288) and
(p. 175).
Door handle -
Control panel (p. 173),
(p. 178),
(p. 99) and
(p. 101).
Seat adjustment* (p. 78).
Bonnet opener (p. 342).
Parking brake (p. 281).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 80).
Menus and mes-
sages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
(p. 107),
(p. 109),
(p. 91),
(p. 86) and
(p. 120).
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 183).
Gear selector (p. 259),
(p. 261) or
(p. 264).
Function See
Control panel for cli-
mate control
(p. 129).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu naviga-
tion
(p. 110) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Related information
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 69)
•
Trip meter (p. 69)
•
Clock (p. 70)

03 Instruments and controls
03
60
Combined instrument panel
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
•
Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 60)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 61)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 65)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 67)
Analogue combined instrument panel
- overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
Information display
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The informa-
tion is shown with symbols and text. There
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
Gauges and indicators
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
1
, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 120) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 288).
Eco meter The meter provides an indica-
tion of how economically the car is being
driven. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more economical it is.
Speedometer
1
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "
----", the marking becomes red.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator
2
/Gear position indica-
tor
3
 See also Gear shift indicator*
(p. 260), Automatic gearbox --
Geartronic* (p. 261) or Automatic gear-
box -- Powershift* (p. 264).
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru-
ment panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
4
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information dis-
play, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has
started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function-
ality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-
sure.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 65)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 67)
Digital combined instrument panel -
overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
Information display
Information display, digital instrument panel*.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The informa-
tion is shown with symbols and text. There
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
2
Manual gearbox.
3
Automatic gearbox.
4
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 344).

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
62
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Gauges and indicators
Alternative themes can be selected for the
digital combined instrument panel. Possible
themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and
"Performance".
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and select the 
Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on
the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the
thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm
the selection by pressing the OK button.
On certain model variants, the appearance of
the centre console's screen follows the theme
selected for the combined instrument panel.
The contrast mode and colour mode for the
instrument can also be set using the left-hand
stalk switch.
For more information on menu navigation,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 107).
The choice of theme and setting of contrast
mode and colour mode can be stored for
each remote control key in the car key mem-
ory*, see Remote control key - personalisa-
tion* (p. 158).
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
5
, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 120) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 288).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator
6
/Gear position indica-
tor
7
 See also Gear shift indicator*
(p. 260), Automatic gearbox --
Geartronic* (p. 261) or Automatic gear-
box -- Powershift* (p. 264).
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
5
, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 120) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 288).
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 64).
Speedometer
5
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "
----", the marking becomes red.
6
Manual gearbox.
7
Automatic gearbox.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator
6
/Gear position indica-
tor
7
. See also Gear shift indicator*
(p. 260), Automatic gearbox --
Geartronic* (p. 261) or Automatic gear-
box -- Powershift* (p. 264).
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
5
, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 120) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 288).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Power guide. See also Eco guide &
Power guide* (p. 64).
Gear shift indicator
6
/Gear position indica-
tor
7
. See also Gear shift indicator*
(p. 260), Automatic gearbox --
Geartronic* (p. 261) or Automatic gear-
box -- Powershift* (p. 264).
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument
panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
8
6
Manual gearbox.
7
Automatic gearbox.
5
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "
----", the marking becomes red.
8
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 344).

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information dis-
play, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has
started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function-
ality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-
sure.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 65)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 67)
Eco guide & Power guide*
Eco guide and Power guide are two com-
bined instrument panel (p. 60) instruments
which help the driver to drive the car with
optimum driving economy.
The car also stores statistics of journeys
made, which can be viewed in the form of a
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis-
tics* (p. 121).
Eco guide
This instrument provides an indication of how
economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco";
see Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 61).
Instantaneous value
Average value
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based
on speed, engine speed, engine power uti-
lised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall dur-
ing acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
which means poor driving economy and
hence should be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instanta-
neous value and describes how the car has
been driven most recently. The higher the
pointers on the scale, the better the economy
achieved by the driver.
Power guide
This instrument shows the relationship
between how much power (Power) is being
taken from the engine and how much power
is available.
To view this function, select the theme
"Performance"; see Digital combined instru-
ment panel - overview (p. 61).

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available engine power
The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa-
ble engine power
9
. The higher the reading on
the scale, the more power is available in the
current gear.
Engine power utilised
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
power utilised
9
. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more power is being taken from the
engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indi-
cates a large power reserve.
Combined instrument panel -
meaning of indicator symbols
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a
function is activated, that the system is oper-
ating, or that an error or failure has occurred.
Indicator symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system, see Electronic
stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 184)
Stability system, sport mode,
see Electronic stability control
(ESC) - operation (p. 184)
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Symbol Specification
Information, read display text
Main beam On
Left-hand direction indicator
Right-hand direction indicator
Eco- function on, see ECO*
(p. 276)
Start/Stop, the engine auto-
stopped; see Start/Stop* -
function and operation (p. 268)
Tyre pressure system , see
Tyre pressure monitoring*
(p. 316)
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
been started then it may be due to a fault in
the car's emissions system. Drive to a work-
shop for checking. Volvo recommends that
you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
9
Power is dependent on engine speed.

03 Instruments and controls

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is

not working. The car's regular brake system

continues to work, but without the ABS func-

tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off

the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to

a workshop to have the ABS system

checked. Volvo recommends that you

seek assistance from an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Rear fog lamp on

This symbol illuminates when the rear fog

lamp is switched on.

Stability system

A flashing symbol indicates that the stability

system is operating. If the symbol illuminates

with constant glow then there is a fault in the

system.

Stability system, sport mode

Sport mode allows for a more active driving

experience. The system then detects whether

the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-

ments and cornering are more active than in

normal driving and then allows controlled

skidding of the rear section up to a certain

level before it intervenes and stabilises the

car. The symbol illuminates when the sport

mode is activated.

Engine preheater (diesel)

This symbol illuminates during engine pre-

heating. Preheating takes place mostly due to

low temperature.

Low level in fuel tank

When the symbol illuminates the level in the

fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Information, read display text

When one of the car's systems does not

behave as intended, this information symbol

illuminates and a text appears on the informa-

tion display. The message text is cleared with

the OK button, see Menu navigation - com-

bined instrument panel (p. 107), or it disap-

pears automatically after a time (time

depending on which function is indicated).

The information symbol can also illuminate in

conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the

symbol and message are cleared using the

OK button, or disappear automatically

after a time.

Main beam On

The symbol illuminates when main beam is on

and with main beam flash.

Left/right-hand direction indicator

Both direction indicator symbols flash when

the hazard warning flashers are used.

Eco function on

This symbol illuminates when the Eco func-

tion is activated.

Start/Stop

The symbol shines when the engine is auto-

stopped.

Tyre pressure system

The symbol illuminates in the event of low

tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre

pressure system.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then
the information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the
information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-
tion symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet
10
 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-
ble and close the bonnet.
If the boot lid is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with
an explanatory image in the information dis-
play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the boot lid.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 67)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 61)
Combined instrument cluster -
meaning of warning symbols
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated, or that a seri-
ous error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressure
A
Parking brake applied, digital
instrument panel
Parking brake applied, ana-
logue instrument panel
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
A
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil
pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for
low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via
display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general
(p. 344).
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The sym-
bol flashes during application, and then
changes over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol in any other situation
means that a fault has arisen. Read the mes-
sage on the information display.
For more information, see Parking brake
(p. 281).
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi-
nates while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recom-
mends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
10
Only cars with alarm*.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alternator not charging

This symbol illuminates during driving if a

fault has occurred in the electrical system.

Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you

seek assistance from an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level

may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place

and check the level in the brake fluid reser-

voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level

(p. 349).

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at

the same time, there may be a fault in the

brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off

the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•

If both symbols extinguish, continue

driving.

•

If the symbols remain illuminated,

check the level in the brake fluid reser-

voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level

(p. 349). If the brake fluid level is nor-

mal but the symbols are still illumi-

nated, the car can be driven, with great

care, to a workshop to have the brake

system checked. Volvo recommends

that you seek assistance from an

authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in

the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-

ther before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investiga-

ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends

that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at

the same time, there is a risk that the rear

end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning

The red warning symbol illuminates when a

fault has been indicated which could affect

the safety and/or driveability of the car. An

explanatory text is shown on the information

display at the same time. The symbol remains

visible until the fault has been rectified but the

text message can be cleared with the OK

button; see Menu navigation - combined

instrument panel (p. 107). The warning sym-

bol can also illuminate in conjunction with

other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car

further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display.

Clear the message using the OK button.

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors is not closed properly then

the information or warning symbol illuminates

together with an explanatory image in the

information display. Stop the car in a safe

place as soon as possible and close the door

that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower

than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-

tion symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher

than approx. 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet

is not closed properly then the

warning symbol illuminates together with an

explanatory image in the information display.

Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-

ble and close the bonnet.

If the boot lid is not closed properly then the

information symbol illuminates together with

an explanatory image in the information dis-

play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as

possible and close the boot lid.

Only cars with alarm*.

03 Instruments and controls
03
69
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 65)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 61)
Outside temperature gauge
The display for the outside temperature gauge
appears in the combined instrument panel.
Display for outside temperature gauge,
digital instrument panel
Display for outside temperature gauge,
analogue instrument panel
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the
display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has
been stationary, the gauge may display a
reading that is too high.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
Trip meter
The trip meter display appears in the com-
bined instrument panel.
Trip meter, digital instrument panel.
Display for trip meter
12
Both trip meters 
T1 and T2 are used to meas-
ure short distances. The distance is shown in
the display.
Turn the left-hand stalk switch's thumbwheel
to show the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch RESET button resets
the trip meter shown. For more information,
see Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 120).
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
12
Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

03 Instruments and controls
03
70
Clock
The clock display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time
13
Setting the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu sys-
tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
Combined instrument panel - license
agreement
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following text is Volvo's agreement with the
manufacturer/developer.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser
General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2),
The FreeType Project License ("FreeType
License") and other different and/or additional
copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices.
The links to access the exact terms of
LGPLv2, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo Dealer.
The offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Portions of this product uses software with
Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
(http://www.lua.org/)
This product includes software under
following licenses:
LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
•
GNU FriBidi
•
DevIL
The FreeType Project License: http://
git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/
freetype2.git/tree/docs/FTL.TXT
•
FreeType 2
13
The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/
mit-license.html
•
Lua
Symbols in the display
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided
into warning, indicator and information sym-
bols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be
found.
 - Red warning symbol, illuminates
when a fault has been indicated which could
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car.
An explanatory text is shown in the informa-
tion display in the combined instrument panel
at the same time.
 - Information symbol, illuminates in
combination with text in the information dis-
play in the combined instrument panel, when
a deviation in any of the car's systems has
occurred. The information symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Low oil pressure (p. 67)
Parking brake
applied
(p. 67),
(p. 281)
Symbol Specification See
Parking brake
applied, alterna-
tive symbol
(p. 67)
Airbags – SRS (p. 29),
(p. 67)
Seatbelt
reminder
(p. 26),
(p. 67)
Alternator not
charging
(p. 67)
Fault in brake
system
(p. 67),
(p. 278)
Warning, safety
mode
(p. 29),
(p. 40),
(p. 67),
(p. 264)
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
ABL fault* (p. 65),
(p. 89)
Emissions sys-
tem
(p. 65)
ABS fault (p. 65),
(p. 278)

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
72
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Specification See
Rear fog lamp on (p. 65),
(p. 89)
Stability system,
ESC (Electronic
Stability Control)
(p. 65),
(p. 186)
Stability system,
sport mode
(p. 65),
(p. 186)
Engine preheater
(diesel)
(p. 65)
Low level in fuel
tank
(p. 65),
(p. 142)
Information, read
display text
(p. 65)
Main beam On (p. 65),
(p. 86)
Left-hand direc-
tion indicators
(p. 65)
Right-hand direc-
tion indicators
(p. 65)
Start/Stop*,
engine auto-
stopped
(p. 65),
(p. 274)
Symbol Specification See
ECO function* on (p. 65),
(p. 276)
Tyre pressure
system*
(p. 65),
(p. 316)
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Cruise control* (p. 191)
Adaptive cruise
control*
(p. 206)
Adaptive cruise
control*, time
interval
(p. 193),
(p. 196)
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Dis-
tance Alert)
(p. 198),
(p. 208)
Radar sensor* (p. 206),
(p. 210),
(p. 226)
- - -
Symbol Specification See
Windscreen sen-
sor*, Camera sen-
sor*, Laser sen-
sor*
(p. 87),
(p. 217),
(p. 226),
(p. 230),
(p. 234)
Auto Brake*, Dis-
tance Warning*
(Distance Alert),
City Safety
TM
,
Collision warning
system*
(p. 210),
(p. 217),
(p. 226)
ABL system* (p. 89)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Time for a
break
(p. 229)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Time for a
break
(p. 230)
Parking brake (p. 281)
Rain sensor* (p. 98)
Active high beam,
AHB (Active High
Beam)*
(p. 87)

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
Symbol Specification See
Start/Stop* (p. 274)
Start/Stop* (p. 274)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Lane Depar-
ture Warning
(LDW)
(p. 230),
(p. 234)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Lane Depar-
ture Warning*
(p. 232)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Lane Depar-
ture Warning*
(p. 234)
Recorded speed
information*
(p. 188)
Engine block and
passenger com-
partment heater*
(p. 142)
Symbol Specification See
Engine block
heater and pas-
senger compart-
ment heater*
Service required
(p. 142)
Activated timer* (p. 142)
Activated timer* (p. 142)
Low battery (p. 142)
Fuel filler flap,
right-hand side
(p. 288)
Gear shift indica-
tor
(p. 260)
Gear positions (p. 261)
Measuring the oil
level
(p. 345)
- - -
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Specification See
Seatbelt reminder (p. 28)
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
(p. 33)
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
(p. 33)
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 65)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 67)
•
Messages - handling (p. 109)

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Sensus

Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal

Volvo experience and connects you with the

car and outside world. Sensus provides infor-

mation, entertainment and assistance when it

is needed. Sensus consists of intuitive func-

tions that both enhance the car journey and

simplifies ownership of the car.

An intuitive navigation structure makes it pos-

sible to receive relevant support, information

and entertainment when it is necessary, with-

out distracting the driver.

Sensus covers all the car's solutions that

enable connection* to the outside world and

provides you with intuitive control over all the

car's capabilities.

Volvo Sensus combines and presents many

functions in several of the car's systems on

the centre console's display screen. With

Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by

means of an intuitive user interface. Settings

can be made in Car settings, Audio and

media, Climate control, etc.

With the centre console buttons and controls

or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*

functions can be activated or deactivated and

many different settings can be made.

With a press on MY CAR all settings related

to the driving and control of the car are pre-

sented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm,

automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function

RADIO, MEDIA, TEL,

*, NAV* and CAM*

other sources, systems and functions can be

activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*,

Bluetooth

*, navigation* and park assist cam-

era*.

For more information about all functions/

systems, see the relevant section in the

owner's manual or its supplement.

Overview

Control panel in centre console. The figure is

schematic - the number of functions and layout

of the buttons both vary, depending on the

equipment selected and the market.

Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple-

ment (Sensus Navigation).

Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*,

see separate supplement (Sensus Info-

tainment).

Function settings - MY CAR, see MY

CAR (p. 110).

Internet-connected car - *, see sepa-

rate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Climate control system (p. 123).

Park assist camera* (p. 239) – CAM*.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key positions

The remote control key can be used to set the

vehicle's electrical system in different modes/

levels so that different functions are available;

see Key positions - functions at different lev-

els (p. 75).

Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-

ted/inserted.

NOTE

For cars with the Keyless* function the

remote control key does not need to be

inserted into the ignition switch but can be

stored in e.g. a pocket. For more informa-

tion on Keyless functions, see Keyless

drive* (p. 168).

Insert the remote control key

1. Hold the end of the remote control key

with the detachable key blade and insert

the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

2. Then press the remote control key in the

lock up to its end position.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can

impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press in the remote control key

incorrectly turned - hold the end with the

detachable key blade, see Detachable key

blade - detaching/attaching (p. 164).

Remove the remote control key

Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,

then pull it out from the ignition switch.

Key positions - functions at different

levels

To enable the use of a limited number of

functions with the engine switched off, the

car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ-

ent levels - 0, I and II - with the remote con-

trol key. This owner's manual describes these

levels throughout using the denomination

"key positions".

The following table shows the functions avail-

able in each key position/level.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Level Functions

•

Odometer, clock and tem-

perature gauge are illumi-

nated.

•

Electrically operated seats

can be adjusted.

•

The audio system can be

used for a limited time - see

the Sensus Infotainment sup-

plement.

•

Sunroof, power windows, 12

V socket in the passenger

compartment, navigation,

phone, ventilation fan and

windscreen wipers can be

used.

Level Functions

•

The headlamps come on.

•

Warning/indicator lamps illu-

minate for 5 seconds.

•

Several other systems are

activated. However, electric

heating in seat cushions and

the rear window can only be

activated after starting the

engine.

This key position consumes a

lot of current from the starter

battery and should therefore be

avoided!

Selecting key position/level

•

Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This

means that the car's electrical system is

at level 0.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the

engine - do not depress the brake/clutch

pedal when these key positions are due to

be selected.

•

Key position I - With the remote control

key fully inserted into the ignition switch

- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.

•

Key position II - With the remote control

key fully inserted into the ignition switch

- Give a long

press on START/STOP

ENGINE.

•

Back to key position 0 - To return to key

position 0 from position II and I - Briefly

press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Audio system

For information on audio system functions

with remote control key removed, see the

Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Starting and stopping the engine

For information about starting/stopping the

engine, see Starting the engine (p. 253).

Towing

For important information about the remote

control key during towing, see Towing

(p. 300).

Related information

•

Key positions (p. 75)

Not required for cars with the Keyless* function.

Approx. 2 seconds.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seats, front

The car's front seats have different setting

options for optimum seating comfort.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to

adjust the distance to the steering wheel

and pedals. Check that the seat is locked

after changing position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Change the lumbar support*, press the

button.

Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,

front - electrically operated* (p. 78).

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat

before setting off, never while driving.

Make sure that the seat is in locked posi-

tion in order to avoid personal injury in the

event of heavy braking or an accident.

Lowering the passenger seat backrest*

The passenger seat's backrest can be folded

forward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi-

ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the back-

rest and fold it forward.

4. Push the seat forward so that the head

restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING

Grasp the backrest and make sure that it

is properly locked after being folded up in

order to avoid personal injury in the event

of sudden braking or an accident.

Related information

•

Seats, front - electrically operated*

(p. 78)

•

Seats, rear (p. 79)

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seats, front - electrically operated*

The car's front seats have different setting

options for optimum seating comfort. The

power seat can be moved forward/backward

and up/down. The front edge of the seat

cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest

angle and lumbar support* can be changed.

Power seat

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Raise/lower seat

Seat, forward/backward

Backrest rake

Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and

outward

The power seats have overload protection

which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an

object. If this should happen, set the car's

electrical system in key position I or 0 and

wait a short time before adjusting the seat

again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/

inward/outward) can be made at a time.

Preparations

The seat can be adjusted for a certain time

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol key without the key in the ignition switch.

Seat adjustment is normally made in key

position I and can always be made when the

engine is running.

Seat with memory function*

The memory function stores settings for the

seat and the door mirrors.

Store setting

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Press and hold button M while pressing

button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the

buttons depressed until the acoustic sig-

nal is heard and text is shown in the com-

bined instrument panel.

The seat must be adjusted again before a

new memory can be set.

The setting for lumbar support is not stored.

Using a stored setting

Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the

seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button

is released, the movement of the seat and

door mirrors will be interrupted.

Key memory* in remote control key

All remote control keys can be used by differ-

ent drivers to store the settings for the driv-

er's seat and door mirrors

, see Remote

control key - personalisation* (p. 158).

Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power rearview and door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

one of the setting buttons for the seat or

memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in

the key memory is performed by pressing the

unlock button on the remote control key. The

driver's door must then be open.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children

do not play with the controls. Check that

there are no objects in front of, behind or

under the seat during adjustment. Make

sure that none of the passengers in the

rear seat is in danger of becoming trap-

ped.

Heated/ventilated seats*

For heated seats/ventilated, see Heated front

seats* (p. 130) and Heated rear seat*

(p. 130).

Related information

•

Seats, front (p. 77)

•

Seats, rear (p. 79)

Seats, rear

The rear seat backrest and the outer seat

head restraints can be folded. The centre seat

head restraint can be adjusted to suit the

height of the passenger.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat

when the backrest is to be folded down.

The seat belts must not be connected

either. Otherwise there is a risk of damag-

ing the rear seat upholstery.

The backrest is in two parts. The parts can be

folded forward, together or separately.

1. Pull the handle/handles.

2. Fold the backrest forward. Lower the

centre head restraint fully if the backrest's

wide section shall be lowered.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head

restraints are securely locked after raising

to avoid personal injury in the event of

sudden braking or an accident.

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

The head restraint can be adjusted vertically

to suit the height of the passenger. The upper

edge of the head restraint should be aligned

with middle of the back of the head. Slide it

up as required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button

by the left-hand shaft must be pressed in

while the head restraint is pressed down

carefully.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's

outer head restraints*

1. The remote control key must be in key

position II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear outer

head restraints to improve rearward visi-

bility.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints if

there are passengers in any of the outer

seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a

click is heard.

WARNING

The head restraints must be in locked

position after being raised.

Related information

•

Seats, front (p. 77)

•

Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 78)

Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ-

ent positions and has controls for horn and

cruise control, as well as menu, audio and

phone control.

Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and depth:

1. The lever is pulled towards the driver to

release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press

the steering wheel lightly at the same time

as you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before

driving away.

With speed related power steering* the level

of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjust-

able steering force* (p. 183).

Keypads* and paddles*

Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.

Cruise control* (p. 191)* and Adaptive

cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)*.

Paddle for manual gear changing in an

automatic gearbox, see Automatic gear-

box -- Geartronic* (p. 261).

Audio and phone control, see supple-

ment, Sensus Infotainment.

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig-

nal.

Related information

•

Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 82)

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Heating* of the steering wheel

The steering wheel can be heated with elec-

tric heating.

Function

Button position may vary depending on equip-

ment selected and market.

Repeatedly press the button to switch

between the following functions:

Function Indicator

Switched off Button lamp extinguished

Heating Button lamp illuminated

Automatic steering wheel heating

With activated automatic start of steering

wheel heating, the heating of the steering

wheel starts when the engine is started. Auto-

matic start takes place when the car is cold

and the ambient temperature is below

approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the func-

tion in the menu system MY CAR (p. 110).

Light switches

The headlamp control activates and adjusts

the external lighting. It is also used to adjust

display and instrument lighting and ambience

lights (p. 92).

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview, light switches

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and

instrument lighting as well as ambience

lights*

Button for rear fog lamp

Knob for daytime running lights and park-

ing lamps

Thumbwheel

for headlamp levelling

Knob positions

Posi-

tion

Specification

Daytime running lights

when

the car's electrical system is in

key position II or the engine is

running.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights, side

marker lamps rear and position/

parking lamps when the car's

electrical system is in key posi-

tion II or the engine is running.

Side marker lamps rear and

position/parking lamps when

the car is parked.

Main beam flash can be used.

Posi-

tion

Specification

Daytime running lights, side

marker lamps rear and position/

parking lamps in daylight when

the car's electrical system is in

key position II or the engine is

running.

Dipped beam, side marker

lamps rear and position/parking

lamps in weak daylight or dark-

ness, or when the rear fog lamp

or windscreen wipers with con-

tinuous wiping are activated.

The tunnel detection (p. 86)*

function is activated.

The Active main beam (p. 87)*

function can be used.

Main beam can be activated

when dipped beam is switched

on.

Main beam flash can be used.

Dipped beam, side marker

lamps rear and position/parking

lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Posi-

tion

Specification

Main beam flash can be used.

Fitted in or under the front bumper.

Volvo recommends that

mode is used

when the car is driven.

WARNING

The car's audio system is not able to

determine when daylight is too weak or

sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in

all situations.

The driver is always responsible for ensur-

ing that the car is driven with a beam pat-

tern suitable for the traffic situation and in

accordance with applicable traffic regula-

tions.

Instrument lighting

Different display and instrument lighting is

switched on depending on key position; see

Key positions - functions at different levels

(p. 75).

The display lighting is automatically subdued

in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the

thumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align-

ment of the headlamp beam, which could

dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by

adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the

beam if the car is heavily laden.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the

car's electrical system in key position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/

lower beam alignment.

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.

Only driver

Driver and passenger in the front passen-

ger seat

Occupants in all seats

Occupants in all seats and maximum load

in the cargo area

The driver and maximum load in the

cargo area

Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have

automatic headlamp levelling and are there-

fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.

Related information

•

Position/parking lamps (p. 85)

•

Daytime running lights (p. 85)

•

Main/dipped beam (p. 86)

03 Instruments and controls

Position/parking lamps

Position/parking lamps are switched on with

the headlamp control's knob.

Knob for headlamp control in the position for

position/parking lamps.

Turn the knob to the position for

(num-

ber plate lighting is switched on at the same

time).

If the car's electrical system is in key position

II or the engine is running then the daytime

running lights also switch on.

When it is dark outside and the boot lid is

opened the rear position/parking lamps are

switched on in order to alert traffic behind.

This takes place irrespective of what position

the knob is in or what key position the car's

electrical system is in.

Related information

•

Light switches (p. 82)

Daytime running lights

With the knob for headlamp control in

position, and the car's electrical system in key

position II or the engine running, the daytime

running lights are activated automatically in

daylight.

Daytime running lights during the day.

DRL

Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in

position the daytime running lights (Daytime

Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati-

cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light

sensor on the top of the instrument panel

changes from daytime running lights to

dipped beam at twilight or when daylight

becomes too weak. Switching to dipped

beam also takes place when the windscreen

wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannot

determine in all situations when daylight is

too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist

and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensur-

ing that the car is driven with the correct

beam pattern for the traffic situation and in

accordance with applicable traffic regula-

tions.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel detection*

Tunnel detection changes the lighting from

daytime running lights to dipped beam when

the car is driven into a tunnel. Approx. 20 sec-

onds after the car has left the tunnel, the light-

ing returns to daytime running lights.

The tunnel detection function is available in

cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the

entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting

from daytime running lights to dipped beam.

Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the

tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running

lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel

within this time period then dipped beam is

kept switched on. This avoids repeated

changes to the car's lighting.

Note that the headlamp control's knob must

remain in

position for tunnel detection

to work.

Related information

•

Main/dipped beam (p. 86)

•

Light switches (p. 82)

Main/dipped beam

With the knob for headlamp control in posi-

tion

and the car's electrical system in

key position II or the engine running, the

dipped beam is activated automatically in

poor light conditions.

With the knob for headlamp control in posi-

tion

dipped beam is always switched on

when the engine is running or when key posi-

tion II is active.

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Dipped beam

With the knob in position, dipped beam

is activated automatically at twilight or when

daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is

also activated automatically if the windscreen

wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

With the knob in position

dipped beam

is always switched on when the engine is run-

ning or when key position II is active.

Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the

steering wheel to the position for main beam

flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk

switch is released.

Main beam

Main beam can be activated when the knob

is in position

. Activate/deac-

tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch

towards the steering wheel to the end posi-

tion and then releasing.

When main beam has been activated the

symbol illuminates in the combined

instrument panel.

Auxiliary lamps*

If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can

use the MY CAR menu system to choose

whether they should be deactivated or

When dipped beam is switched on.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
switched on/off simultaneously with the main
beam
19
, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 89)
•
Active main beam* (p. 87)
•
Light switches (p. 82)
•
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 94)
•
Tunnel detection* (p. 86)
Active main beam*
Active main beam function detects the head-
lamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear
lights of vehicles in front, and switches the
lighting from main beam to dipped beam. The
lighting returns to main beam when the
incoming light has stopped.
Active main beam - AHB
Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB)
is a function which uses a camera sensor at
the top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
The lighting returns to main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp
control's knob is in position 
 (provided
that the function has not been deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 110)).
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
AUTO position.
The function can start while driving in the
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or
higher.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-
hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and then releasing. Deac-
tivation when main beam is on means that the
lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
Car with analogue combined instrument
panel
When AHB is activated the 
 symbol illu-
minates in the instrument's information dis-
play.
When main beam is switched on the 
symbol also illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
19
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Car with digital combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the

symbol

turns white in the instrument's information

display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol

turns blue.

Manual operation

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the

camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist

and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the

windscreen in front of the camera sensor

as this may reduce effectiveness or cause

one or more of the systems dependent on

the camera to stop working.

If the message Active main beam

Temporary unavailable Switch manually is

shown in the combined instrument panel's

information display then you have to switch

manually between main and dipped beam.

However, the knob for headlamp control can

still remain in position

. The same

applies if the message

Windscreen sensors

blocked See manual

and the symbol

are shown. The symbol goes out when

these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in

situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When

AHB becomes available again, or the wind-

screen sensors are no longer blocked, the

message extinguishes and the

symbol

illuminates.

WARNING

AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam

pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for

manually switching between main and

dipped beam when traffic situations or

weather conditions so require.

IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switching

between main and dipped beam may be

required:

•

In heavy rain or dense fog

•

In freezing rain

•

In snow flurries or slush

•

In moonlight

•

When driving in poorly lit built-up

areas

•

When the traffic ahead has weak light-

ing

•

If there are pedestrians on or beside

the road

•

If there are highly reflective objects

such as signs in the vicinity of the road

•

When the lighting from oncoming traf-

fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

•

When there is traffic on connecting

roads

•

On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

•

In sharp bends.

For more information on the limitations of the

camera sensor, see Collision warning system*

- camera sensor limitations (p. 224).

Related information

•

Main/dipped beam (p. 86)

•

Light switches (p. 82)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active Xenon headlamps*

Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro-

vide maximum illumination in bends and junc-

tions and so provide increased safety.

Active Xenon headlamps ABL

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)

and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-

lamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) the light

from the headlamps follows the steering

wheel movement in order to provide maxi-

mum lighting in bends and junctions and so

provide increased safety.

The function is activated automatically when

the car is started (provided that it has not

been deactivated in the menu system

MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 110)). In the event

of a fault in the function the

symbol illu-

minates in the combined instrument panel at

the same time as the information display

shows an explanatory text and a further illu-

minated symbol.

Symbol Message Specification

Headlamp

system

malfunc-

tion Serv-

ice

required

The system is

disengaged. Visit

a workshop if

the message

remains. Volvo

recommends

that you contact

an authorised

Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or dark-

ness and only when the car is moving.

The function

can be deactivated/activated

in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR

(p. 110).

For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Head-

lamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 94).

Related information

•

Main/dipped beam (p. 86)

•

Active main beam* (p. 87)

•

Light switches (p. 82)

Rear fog lamp

When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog

lamp can be used so that other road users

shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on

when key position II is active or the engine is

running and the headlamp control's knob is in

position

or .

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog

lamp's indicator symbol in the com-

bined instrument panel and the light in the

button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp

is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automati-

cally when the engine is switched off or when

Activated on delivery from the factory.

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
90
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
position 
 or  .
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 82)
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched
on when one of driving support systems
Adaptive cruise control (p. 193), City Safety
(p. 211) or Collision warning system (p. 218)
brakes the car.
Related information
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 280)
Hazard warning flashers
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction
indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when
this function is activated.
When the hazard warning flashers are acti-
vated both direction indicator symbols flash in
the combined instrument panel.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deacti-

03 Instruments and controls
03
91
vated automatically when the car is driven off
again or the button is depressed.
Related information
•
direction indicators (p. 91)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 280)
direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times or continu-
ously, depending on how far up or down the
stalk switch is moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. The
function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 110).
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see Com-
bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
symbols (p. 65).
Related information
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 90)

03 Instruments and controls

Interior lighting

The passenger compartment lighting is acti-

vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con-

trols above the front seats and the rear seat.

G021149

Controls in roof console for the front reading

lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment can

be switched on and off manually within

30 minutes from when:

•

the engine has been switched off and the

car's electrical system is in key position 0

•

the car has been unlocked but the engine

has not been started.

Front roof lighting

The front reading lamps are switched on or

off by pressing the relevant button in the roof

console.

Rear roof lighting

G021150

Rear roof lighting.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

Courtesy lighting

Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-

ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-

tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and off

respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting

The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 150) is

switched on and off respectively when the

cover is opened or closed.

Automatic lighting

The switch for passenger compartment light-

ing has three positions for the lighting in the

passenger compartment:

•

Off – right-hand side pressed in, auto-

matic lighting deactivated.

•

Neutral position – automatic lighting

activated.

•

On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger

compartment lighting switched on.

Neutral position

When the button is in neutral position the

passenger compartment lighting is switched

on and off automatically in accordance with

the following.

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and remains on for 30 seconds

if:

•

the car is unlocked with the remote con-

trol key or key blade, see Remote control

key - functions (p. 160) or Detachable

key blade - unlocking doors (p. 165)

•

the engine has been switched off and the

car's electrical system is in key position

Passenger compartment lighting is switched

off when:

•

the engine is started

•

the car is locked.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The passenger compartment lighting comes

on and remains on for two minutes if one of

the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and

the car is locked then it will be switched off

automatically after two minutes.

Ambience lights*

When the normal passenger compartment

lighting is switched off and the engine is run-

ning, a number of LEDs illuminate, including

one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide

a low-light and enhance the mood while driv-

ing. The light also makes it easier to see

objects in storage compartments etc. during

the darker hours of the day. This lighting goes

out for a little while after the normal passen-

ger compartment lighting when the car is

locked. The brightness is controlled using the

thumbwheel on the headlamp control (p. 82).

Home safe light duration

Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,

parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors,

number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as

well as courtesy lighting.

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept

switched on to work as home safe lighting

after the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward

the steering wheel to the end position and

release it. The function can be activated

in the same way as with main beam flash;

see Main/dipped beam (p. 86).

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam,

parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number

plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy

lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safe

lighting should be kept on can be set in the

menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 110).

Related information

•

Approach lighting (p. 93)

Approach lighting

Approach lighting consists of parking lamps,

lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light-

ing, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy

lighting.

Approach lighting is switched on with the

remote control key, see Remote control key -

functions (p. 160), and is used to switch on

the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the

remote control, the parking lamps, door mir-

ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof

lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach

lighting should be kept on can be set in the

menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 110).

Related information

•

Home safe light duration (p. 93)

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp

pattern

The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to

avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can

be set for right or left-hand traffic.

G021151

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.

G021152

Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

Active Xenon headlamps*

G019442

Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pat-

tern.

Normal position – the headlamp pattern is

correct for the country in which the car

was delivered.

Adapted position – designed for opposite

headlamp pattern.

WARNING

The headlamps must be handled with

extreme caution due to the Xenon lamp

being supplied by a high-voltage unit.

The country in which the car is delivered

determines whether normal position is

designed for right or left-hand traffic.

Example 1

If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be

driven in the UK then the headlamps must be

set to the adjusted position, see preceding

illustration.

Example 2

A car that is delivered in the UK is designed

for left-hand traffic and is driven there with

the headlamps in normal position, see pre-

ceding illustration.

Halogen headlamps

The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps

is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.

The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Masking the headlamps

1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand

drive cars or the C and D templates for

right-hand drive cars, see later section

"Templates for halogen headlamps". The

templates have a scale of 1:2. Use a pho-

tocopier with a zoom function for exam-

ple, and copy the templates at 200 %:

•

A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right

lens)

•

B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

•

C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right

lens)

•

D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left

lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive

waterproof material and cut it out.

3. Start from the design line on the head-

lamp lenses; see the dotted line in the fol-

lowing figure. Position the self-adhesive

templates at the right distance from each

design line using the illustration and the

dimensions in the following list:

•

A = LHD Right - approx. 86 mm

•

B = LHD Left - approx. 40 mm

•

C = RHD Right - 0 mm

•

D = RHD Left - approx. 96 mm

03 Instruments and controls

Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

03 Instruments and controls

Templates for halogen headlamps

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Wipers and washers

Wipers and washers clean the windscreen

and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned

with high-pressure washing.

Windscreen wipers

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, On/Off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off

Move the stalk switch to position 0

to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep

Raise the stalk switch and release to

make one sweep.

Intermittent wiping

Set the number of sweeps per time

unit with the thumbwheel when

intermittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping

The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter -

ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen

in, and that any snow or ice on the wind-

screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers

are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-

screen must be wet when the windscreen

wipers are operating.

Service position wiper blade

For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades

and replacement of wiper blades, see Car

wash (p. 380) and Wiper blades (p. 358).

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-

screen wipers based on how much water it

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of

the rain sensor can be adjusted using the

thumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in

the button is illuminated and the rain sensor

symbol

is shown in the combined

instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the car must

be running or the remote control key in posi-

tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk

switch must be in position 0 or in the position

for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain

sensor button

. The windscreen wipers

make one sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to

make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen-

sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.

(An extra sweep is made when the thumb-

wheel is turned upward.)

Deactivate

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the

rain sensor button

or move the stalk

switch down to another wiper program.

For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 358). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 360).

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the remote control key is removed from

the ignition switch or five minutes after the

engine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be

damaged in an automatic car wash.

Switch off the rain sensor while the car is

in motion or when the remote control key

is in position I or II. The symbol in the

combined instrument panel and the lamp

in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen

Move the stalk switch toward the steering

wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp

washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several

more sweeps and the headlamps are washed

once the stalk switch has been released.

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid

freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing*

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes

a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,

the headlamps are washed automatically at

every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing

If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains

in the reservoir and the message that you

should fill the washer fluid is shown in the

combined instrument panel, then the supply

of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched

off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the

windscreen and the visibility through it.

Related information

•

Washer fluid - filling (p. 360)

Power windows

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel for the driver's door - the con-

trol panels for the other doors operate their

respective power window.

Driver's door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* and

disengaging rear power window buttons;

see Child safety locks - electrical activa-

tion* (p. 178).

Rear window controls

Front window controls

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers

are not trapped when the windows are

closed from the driver's door.

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
100
WARNING
Check that no children or other passen-
gers are trapped if/when the windows are
closed using the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
to always switch off the power supply to
the power windows by selecting key posi-
tion 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For infor-
mation on key positions - see Key posi-
tions - functions at different levels (p. 75).
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the con-
trol panels for the other doors can only each
operate their respective power window. Only
one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the key position must be at least I - see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 75).
The power windows can be operated for a
few minutes after the engine has been
switched off and after the remote control key
has been removed - although not after a door
has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to force the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the but-
ton up until the window is closed. The pinch
protection is reactivated after a brief pause.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs
automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or
from inside with central locking, see Remote
control key (p. 157) and Locking/unlocking -
from the inside (p. 173).
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the func-
tion for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the but-
ton to raise the window to its end position
and hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protec-
tion to work.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

101

Sun blind*

Sun blinds are built into on each rear door.

There is a sun blind built into the rear parcel

shelf.

Rear door

Hook with associated catch

1. Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the

hook in the upper door frame.

2. Lock the sun blind by moving the catch

upwards.

The window can also be opened and closed

when the sun blind is pulled up.

Rear window

– Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the

roof clip using the two hooks for the

blind.

> The spring force in the blind keeps the

hooks in position.

When the sun blind is not in use - unhook it,

hold onto the handle and allow the blind to

roll up slowly.

Door mirrors

The door mirror positions are adjusted with

the joystick in the driver's door controls.

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand

door mirror. The light in the button illumi-

nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be illuminated.

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
102
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to
provide optimal vision. Objects may
appear further away than they actually are.
Storing settings
22
The settings for the rearview and door mirrors
and the positions of the driver's seat can be
stored for each remote control key in the car
key memory*, see Remote control key - per-
sonalisation* (p. 158).
Angling the door mirror when parking
22
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when park-
ing for example.
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by press-
ing the button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking
22
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
driver can see the side of the road when
parking for example. When reverse gear is
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
to its original position after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 110).
Automatic retraction when locking
22
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
matically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 110).
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
tons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as neces-
sary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-
ing in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane-
ously (key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately
1 second. The mirrors automatically stop
in the fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
tion.
Home safe and approach lighting
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates
when approach lighting (p. 93) or home safe
lighting (p. 93) is selected.
Related information
•
Rearview mirror - interior (p. 103)
•
Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 103)
22
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 78).

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

103

Windows and rearview and door

mirrors - heating

The defroster is used to quickly remove mist-

ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window

and door mirrors.

Heated windscreen*, rear window and

door mirrors

Heating, windscreen

Heating, rear window and door mirrors

The function is used to remove ice and mist-

ing from the windscreen, rear window and

door mirrors.

One press of the respective button starts the

heating. The light in the button indicates that

the function is active. Switch off the heating

as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order

not to load the battery unnecessarily. How-

ever, the function is switched off automati-

cally after a certain time. Following which,

rear window heating is switched on and off

automatically as long as the outside tempera-

ture is lower than +7 °C.

NOTE

Rear window heating is not switched on

and off automatically if the Eco function is

activated, but then remains switched off,

even in outside temperatures below +7 °C.

For information about the Eco function,

see ECO* (p. 276).

See also Demisting and defrosting the wind-

screen (p. 133).

The door mirrors and rear window are demis-

ted/defrosted automatically if the car is

started in an outside temperature lower than

+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected

in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR

(p. 110).

Rearview mirror - interior

The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed

with a control in the mirror's lower edge.

Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto-

matically.

Control for dimming

Manual dimming

Bright light from behind could be reflected in

the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

dimming with the dimming control when

lights from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in

towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the

control towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming*

Bright light from behind is automatically

dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control

03 Instruments and controls

104

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

for manual dimming is not available on mir-

rors with automatic dimming.

The rearview mirror contains two sensors -

one forward facing and one rearward facing -

that work together to identify and eliminate

dazzling light. The forward facing sensor

detects ambient light, while the rearward fac-

ing sensor detects the light from vehicle

headlights behind.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking

permits, transponders, sun visors or

objects in the seats or on the parcel shelf

in such a way that light is prevented from

reaching the sensors, then the dimming

function of the rearview mirror is reduced.

Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming

can be equipped with compass (p. 104).

Related information

•

Door mirrors (p. 101)

Compass*

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview

mirror contains a display that shows the com-

pass direction in which the front of the car is

pointing.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different directions are shown with Eng-

lish abbreviations:

N (north), NE (north east),

E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south

west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically when

the car is started or when key position II is

active, see Key positions - functions at differ-

ent levels (p. 75). To deactivate/activate the

compass - press in the button on the under-

side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam-

ple.

Calibration

The compass may need calibrating to show

the correct compass direction.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The compass should be calibrated if the car

is moved across several magnetic zones.

Proceed as follows to perform calibration:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free

from steel structures and high-voltage

power lines.

2. Start the car and switch off all electrical

equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)

and ensure that all doors are closed.

NOTE

Calibration may fail or not start at all if

electrical equipment is not switched off.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the

rearview mirror depressed (use a paper

clip or similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The

number of the current magnetic zone is

shown.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

105

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the

required magnetic zone (

1–15) is shown.

See the map of magnetic zones for the

compass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing

the character

C, or hold the button on the

underside of the rearview mirror

depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the

character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-

tion is shown in the display, indicating

that calibration is complete. Then drive a

further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the

character

C is shown in the display when

the heated windscreen is activated, per-

form the calibration in accordance with

point 6 above with the heated windscreen

activated, see Demisting and defrosting

the windscreen (p. 133).

8. Repeat the above procedure as neces-

sary.

Sunroof*

The sunroof can be operated with a control in

the roof panel.

The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed man-

ually.

The sunroof has a wind deflector.

The sunroof controls are located in the roof

panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically

at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position

I or II is required for the sunroof to be

opened.

Horizontal opening

G021343

Horizontal opening, backward/forward.

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

03 Instruments and controls

106

Opening

For maximum sunroof opening, move the

control back to the position for automatic

opening and release.

Open manually by pulling the control back-

wards to the point of resistance for manual

opening. The sunroof moves to maximum

open position as long as the button is kept

depressed.

Closing

Close manually by pushing the control for-

wards to the point of resistance for manual

closing. The sunroof moves to closed posi-

tion as long as the button is kept depressed.

WARNING

Risk of crushing when the sunroof is

closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection

function only operates during automatic

closing, not manual.

Close automatically by pressing the control to

the position for automatic closing and then

release it.

The power supply to the sunroof is switched

off by selecting key position 0 and removing

the remote control key from the ignition

switch.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to always switch off the power

supply to the sunroof by selecting key

position 0 and then take the remote con-

trol key with you when leaving the car. For

information on key positions - see Key

positions - functions at different levels

(p. 75).

Vertical opening

G028899

Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the

control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol down.

Closing using the remote control key or

central locking button

G021345

One long press on the lock button closes the

sunroof and all the windows, see Remote

control key - functions (p. 160) and Locking/

unlocking - from the inside (p. 173). The

doors and the boot lid are locked. To inter-

rupt closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING

If the sunroof is closed with the remote

control key, check that no one risks being

trapped.

Sunscreen

The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior

sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-

matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip

the handle and slide the screen forward to

close it.

03 Instruments and controls

107

Pinch protection

The sunroof's pinch protection function is

triggered if it is blocked by an object during

automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will

stop and automatically open to the previous

position.

Wind deflector

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is

folded up when the sunroof is in the open

position.

Menu navigation - combined

instrument panel

The left-hand stalk controls the menus

(p. 108) shown on the information display in

the combined instrument panel (p. 60). Which

menus are shown depends on the key posi-

tion (p. 75).

Display (analogue combined instrument panel)

and controls for menu navigation.

Display (digital combined instrument panel) and

controls for menu navigation.

OK – access to message list and mes-

sage confirmation.

Thumbwheel – browse between menu

options.

RESET – reset the active function. Used

in certain cases to select/activate a func-

tion, see the explanation under each

respective function.

If there is a message (p. 108) then it must be

acknowledged with OK in order that the

menus shall be shown.

Related information

•

Messages - handling (p. 109)

03 Instruments and controls

108

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Menu overview - combined

instrument panel

Which menus are shown in the combined

instrument panel's information display

depends on the key position (p. 75).

Some of the following menu options require

the function and hardware to be installed in

the car.

Analogue combined instrument panel

Digital speed

Parking heater*

Additional heater*

TC options

Service status

Oil level

Messages (##)

Digital combined instrument panel

Settings*

Themes

Contrast mode/Colour mode

Service status

Messages

Oil level

Parking heater*

Trip computer reset

Related information

•

Analogue combined instrument panel -

overview (p. 60)

•

Digital combined instrument panel - over-

view (p. 61)

•

Menu navigation - combined instrument

panel (p. 107)

Messages

When a warning, information or indicator

symbol illuminates, a corresponding message

appears on the information display.

Message Specification

Stop safely

Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage - consult a work-

shop

Stop engine

Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage - consult a work-

shop

Service

urgent

Contact a workshop

check the car immedi-

ately.

Service

required

Contact a workshop

check the car as soon as

possible.

See manual

Read the owner's man-

ual.

Book time

for mainte-

nance

Time to book regular

service - contact a work-

shop

Certain engines.

The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
Message Specification
Time for reg-
ular mainte-
nance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
. The
timing is determined by
the number of kilometres
driven, number of months
since the last service,
engine running time and
oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the
warranty does not cover
any damaged parts -
contact a workshop
B
.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshop
B
 to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Transmission
Reduced
performance
The gearbox cannot han-
dle full capacity. Drive
carefully until the mes-
sage clears
C
.
If shown repeatedly -
contact a workshop
B
.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clears
C
.
Message Specification
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait
for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe
manner and contact a
workshop
B
.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tem-
porarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after star-
ting again.
Low battery
charge
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the bat-
tery.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
C
For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 261).
Related information
•
Messages - handling (p. 109)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 107)
Messages - handling
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
and browse among messages (p. 108) that
are shown in the information display of the
combined instrument panel.
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears in the display at the same time. An
error message is stored in a memory list until
the fault has been rectified.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
acknowledge a message. Scroll through mes-
sages with the thumbwheel (p. 107).
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, the message
must be read (press OK) before the previ-
ous activity can be resumed.
Related information
•
Menu overview - combined instrument
panel (p. 108)

03 Instruments and controls

110

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MY CAR

MY CAR is a menu source that handles many

of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks

and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the

clock, etc.

Certain functions are standard, others are

optional - the range also varies depending on

the market.

Operation

Navigation in the menus is carried out using

buttons in the centre console or with the

steering wheel's right-hand keypad*.

Control panel in centre console and steering

wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the num-

ber of functions and layout of the buttons both

vary, depending on the equipment selected and

the market.

MY CAR - opens the menu system MY

CAR.

OK/MENU - press the button in the cen-

tre console or the thumbwheel on the

steering wheel to select/tick in the high-

lighted menu option or store the selected

function in the memory.

TUNE - turn the knob in the centre con-

sole or the thumbwheel on the steering

wheel to scroll up/down through the

menu options.

EXIT

EXIT functions

Depending on the function the cursor is on

when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which

menu level, one of the following may occur:

•

phone call is rejected

•

current function is interrupted

•

input characters are deleted

•

most recent selections are undone

•

leads up in the menu system.

A long press on EXIT leads to the normal

view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal

view, to the highest menu level (main source

menu).

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
Menu options and search paths
For a description of the menu options and
search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
Trip computer
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving.
Trip computer content and appearance varies
depending on whether the combined instru-
ment panel is analogue or digital:
•
Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel (p. 112)
•
Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 116)
Checking and settings of the trip computer
can be made immediately after the combined
instrument panel is automatically illuminated
in connection with unlocking. If none of the
trip computer's controls are actuated within
approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door
has been opened then the instrument extin-
guishes, after which either key position II
(p. 75) or starting the engine is required in
order to operate the trip computer.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
•
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Group menus
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
•
Functions
•
Heading in combined instrument panel
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.
Related information
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 121)
•
Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 120)

03 Instruments and controls

112

Trip computer - analogue combined

instrument panel

The trip computer's menu is in a variable

loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip

computer's display extinguishes - this also

marks the start/end of the loop.

Information display and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-

puter's functions + Activates the selected

option.

Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the

trip computer's headings + Scrolls

through the options.

RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of

a function after making a selection.

Functions

Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust

functions:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with

two presses on RESET.

2. Press OK - the loop with all functions

opens.

3. Browse through the functions with the

thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after

completed checking/adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer

are listed in the following table:

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

113

Functions Information

Digital speed

•

km/h

•

mph

•

No display

Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:

•

Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with RESET.

Parking heater*

•

DIRECT START

•

- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select-

ing time.

•

- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select-

ing time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - timer (p. 140).

Additional heater*

•

Auto On

•

Off

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 144).

TC options

•

Distance to empty tank

•

Fuel consumption

•

Average speed

•

Trip meter

T1 and total dist.

•

Trip meter

T2 and total dist.

Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in

the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are

GREY and have no "tick":

1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel

and select/stop on the desired symbol.

2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a

"tick".

3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.

Service status

Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

03 Instruments and controls

114

Functions Information

Oil level

For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 345).

Messages (##)

For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 109).

Certain engines.

Headings

One of the headings in the following table can

be selected for constant display in the com-

bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to

determine which:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with

two presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-

ings for the trip computer are shown in a

loop.

3. Stop on desired heading.

Trip computer heading in combined instrument

panel

Information

Trip meter T1 and total dist.

•

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Trip meter T2 and total dist.

•

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Distance to empty

For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 120).

Fuel consumption

Current consumption.

Average speed

•

Long press on RESET resets

Average speed.

No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's trip com-

puter can be changed to another option at

any time during the journey. Proceed as fol-

lows:

•

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the

desired heading.

Resetting - Trip meter and Average

speed

With the current trip computer heading - T1

and total dist.,T2 and total dist. or

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

115

Average speed - shown in the combined

instrument panel:

•

Give a long press on RESET - selected

heading is zeroed.

Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Related information

•

Trip computer (p. 111)

•

Trip computer - supplementary informa-

tion (p. 120)

•

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 121)

03 Instruments and controls

116

Trip computer - digital combined

instrument panel

The trip computer's menu is in a variable

loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip

computer's three displays extinguish - this

also marks the start/end of the loop.

Information displays and stalk switch controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-

puter's functions + Activates the selected

option.

Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the

trip computer's headings + Scrolls

through the options.

RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of

a function after making a selection.

Functions

Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust

functions:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with

two presses on RESET.

2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.

3. Browse through the functions with the

thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after

completed checking/adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer

are listed in the following table:

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

117

Functions Information

Trip computer reset

•

Average

•

Average speed

Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see table under next section

"Headings" and section "Resetting - Average speed/consumption" for information on the proc-

ess.

Messages

For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 109).

Themes

The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 60) is selected here.

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 144).

Contrast mode/Colour mode

Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.

Parking heater*

•

Direct start

•

- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for

selecting time.

•

- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for

selecting time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - timer (p. 140).

Service status

Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

Oil level

For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 345).

Certain engines.

03 Instruments and controls

118

Headings

Three trip computer headings can be displayed

simultaneously - one in each "window".

One of the heading combinations in the fol-

lowing table can be selected for constant dis-

play in the combined instrument panel. Pro-

ceed as follows to determine which:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with

two presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-

ing combinations are shown in a loop.

3. Stop on desired heading combination.

Heading combinations Information

Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed

•

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty

tank

•

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 120).

No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks

the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's heading

combination for the trip computer can be

changed to another option at any time during

the journey. Proceed as follows:

•

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the

desired heading.

Resetting - Trip meter

Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading

combination containing the trip meter to be

reset:

•

Give a long press on RESET - selected

trip meter is zeroed.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

119

Resetting - Average speed/

consumption

Select function

Trip computer

reset and activate with OK.

2. Select one of the following options with

the thumbwheel and activate with OK:

•

l/100 km

•

km/h

•

Reset both

3. Finish with RESET.

Related information

•

Trip computer - supplementary informa-

tion (p. 120)

•

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 121)

03 Instruments and controls
03
120
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer - supplementary
information
Supplementary information covering several
functions follows below.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-
driven heater* has been used.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the driv-
ing distance driven since the last reset to
zero.
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low
speed the consumption is shown per time
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to
mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for
the display - see section "Change unit"
(p. 120).
Range - distance to empty tank
The trip computer shows the approximate
distance that can be driven with the fuel
quantity remaining in the tank.
No guaranteed range remains when the head-
ing 
Distance to empty shows "----".
•
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driv-
ing style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more informa-
tion on how fuel consumption can be influ-
enced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environ-
mental Philosophy (p. 22).
Digital speed display
25
The speed is shown in the opposite unit
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com-
puter shows the corresponding speed in
km/h and vice versa.
Change unit
You can change unit (km/miles) for distance
and speed in the menu system MY CAR, see
MY CAR (p. 110).
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these
units are also changed in Volvo's naviga-
tion system*.
Related information
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 121)
25
Only with combined instrument panel "Digital".

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

121

Trip computer - trip statistics*

Information is stored about completed trips

containing average fuel consumption and

average speed, which can be viewed in the

centre console's screen as a bar chart.

Function

Trip statistics

Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven

distance, depending on the scale selected -

the bar at the far right shows the value for the

current kilometre or 10 km.

Using the TUNE control, the scale for the

bars can be changed between 1 km and

10 km - the cursor on the far right changes

position between up and down in relation to

the scale selected.

Operation

Different settings can be made in the menu

system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 110) -

there, find

Trip statistics.

With the "Reset when vehicle has been off

for minimum 4h" option highlighted, all sta-

tistics are deleted automatically once driving

is complete and the car has been stopped for

4 hours. Trip statistics start again from zero

the next time the engine is started.

•

Reset when vehicle has been off for

minimum 4h - highlight the box by

selecting ENTER and go back out of the

menu by selecting EXIT.

If a new driving cycle is started before

4 hours have elapsed then the current period

must first be deleted manually using the

Start new trip" option.

•

Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete

all previous statistics, go back out of the

menu by selecting EXIT.

See also information on Eco guide (p. 64).

Related information

•

Trip computer - supplementary informa-

tion (p. 120)

The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

CLIMATE CONTROL

04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
General information on climate
control
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control (p. 129). The climate control system
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air
in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 133) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possi-
ble climate comfort in the passenger com-
partment, and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be switched
on.
To bear in mind
•
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows, and sunroof*
should be closed.
•
Global opening (p. 174) opens/closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car
during hot weather.
•
Remove ice and snow from the climate
control system air intake (the grille
between the bonnet and the windscreen).
•
In warm weather, condensation from the
air conditioning may drip under the car.
This is normal.
•
When the engine requires full power, e.g.
for full acceleration, the air conditioning
can be temporarily switched off. There
may then be a temporary increase in tem-
perature in the passenger compartment.
•
Remove misting on the insides of the win-
dows primarily by using the defroster
function (p. 133). To reduce the risk of
misting, keep the windows clean and use
window cleaner.
NOTE
To avoid misting on the rear window, do
not block the ventilation holes at the back
of the parcel shelf with articles of clothing
or other objects.
Cars with Start/Stop*
With an auto-stopped (p. 268) engine certain
equipment may have its function temporarily
reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed
(p. 132).
Cars with ECO*
Certain equipment may have its function tem-
porarily reduced or deactivated when the
ECO (p. 276) function is activated, e.g. the air
conditioning (p. 133).
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, sev-
eral parameters in the climate control sys-
tem's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are
reduced. Certain settings can be reset
manually, but full functionality is only
restored by deactivating the ECO function.
Related information
•
Actual temperature (p. 124)
•
Menu settings - climate control (p. 126)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 129)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 127)
•
Air quality (p. 124)

04 Climate control
04
124
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physical
experience with reference to factors such as
ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and
solar radiation etc. in and around the car at
the time.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 124)
which detects on which side the sun is shin-
ing into the passenger compartment. This
means that the temperature can differ
between the right and left-hand air vents
despite the controls being set for the same
temperature on both sides.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
•
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment (p. 132)
Sensors - climate control
The climate control system has a number of
sensors to help control the temperature
(p. 124) in the car.
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passen-
ger compartment is located below the cli-
mate control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is
located in the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor* is located by the
interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
Air quality
The interior in a passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with contact allergies and for
asthma sufferers.
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 125)
•
Material in the passenger compartment
(p. 126)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
(p. 125)*
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
(p. 126)*
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)

04 Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

125

Air quality - passenger compartment

filter

All air entering the car's passenger compart-

ment is cleaned with a filter.

The filter must be replaced at regular inter-

vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for

the recommended replacement intervals. If

the car is used in a severely contaminated

environment, it may be necessary to replace

the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger

compartment filter. Make sure that the cor-

rect filter is fitted.

Related information

•

Air quality (p. 124)

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior

Package (CZIP)*

CZIP comprises a series of modifications that

keep the passenger compartment even

clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub-

stances.

The following is included:

•

An enhanced fan function that means that

the fan starts when the car is opened with

the remote control key. The fan fills the

passenger compartment with fresh air.

The function starts when required and is

disengaged automatically after a time or

when one of the passenger compartment

doors is opened. The amount of time the

fan runs is reduced gradually due to

reduced need up until the car is 4 years

old.

•

The air quality system IAQS (p. 126) is a

fully automatic system that cleans the air

in the passenger compartment from con-

taminants such as particles, hydrocar-

bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level

ozone.

NOTE

To keep the CZIP standard in cars with

CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after

15 000 km or once per year depending on

whichever occurs first. However, up to

75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without

CZIP and where the customer does not

want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS

filter must be changed at a regular service.

For more information on CZIP, see the bro-

chure included with the purchase of the car.

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Air quality (p. 124)

04 Climate control
04
126
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air quality - IAQS*
The air quality system IAQS separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours
and pollution in the passenger compartment.
If the outside air is contaminated then the air
intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 110).
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be ena-
bled to ensure the best air in the passen-
ger compartment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the air quality sen-
sor should be disengaged, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen and
side windows, as well as the rear window,
should be used.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
•
Air quality (p. 124)
•
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 125)
Air quality - material
Tested materials have been developed in
order to minimise the quantity of dust in the
passenger compartment and to contribute to
making the passenger compartment easier to
keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compart-
ment and the cargo area are removable and
easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 383).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 124)
Menu settings - climate control
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for six of the climate con-
trol system's functions via the centre console.
•
Fan level during automatic climate control
(p. 132).
•
Recirculation timer (p. 134).
•
Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 103).
•
Interior air quality system* (p. 126).
•
Automatic start of seat heating driver
(p. 130).
•
Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 82).
More information is available in the descrip-
tion of the menu system (p. 110).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset in the menu system MY CAR to the
default settings. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)

04 Climate control

}}

127

Air distribution in the passenger

compartment

The incoming air is divided between a number

of different vents in the passenger compart-

ment.

G021366

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode.

If necessary it can be controlled manually;

see the air distribution table (p. 136).

Air vents in the dashboard

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows to

remove misting.

Air vents in the door pillars

G021368

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-

ing in cold weather.

Aim the vents into the passenger compart-

ment to maintain a comfortable climate in the

rear seat in hot weather.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sen-

sitive to air flows and draughts.

04 Climate control

128

Air distribution

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - ventilation floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When

pressing the buttons the corresponding figure

is illuminated in the screen (see following fig-

ure) and an arrow in front of each part of the

figure shows the air distribution that is

selected. For more information, see the air

distribution table (p. 136).

The selected air distribution is shown in the cen-

tre console display screen.

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Auto-regulation (p. 132)

•

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 134)

04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
Electronic climate control - ECC
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains
the temperature selected in the passenger
compartment and can be set separately for
the driver's side and passenger side.
The auto function is used to automatically
control temperature, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation and air distribution.
Temperature control (p. 132), left-hand
side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 130) , left
side
1
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
(p. 133)
Fan (p. 132)
Air distribution (p. 127) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
(p. 103)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 130),
right-hand side
1
Temperature control (p. 132), right-hand
side
Recirculation (p. 134)
ECO* (p. 276)
AUTO - Automatic climate control
(p. 132)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 133)
Ventilated front seat (p. 131)*, left-hand
side
Ventilated front seat*, right-hand side
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
1
The button has a different location depending on whether or not the car is equipped with ventilated front seat*.

04 Climate control

130

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Heated front seats*

The front seat heating has three positions for

increasing the comfort for driver and passen-

ger when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the centre console

display screen.

The button has a different

location depending on

whether or not the car is

equipped with ventilated

front seat*, see illustration

(p. 129).

Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-

vate the function:

•

Highest heat level - three orange fields

illuminate in the centre console's screen

(see figure above).

•

Lower heat level - two orange fields illu-

minate in the screen.

•

Lowest heat level - one orange field illu-

minates in the screen.

•

Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people

who find it difficult to perceive an increase

in temperature due to a lack of sensation

or who otherwise have problems operating

the controls for the heated seats. Other-

wise they may suffer burn injuries.

Automatic start of driver's seat heating

With the automatic start of the driver's seat

heating activated, the driver's seat will have

the highest heat level when the engine is

started.

Automatic start takes place when the car is

cold and the ambient temperature is lower

than approx. +10 °C.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-

tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a

description of the menu system, see MY CAR

(p. 110).

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Heated rear seat* (p. 130)

Heated rear seat*

The heating for the rear seat's outer positions

has three positions for increasing the comfort

for passengers when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's

lamps.

Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-

vate the function:

•

Highest heat level - three lamps illumi-

nate.

•

Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.

•

Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.

•

Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

04 Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

131

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people

who find it difficult to perceive an increase

in temperature due to a lack of sensation

or who otherwise have problems operating

the controls for the heated seats. Other-

wise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Heated front seats* (p. 130)

Ventilated front seats*

The ventilation can be used at the same time

as seat heating. For example, the function can

be used to dry damp from clothing.

The ventilation system consists of fans in the

seats and backrests that draw air through the

seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases

the cooler the passenger compartment air

becomes. The system can be activated when

the engine is running.

The ventilation is regulated from the climate

control and takes seat temperature, solar

radiation and outside temperature into consi-

deration.

Current comfort level is shown in the centre con-

sole display screen.

For button location, see the

illustration (p. 129).

Press the button repeatedly

in order to activate the func-

tion.

There are three comfort levels that produce

different cooling and dehumidification out-

puts:

•

Comfort level III: Highest output - three

blue fields illuminate in the centre con-

sole's screen (see figure above).

•

Comfort level II: Lower output - two blue

fields illuminate in the screen.

•

Comfort level I: Lowest output - one blue

field illuminates in the screen.

•

Switch off the function - no field illumi-

nates.

NOTE

The seat ventilation should be used care-

fully by people sensitive to draughts. Com-

fort level I is recommended for long-term

use.

IMPORTANT

The seat ventilation cannot be started

when the passenger compartment tem-

perature is below 5 °C. This is in order to

avoid cooling down the seat occupant.

04 Climate control
04
132
Fan
The fan should always be activated in order to
avoid misting on the windows.
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected, then the fan
speed is regulated automati-
cally (p. 132) - the fan speed
previously set is disengaged.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 129)
Auto-regulation
The auto function automatically regulates
temperature (p. 132), air conditioning
(p. 133), fan speed (p. 132), recirculation
(p. 134) and air distribution (p. 127).
If you select one or more
manual functions, the other
functions continue to be
controlled automatically. All
manual settings are disen-
gaged when AUTO is
pressed. The display screen
shows 
AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment
When the car is started, the most recent tem-
perature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
Current temperature for each side is shown in
the centre console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob -
separately for the driver's
side and the passenger side.

04 Climate control

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

133

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Actual temperature (p. 124)

•

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 129)

Air conditioning

The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies

incoming air as required.

When the lamp in the AC

button illuminates, the air

conditioning is controlled by

the system's automatic func-

tion.

When the lamp in the AC

button is switched off the air conditioning is

disconnected. Other functions are still con-

trolled automatically. When the max.

defroster function (p. 133) is activated, the air

conditioning is switched on automatically so

that the air is dehumidified at the maximum

setting.

Demisting and defrosting the

windscreen

Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are

used to quickly remove misting and ice from

the windscreen and side windows.

The selected setting is shown in the centre con-

sole's screen.

Heated windscreen*

Max. defroster

The light in the defroster but-

ton illuminates when the

function is active.

Press the button repeatedly

in order to activate the func-

tion.

||
04 Climate control
04
134
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
For cars without heated windscreen:
•
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu-
minates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
nates.
For cars with heated windscreen:
•
Start the heating for the windscreen
2
 -
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
•
Start the heating for the windscreen
2
 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and
(2) illuminate in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
nates.
NOTE
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 19)
may have an impact on the performance of
transponders and other communication
equipment.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not avail-
able when the engine is auto-stopped
(p. 268).
The following also takes place in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the pas-
senger compartment:
•
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 123)
Air distribution - recirculation
Select recirculation to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com-
partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the
car when this function is activated.
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too
long then there is a risk of misting on the
insides of the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 110).
2
If the character 
C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 104)* must be recalibrated.

04 Climate control

135

NOTE

When max. defroster is selected, recircula-

tion is always deactivated.

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Air distribution in the passenger compart-

ment (p. 127)

•

Air distribution - table (p. 136)

04 Climate control

136

Air distribution - table

Three buttons are used to select the distribu-

tion (p. 127) of the air.

Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not

recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.

to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air

flows from the air vents.

to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate

(to achieve this the fan level must not be too low).

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

04 Climate control

137

Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard

air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in

cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win-

dows.

to direct heat or cold to the floor.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or

warming upwards in cold weather.

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

•

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 134)

04 Climate control
04
138
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater*
Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine
and passenger compartment before depar-
ture so that both wear and energy needs dur-
ing the journey are reduced.
The heater can be started directly (p. 139) or
with a timer (p. 140).
The heater cannot start if the outside tem-
perature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the
maximum running time of the heater is 50
minutes.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors.
Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
active there may be smoke from the right-
hand wheel housing, which is perfectly
normal.
Refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel
that the heater is switched off. The heat
symbol is shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the
fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
appears on the information display. Acknowl-
edge the message by pressing the indicator
stalk (p. 107) OK button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the heater combined with
short journeys leads to the battery dis-
charging and consequential starting prob-
lems.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the
car's battery is recharged adequately to
replace the energy consumed by the
heater when it is used on a regular basis.
The heater is used for a maximum of 50
minutes each time.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
•
Additional heater* (p. 144)

04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - direct start
The engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater can be started directly.
Direct start can be performed via:
•
information display
•
remote control key*
•
mobile*.
Upon direct start of the engine block and
passenger compartment heater (p. 138), it will
run for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while
the heater is running.
Direct start via the information display
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to 
Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to 
Direct
start
 in order to activate the heater and
select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Direct start via the remote control key*
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
The engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater can be activated via the
remote control key:
–
Hold the button for approach lighting 
depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide informa-
tion in accordance with the following:
•
5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
has reached the car and the heater has
been activated.
•
5 short flashes - the signal has
reached the car but the heater has not
been activated.
•
Hazard warning flashers remain
switched off - the signal has not
reached the car.
If the button for information 
 is depressed
when the heater is active then the indicator
lamp will show the status for this - at the
same time the car's lock status (p. 162) is
shown. While the status is being investigated
the indicator lamp emits a pair of short
flashes followed by a constant glow if the
heater is active.
Status is also shown in the trip computer dur-
ing heating.
Direct start via a mobile*
Activation and information about the selected
settings that can be managed from a mobile
phone will be available via the Volvo On Call*
mobile app.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer (p. 140)
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - immediate stop
(p. 140)
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 142)

04 Climate control
04
140
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - immediate
stop
The engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater can be deactivated directly
via the information display.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to 
Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to 
Stop in
order to deactivate the heater and select
with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - direct start (p. 139)
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer (p. 140)
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - timer
The timer of the engine block and passenger
compartment heater (p. 138) is connected to
the car's clock.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the
car is heated and ready. The car's electronic
system calculates when heating should be
started based on the outside temperature.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
Adjusting
3
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 107) to scroll to
one of the timers 
Parking heater and
select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours
setting.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing
minutes setting.
7. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
8.
Press OK
4
 to confirm the setting.
9. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.
10. Select the other time (continue from step
2) or exit the menu with RESET.
Starting
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to 
Parking
heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Switching off
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
3
Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off.
4
Press OK again to activate the timer.

04 Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

141

Scroll with the thumbwheel to

Parking

heater and select with OK.

> If a timer is set but not activated then a

clock icon is shown beside the set

time.

3. Select one of the two timers using the

thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Deactivate the timer as follows:

•

long press on OK or

•

short press on OK to continue in the

menu. Then select to stop the timer

and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

A timer-started heater can be switched off

directly (p. 140).

Related information

•

Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - messages (p. 142)

04 Climate control

142

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine block heater and passenger

compartment heater* - messages

Symbols and display messages regarding the

engine block and passenger compartment

heater (p. 138) differ depending on whether

the combined instrument panel (p. 60) is ana-

logue or digital.

When the heater has been activated

the heat symbol illuminates in the

information display.

When one of the timers has been activated,

the symbol for activated timer illuminates in

the display at the same time as the set time is

shown next to the symbol.

Symbol for activated timer in ana-

logue combined instrument panel.

Symbol for activated timer in digital

combined instrument panel.

The table shows symbols and display texts

that appear.

Symbol Message Specification

The heater is switched on and running.

Fuel operated heater stopped

Battery saving mode

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

04 Climate control

143

Symbol Message Specification

Fuel operated heater stopped

Low fuel level

Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate

starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.

Fuel operated heater Service

required

Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

A display text clears automatically after a time

or after one press on the indicator stalk

(p. 107) OK button.

04 Climate control
04
144
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Additional heater*
In cold climate zones
5
 an additional heater
may be required to obtain the correct operat-
ing temperature in the engine and to obtain
sufficient heating in the passenger compart-
ment.
A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 144) is fit-
ted in cars with diesel engines.
In a semi-cold
5
 climate zone diesel-driven
cars have an electric additional heater
(p. 145) instead of a fuel-driven version.
Cars with certain petrol engines
6
 have an
electric additional heater integrated into the
car's climate control system.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* (p. 138)
Fuel-driven additional heater*
The car is equipped with either an electric
(p. 145) or a fuel-driven additional heater
(p. 144).
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when
the engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing, which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start
sequence can be switched off if required.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven
additional heater should be switched off
for short distances.
1. Before starting the engine: Select key
position I (p. 75).
2. Press OK to access the menu.
3.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to 
Additional
heater
7
 or 
Settings
8
 and select with OK.
4.
Select one of the options 
ON or OFF
using the thumbwheel and confirm with
OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
a timer function then it can be used as a pas-
senger compartment heater (p. 138).
5
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
6
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
7
Analogue combined instrument panel.
8
Digital combined instrument panel.

04 Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

145

Electric additional heater*

The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven

(p. 144) or an electric additional heater

(p. 144).

The heater cannot be controlled manually, but

is instead activated automatically after the

engine has been started in outside tempera-

tures below 14 °C and is switched off after

the set passenger compartment temperature

has been reached.

Related information

•

Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* (p. 138)

LOADING AND STORAGE

05 Loading and storage

}}

147

Storage spaces

Overview of storage spaces in the passenger

compartment.

05 Loading and storage

148

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front

seat cushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox (p. 149)

Storage compartment

Storage compartment, cup holder

(p. 149)

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile

phones, cameras, remote controls for

accessories, etc. in the glove compartment

or other compartments. Otherwise they

may injure people in the car in the event of

sudden braking or a collision.

05 Loading and storage
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and pas-
senger. If ashtray and cigarette lighter
(p. 149) are specified, then there is a cig-
arette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 150)
for the front seat, and a detachable ash-
tray in the cup holder.
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 147)
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 149)
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*
A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 150) for the
front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 149) is
detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 147)
Glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger
side.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
can be locked* (p. 174) using the key blade
(p. 164).
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 147)

05 Loading and storage

150

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Inlay mats*

Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush.

Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay

mats.

WARNING

Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and

check before setting off that the mat by

the driver's seat is firmly affixed and

secured in the pins so that it does not get

caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

Related information

•

Cleaning the interior (p. 383)

Vanity mirror

The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the

sun visor.

G021438

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The light illuminates automatically when the

cover is lifted.

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting

(p. 357)

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets

The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next

to the cup holder

and rear of the tunnel con-

sole.

G021439

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

G021440

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

05 Loading and storage
05
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV
screens, music players and mobile phones.
For the socket to supply current, the remote
control key must be in at least key position I
(p. 75).
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of
the passenger compartment's 12V electri-
cal sockets, could be activated by the cli-
mate control system, even when the
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when
the parking heater is activated at a preset
time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment
or accessories when not in use because
the battery could be drained in the event of
such an occurrence!
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket
is used at a time. If both sockets in the
tunnel console are used simultaneously,
7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 323) has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 149)
•
12 V electrical socket, cargo area*
(p. 155)
Loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories reduces the car's payload by
a corresponding weight.
For more detailed information on weights, see
Weights (p. 391).
The boot lid is opened via a button
on the lighting panel or the remote
control key, see Locking/unlocking -
boot lid (p. 175).
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the func-
tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 38).
•
Centre the load.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.

05 Loading and storage

152

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

Cover sharp edges with something soft to

avoid damaging the upholstery.

•

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-

lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a

frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,

carry the impact of an item weighing

1000 kg.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatable

curtain in the headlining may be compro-

mised or eliminated by high loads.

•

Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy

braking the load may otherwise shift, caus-

ing injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with

something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the park-

ing brake when loading/unloading long

items. Otherwise you may accidentally

knock the gear lever or gear selector with

the load into a drive position - and the car

could then move off.

Related information

•

Load retaining eyelets (p. 154)

•

Loading - long load (p. 152)

•

Roof load (p. 153)

Loading - long load

To simplify loading (p. 151) in the cargo area,

the rear seat backrest can be folded down.

The passenger seat

backrest can also be

folded for an extra long load*.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered,

see Seats, rear (p. 79).

Only applies to comfort seats.

05 Loading and storage

153

Loading - ski hatch

The hatch in the backrest can be opened to

transport long narrow items.

Fold the right-hand backrest forward.

Release the hatch in the rear seat back-

rest by sliding the bolt up while pressing

the hatch down/forward.

Fold back the backrest with the hatch

open.

Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from

moving.

WARNING

Stop the engine and apply the parking

brake when loading and unloading. Other-

wise the gear lever/selector can acciden-

tally be knocked and moved to a driving

position.

Removing the hatch

After the hatch has been released and the

backrest folded backwards, open the hatch

approx. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.

Attaching the hatch

Refit the hatch in the grooves behind the

upholstery and close the hatch.

Related information

•

Loading (p. 151)

Roof load

The load carriers recommended for roof loads

are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in

order to avoid damage to the car and in order

to achieve the maximum possible safety dur-

ing a journey.

Carefully follow the installation instructions

supplied with the carriers.

•

Check periodically that the load carriers

and load are properly secured. Lash the

load securely with retaining straps.

•

Distribute the load evenly over the load

carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the

bottom.

•

The size of the area exposed to the wind,

and therefore fuel consumption, increase

with the size of the load.

•

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,

heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-

racteristics are altered by roof loads.

For information about the maximum per-

mitted load on the roof, including load car-

riers and any space box, see Weights

(p. 391).

Related information

•

Loading (p. 151)

05 Loading and storage

154

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Load retaining eyelets

The folding load retaining eyelets

are used to

fasten straps in order to anchor items in the

cargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which

protrude may cause injury under violent

braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information

•

Loading (p. 151)

Loading - bag holder*

The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place

and prevents them from overturning and

spreading their contents across the cargo

area.

G021463

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.

1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the

floor hatch.

2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure

the carrying handle in the hooks.

Related information

•

Loading (p. 151)

Number of eyes and their locations varies depending on market.

05 Loading and storage

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

155

12 V electrical socket, cargo area*

The electrical socket can be used for various

accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens,

music players and mobile phones.

Raise the cover to access the electrical

socket.

•

The socket also provides voltage when

the remote control key is not in the igni-

tion switch.

IMPORTANT

Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socket

with the engine switched off involves the

risk of discharging the car's starter battery.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency

puncture repair has been tested and

approved by Volvo. For information on the

use of Volvo's recommended temporary

emergency puncture repair (TMK), see

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323).

LOCKS AND ALARM

06 Locks and alarm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

157

Remote control key

Amongst other things, the remote control key

is used for locking/unlocking and starting the

engine.

There are two variants of remote control key -

Remote control key in basic version and

Remote control key with PCC (Personal Car

Communicator)*.

Functionality

Basic

with

PCC

Locking/unlocking

and detachable key

blade

x x

Keyless locking/

unlocking

Keyless engine star-

ting

Information button

and indicator lamps

5-button key

6-button key

Remote control key with PCC has extended

functionality compared with the remote con-

trol key in the basic version - e.g. support for

Keyless Drive (p. 168) and certain unique

functions (p. 162).

All remote control keys have a detachable key

blade (p. 164) made of metal. The visible

section is available in two versions so that it

is possible to distinguish between the remote

control keys.

More remote control keys can be ordered -

but not variants other than the one supplied

with the car. Up to six keys can be pro-

grammed and used for one single car.

The car is supplied with two remote control

keys

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the

power windows and sunroof by removing

the remote control key if the driver leaves

the car.

Related information

•

Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Remote control key - losing

If you lose a remote control key then a new

one can be ordered at a workshop - an

authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The remaining remote control keys must be

taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the

missing remote control key must be erased

from the system as a theft prevention meas-

ure.

The current number of keys registered to the

car can be checked in the menu system MY

CAR. For a description of the menu system,

see MY CAR (p. 110).

Related information

•

Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

06 Locks and alarm
06
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key - personalisation*
The key memory in the remote control key
(p. 157) means that certain settings in the car
can be individually adapted for different peo-
ple.
The key memory function is available in com-
bination with power* driver's seat.
Settings for door mirrors (p. 101), driver's
seat, steering force (p. 183) and the com-
bined instrument panel's theme, contrast and
colour mode (p. 61) can be stored in the
memory, depending on the car's equipment
level.
The function
1
 can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 110).
When the function is activated, the settings
are automatically linked to the key memory.
This means that a change in a setting will
automatically be saved to the specific remote
control key's memory.
Storing settings
Make sure that the key memory function is
activated in the menu system MY CAR.
Proceed as follows in order to store the set-
tings and use the key memory in the remote
control key:
1. Unlock the car with the remote control
key in whose memory the setting
2
 shall
be stored.
2. Make the desired settings for e.g. the
seat and the door mirrors.
3. The settings are stored in the current
remote control key's memory.
The next time the car is unlocked with the
same remote control key, the positions that
are stored in the key memory will be set auto-
matically - providing that they have been
changed since the last time the current
remote control key was used.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Make
sure that none of the passengers in the
rear seat is in danger of becoming trap-
ped.
Changing settings
If several people each with a remote control
key approach the car, then the settings for
e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented
for the person whose remote control key
unlocks the driver's door.
If the driver's door has been opened by
person A with remote control key A, but
person B with remote control key B shall
drive, then the settings can be changed as
follows:
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
presses the button for unlocking on
his/her remote control key, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 160).
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
1
Called Car key memory in MY CAR.
2
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

06 Locks and alarm
06
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
Seats, front - electrically operated*
(p. 78).
•
Adjust seat and door mirrors manually,
see Seats, front - electrically operated*
(p. 78) and Door mirrors (p. 101).
Reactivation of settings
When the car is locked or after 30 minutes if
the car is left unlocked, the key memory will
be deactivated and a standard driver profile
will be set. To reactivate the key memory for
the current remote control key, the following
is required.
For cars without Keyless Drive
The settings that are stored in the key mem-
ory are activated if the car is unlocked by
pressing the remote control key's unlock but-
ton.
For cars with Keyless Drive
The key memory is activated if:
1. The car is unlocked either by pressing the
remote control key's unlock button or via
keyless unlocking.
2. If the car is unlocked, a key scan is made
when the driver's door is opened. If a
unique remote control key is found, its
stored settings will be activated. If the car
is locked, see the previous point.
Related information
•
Remote control key with PCC* - unique
functions (p. 162)
Locking/unlocking - indicator
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key (p. 157) the direction indi-
cators confirm that locking/unlocking was
correctly performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded
3
 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
rors are folded
3
 out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/
unlocking with light can be set in the car's
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 168)
•
Alarm indicator (p. 179)
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec-
tion system that prevents an unauthorised
person from starting the car.
Each remote control key (p. 157) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the
correct remote control key with the correct
code.
The following error messages in the com-
bined instrument panel's information display
are related to the electronic immobiliser:
3
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm

160

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Mes-

sage

Specification

Insert car

key

Error when reading the

remote control key during

starting - Remove the key

from the ignition switch, press

it in again and make a new

start attempt.

Car key

not found

Error reading the remote con-

trol key during starting - Try

to start again.

If the error persists: Insert the

remote control key into the

ignition switch and try to start

again.

Immobi-

liser Try

to start

again

Error in immobiliser system

during starting. If the error

persists: Contact a workshop

- an authorised Volvo work-

shop is recommended.

For starting the car, see Starting the engine

(p. 253).

Related information

•

Remote-controlled immobiliser with

tracking system* (p. 160)

Remote-controlled immobiliser with

tracking system*

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking

system

makes it possible to track and locate

the car, and to remotely activate the immobi-

liser to switch off the engine.

Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more

information and assistance with activating the

system.

Related information

•

Remote control key (p. 157)

•

Immobiliser (p. 159)

Remote control key - functions

The remote control key in basic version has

functions such as locking and unlocking the

doors.

Functions

Remote control key in basic version.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Boot lid

Panic function

Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car
Communicator).
  Information
Function buttons
 Locking – Locks the doors and boot lid
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold to close all the windows and
sunroof* simultaneously. For more informa-
tion, see Global opening (p. 174).
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed
using the remote control key, check that
nobody's hands are trapped.
 Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and boot
lid while the alarm is deactivated.
Press and hold to open all windows simulta-
neously. For more information, see Global
opening (p. 174).
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
driver's door only with one press of the but-
ton and, after a further press of the button -
within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 110).
 Approach light duration – Used to
switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see Approach lighting
(p. 93).
 Boot lid (p. 175) - Unlocks and disarms
the alarm for the boot lid only.
 Panic function – Used to attract atten-
tion in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 157)
•
Remote control key with PCC* - unique
functions (p. 162)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 173)

06 Locks and alarm

162

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key - range

Remote control key functions (in its basic ver-

sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from

the car.

If the car does not verify a button being

pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be

disrupted by surrounding radio waves,

buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

The car can always be locked/unlocked

with the key blade (p. 165).

If the remote control key is removed from the

car when the engine is running or key position

I or II (p. 75) is active, and if all doors are

closed, then a warning message is shown in

the information display in the combined

instrument panel and an audio reminder sig-

nal sounds at the same time.

The message is extinguished and the audible

reminder signal stops when the remote con-

trol key is brought back to the car after

either/or:

•

The remote control key has been inserted

in the ignition switch.

•

Speed exceeds 30 km/h.

•

The OK button has been pressed.

Related information

•

Remote control key (p. 157)

•

Remote control key - functions (p. 160)

Remote control key with PCC* -

unique functions

A remote control key with PCC has enhanced

functionality compared with a remote control

key in basic version (p. 157) in the form of an

information button and indicator lamps.

Remote control key with PCC.

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access

to certain information from the car via the

indicator lamps.

06 Locks and alarm

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

163

Using the information button

–

Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approxi-

mately 7 seconds and the light travels

around on the remote control key. This

indicates that information from the car

is being scanned.

If any of the other buttons are pressed

during this time then the reading is

interrupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illumi-

nates with repeated use of the information

button and in different locations (as well as

after 7 seconds and after the light has

travelled around on the PCC), contact a

workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop

is recommended.

Indicator lamps display information in accord-

ance with the following illustration:

Green continuous light – the car is

locked.

Yellow continuous light – the car is

unlocked.

Red continuous light – the alarm has

been triggered since the car was locked.

Red light flashing alternately in both indi-

cator lamps – The alarm was triggered

less than 5 minutes ago.

Related information

•

Remote control key with PCC* - range

(p. 163)

Remote control key with PCC* - range

The range of a remote control key with PCC

(Personal Car Communicator) for locking,

unlocking the doors and boot lid is approx. 20

metres from the car - the other functions are

up to approx. 100 metres.

If the car does not verify a button being

pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button function may be

disrupted by surrounding radio waves,

buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Outside the remote control key's range

If the remote control key is too far away from

the car for the information to be read then the

status the car was last left in is shown, with-

out the light in the indicator lamps travelling

around on the remote control key.

If several remote control keys are used for the

car then it is only the one last used for lock-

ing/unlocking that shows the correct status.

NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate when

the information button is used within range

then this may be because the last commu-

nication between the remote control key

and the car was disrupted by surrounding

radio waves, buildings, topographical con-

ditions, etc.

||
06 Locks and alarm
06
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 168)
•
Remote control key - range (p. 162)
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
•
the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see Detachable
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 165).
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated
(p. 177).
•
access to the glovebox and cargo area (
privacy locking * (p. 165)) can be
blocked.
•
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
(p. 33).
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 160)
•
Remote control key (p. 157)
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
(p. 164) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key (p. 157).
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.

06 Locks and alarm
06
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
Related information
•
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 165)
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 177)
•
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing* (p. 33)
Detachable key blade - unlocking
doors
The detachable key blade (p. 164) can be
used if central locking cannot be activated
with the remote control key (p. 157), e.g. if the
key's battery has run out.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the driver's door can be
opened as follows:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
For illustration and more information, see
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 171).
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with the Keyless system, see Key-
less drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 171).
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 157)
•
Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery (p. 167)
Privacy locking*
Privacy locking is intended for when the car is
left for service, with a hotel parking valet or
similar. The glovebox is then locked and the
boot lid lock is disconnected from the central
locking - the boot lid cannot be opened with
either the central locking button in the front
doors or the remote control key (p. 157).
Active locks for remote control key with key
blade.

06 Locks and alarm

166

G021084

Active locks for remote control key, without key

blade and privacy locking activated.

This means that the remote control key with-

out key blade can only be used to activate/

deactivate the alarm (p. 178), to open the

doors and to drive the car.

The remote control key without key blade can

then be handed over to the service or hotel

staff - the loose key blade is retained by the

car owner.

Activate/deactivate

Activating privacy locking.

To activate privacy locking:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock

cylinder.

Turn the key blade 180 degrees clock-

wise.

Pull out the key blade. The combined

instrument panel's information display

shows a message at the same time.

The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid

can no longer be unlocked with the remote

control key or the central locking button.

NOTE

Do not reinsert the key blade into the

remote control key, but keep it in a safe

place instead.

•

Deactivation takes place in reverse order.

For information on locking the glovebox only,

see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 174).

06 Locks and alarm

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

167

Remote control key - replacing the

battery

The battery

for the remote control key may

need to be replaced.

The battery for the remote control key should

be replaced if:

•

the information symbol in the combined

instrument panel illuminates and the dis-

play shows

Car key battery low See

manual

and/or

•

the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-

nals from the remote control key within

20 metres from the car.

Opening

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the

side.

At the same time pull the key blade

straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the

hole behind the spring-loaded catch and

gently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the

buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-

teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their

contact surfaces with your fingers as this

may impair their function.

Battery replacement

Closely study how the battery/batteries

are secured on the inside of the cover,

with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.

Remote control key (one battery)

1. Carefully prize out the battery.

2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

Remote control key with PCC* (two

batteries)

1. Carefully prize out the batteries.

2. First install one new one with the (+) side

up.

3. Position the white plastic tab in between

and finally install a second new battery

with the (+) side down.

Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.

||
06 Locks and alarm
06
168
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation
CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key,
two in the remote control key with PCC.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil
UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,
sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo
workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are
disposed of in a manner which is kind to
the environment.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 157)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 160)
Keyless drive*
Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star-
ting and locking system that can be operated
keylessly.
With the keyless starting and locking system
the car can be started, locked and unlocked
without the remote control key (p. 157)
6
inserted in the ignition switch. It is enough to
have the remote control key with you in a
pocket. The system makes it easier and more
convenient to e.g. open the car when your
hands are full.
Both of the remote control keys included with
the car have Keyless functionality. It is possi-
ble to order more remote control keys.
The car's electrical system can be set to
three different levels - key position 0, I and II
(p. 75) - with the remote control key.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 168)
•
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 169)
•
Keyless drive* - interference to remote
control key function (p. 170)
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range
In order to unlock the doors or boot lid auto-
matically without pressing a button on the
6
Only applies to Remote Control Key with PCC.

06 Locks and alarm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

169

remote control key

, a remote control key

must be within approx. 1.5 metres from the

car's door handle or boot lid.

The person who wishes to lock or unlock a

door must have the remote control key with

him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock

a door if the remote control key is on the

opposite side of the car.

G020577

The red rings in the above figure indicate the

range covered by the system's antennas.

If all remote control keys are removed from

the car when the engine is running or key

position I or II (p. 75) is active, and if all doors

are closed, then a warning message is shown

in the information display in the combined

instrument panel and an audio reminder sig-

nal sounds at the same time.

When the remote control key has been

returned to the car, the warning message

goes off and the audible reminder ceases

once either/or:

•

a door has been opened and closed

•

the remote control key has been inserted

in the ignition switch

•

The OK button has been pressed.

Related information

•

Keyless drive* (p. 168)

•

Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 172)

Keyless drive* - secure handling of

the remote control key

It is important to handle the car's remote con-

trol keys with great care.

If one of the remote control keys

has been

left in the car then the Keyless functionality is

deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with

the other remote control key that belongs to

the car. This prevents unauthorised entry.

The next time the car is unlocked with the

other remote control key the forgotten remote

control key is reactivated again.

IMPORTANT

Avoid leaving the remote control key with

PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks

into your car and takes the remote control

key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car

by pressing the remote control key in the

ignition switch and then pressing the

START/STOP ENGINE button.

Related information

•

Keyless drive* (p. 168)

Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

06 Locks and alarm
06
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless drive* - interference to
remote control key function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can
interfere with the remote control key's Keyless
functions (p. 168).
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than
10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless,
use the remote control key and the key blade
like a remote control key in basic version, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 160).
Related information
•
Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery (p. 167)
•
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 169)
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 168)
Keyless drive* - locking
Cars equipped with Keyless drive have a but-
ton on the outer door handles for locking/
unlocking.
Cars with the keyless system have a button on
the outside door handles.
Lock the doors and the boot lid by pressing
the lock button on one of the door handles on
the outside.
All doors and the boot lid must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 168)
•
Alarm indicator (p. 179)

06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
Keyless drive* - unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the boot lid's rubberised pres-
sure plate is actuated - open the door or boot
lid as normal.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 168)
•
Keyless drive* - locking (p. 170)
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the
key blade 
If central locking cannot be unlocked with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are
discharged, then the left-hand driver's door
can be opened using the detachable key
blade.
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automati-
cally by means of the torque when the
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl-
inder and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm -
remote control key not working (p. 180).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 168)
•
Detachable key blade - detaching/attach-
ing (p. 164)
•
Alarm (p. 178)

06 Locks and alarm

172

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless Drive* - lock settings

Lock settings for cars equipped with Keyless

Drive can be adapted by indicating in the

menu system MY CAR which doors are to be

unlocked.

For a description of the menu system, see

MY CAR (p. 110).

Related information

•

Keyless drive* (p. 168)

Keyless Drive* - antenna location

Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a

number of built-in antennas positioned at dif-

ferent locations in the car.

Rear bumper, centre

Door handle, left rear

Parcel shelf, centre, underside

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should

not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless

system's antennae with their pacemaker.

This is to prevent interference between the

pacemaker and the keyless system.

Related information

•

Keyless drive* (p. 168)

06 Locks and alarm
06
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
out using the remote control key (p. 157). The
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors
and the boot lid simultaneously. Different
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 160).
In order that the lock sequence can be acti-
vated, the driver's door must be closed - if
any of the other doors or the boot lid is open,
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. For
cars equipped with keyless locking system*
all doors and the boot lid must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - lock or unlock the driver's door
with the detachable key blade, see Detacha-
ble key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 164).
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside
using the remote control key - it is then not
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls.
For more information, see Deadlocks*
(p. 176).
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are
locked again automatically. This function
reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked
unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see
Alarm (p. 178).)
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 173)
•
Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
All of the doors and the boot lid can be
locked or unlocked simultaneously using the
central locking button on the driver's door
and passenger door*.
Central locking
Central locking.
•
Press one side 
 of the button to lock -
the other side 
 to unlock.
Press and hold to also open all side windows*
simultaneously.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
•
Press the central locking button 
.
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 174)).

||
06 Locks and alarm
06
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Pull the door handle once and release -
the door is unlocked. Pull the door handle
again to open the door.
Locking
•
Press the central locking button 
 after
the front doors have been closed.
A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Global
opening (p. 174)).
All doors can also be individually locked man-
ually with their lock buttons - the door in
question must then be closed.
Automatic locking
The doors and boot lid are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 173)
•
Alarm (p. 178)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 160)
Global opening
The global opening function opens or closes
all side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car during
hot weather.
Central locking button
A long press on the 
 symbol in the central
locking button opens all side windows simul-
taneously. The same procedure on the 
symbol closes all side windows simultane-
ously.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 173)
•
Power windows (p. 99)
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
The glovebox (p. 149) can only be locked/
unlocked using the remote control key's
detachable key blade.
For information on the key blade, see Detach-
able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 164).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder in accordance with the illustration
above.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key blade.
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
For information on privacy locking, see Pri-
vacy locking* (p. 165).

06 Locks and alarm

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

175

Related information

•

Remote control key (p. 157)

Locking/unlocking - boot lid

The boot lid can be opened, locked and

unlocked in several ways.

Unlocking with the remote control key

The alarm for the boot lid can be disarmed

and the boot lid unlocked on its own by

using the remote control key's *button.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm

indicator on the instrument panel stops to

show that alarm for the whole of the car is not

armed. The alarm's level and movement sen-

sors and the sensors for opening the boot lid

are disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

•

The boot lid is unlocked, but remains

closed - press lightly on the rubberised

pressure plate under the outer handle and

lift the boot lid.

If the boot lid is not opened within two

minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is

re-armed.

The boot lid can be opened in two

different ways

One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but

remains closed - press lightly on the rubber-

ised pressure plate under the outer handle

and lift the boot lid.

If the boot lid is not opened within two

minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is

re-armed.

Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and

the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid

opens about a centimetre - lift the outer han-

dle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could

however prevent the tailgate from disengag-

ing from the lock.

NOTE

•

When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked

with 2 presses, automatic relocking

does not take place because the boot

lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed

manually.

•

After the boot lid/tailgate has been

closed it is unlocked and the alarm is

not armed - relock it and re-arm the

alarm with the remote control key's

lock button

||
06 Locks and alarm
06
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Locking with the remote control key
•
Press the remote control key (p. 160) but-
ton for locking 
.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel starts to
flash, which means that the alarm is armed.
Unlocking the car from inside
To unlock the boot lid:
– Press the lighting panel button. (1)
> The lock releases and the tailgate
opens by a few centimetres.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 173)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 173)
Deadlocks*
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and
door handles are mechanically disengaged,
which prevents doors being opened from
both inside and outside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key (p. 157) and are set after an
approx. ten seconds delay after the doors
have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time
then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is
activated. The front left door can also be
unlocked with the detachable key blade
(p. 164). In addition, it is possible to unlock
and open the doors and boot lid on cars
equipped with the Keyless Drive* by touching
door handles or the handle on the boot lid.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This takes place the menu sys-
tem MY CAR. For a description of the menu
system, see MY CAR (p. 110).

06 Locks and alarm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

177

NOTE

•

Remember that the alarm is activated

when the car is locked.

•

If any of the doors are opened from

the inside then the alarm is triggered.

The above applies if the deadlocks have

not been deactivated temporarily.

Related information

•

Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key

blade (p. 171)

•

Remote control key (p. 157)

Child safety locks - manual activation

The child safety locks prevent children from

being able to open a rear door from the

inside.

Activate/deactivate child safety locks

G021077

The child safety locks are located on the trail-

ing edge of the rear doors and are only

accessible when the doors are open.

To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:

– Use the remote control key's detachable

key blade (p. 164) to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from

the inside.

The door can be opened from both the

outside and the inside.

NOTE

•

A door's knob control only blocks that

particular door - not both rear doors

simultaneously.

•

Cars with an electric child safety lock

do not have a manual child lock.

Related information

•

Child safety locks - electrical activation*

(p. 178)

•

Locking/unlocking - from the inside

(p. 173)

•

Locking/unlocking - from the outside

(p. 173)

06 Locks and alarm

178

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Child safety locks - electrical

activation*

Child safety locks with electrical activation

prevent children from opening the rear doors

or windows from the inside.

Activation

The child safety locks can be activated/deac-

tivated in all key positions (p. 75) higher than

0. Activation/deactivation can be performed

up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine,

provided that no door is opened.

To activate the child safety locks:

Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position

higher than 0.

2. Press the button in the driver's door con-

trol panel.

> The combined instrument panel's

information display shows the mes-

sage

Rear child lock activated and

the button's lamp illuminates - the

locks are active.

When the child safety lock is active then the

rear:

•

windows can only be opened with the

driver's door control panel

•

doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engine

is switched off - if the child safety locks are

activated at engine shutdown, the function

will remain activated the next time the engine

is started.

Related information

•

Child safety locks - manual activation

(p. 177)

•

Locking/unlocking - from the inside

(p. 173)

Alarm

The alarm is a device that warns in the event

of e.g. a break-in in the car.

Activated alarm is triggered if:

•

a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is

opened

•

a movement is detected in the passenger

compartment (if fitted with a movement

detector*)

•

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted

with a tilt detector*)

•

the starter battery's cable is discon-

nected

•

the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system then the

information display in the combined instru-

ment panel shows a message. In which case,

contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo

workshop is recommended.

06 Locks and alarm
06
179
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is trig-
gered if the car is left with a window or the
sunroof open or if the passenger compart-
ment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's inte-
grated passenger compartment heater (or
a portable electric heater) shall be used -
direct the airflow from the air vents so that
they are not pointing upwards in the pas-
senger compartment. Alternatively,
reduced alarm level can be used, see
Reduced alarm level (p. 181).
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
Arming the alarm
– Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton or insert the remote control key in the
ignition switch.
Related information
•
Alarm indicator (p. 179)
•
Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 180)
•
Alarm - remote control key not working
(p. 180)
Alarm indicator
The alarm indicator shows alarm system
(p. 178) status.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.

06 Locks and alarm
06
180
Alarm - automatic re-arming
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 178) pre-
vents the car being left with the alarm dis-
armed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Related information
•
Reduced alarm level (p. 181)
Alarm - remote control key not
working
If the alarm (p. 178) cannot be deactivated
with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's
battery (p. 167) is discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 171).
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indi-
cator (p. 179) flashes rapidly and the
siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Alarm signals
When the alarm (p. 178) is triggered a siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its
own battery and works independently of
the car battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5
minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

06 Locks and alarm

181

Reduced alarm level

Reduced guard means that the movement

and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti-

vated.

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm

(p. 178) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or

during transport on a car train or car ferry -

temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt

detectors.

The procedure is the same as with the tem-

porary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 176)

Related information

•

Alarm indicator (p. 179)

Type approval - remote control key

system

Type approval for the remote control key sys-

tem can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard

Country/Area

EU, China

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Country/Area

Korea

Country/Area

China

Hong Kong

Related information

•

Remote control key (p. 157)

Only in combination with alarm.

DRIVER SUPPORT

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

183

Active chassis - Four C*

Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously

Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the

characteristics of the shock absorbers so that

the car's driving characteristics can be

adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,

Sport and Advanced.

Comfort

This setting means that the car is perceived

as being more comfortable on rough and

uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is

soft and the movement of the body is smooth

and gentle.

Sport

This setting means that the car is perceived

as being more sporty and is recommended

for more active driving. Steering response is

faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock

absorption is harder and the body follows the

road in order to reduce rolling during corner-

ing.

Advanced

This setting is only recommended on very

even and smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-

mum roadholding and rolling in bends is fur-

ther minimised.

Operation

Control buttons.

The required chassis setting is selected using

the centre console buttons. The setting used

when the engine was switched off is re-acti-

vated when the engine is next started. The

exception is Advanced - it is restarted as

Sport.

Adjustable steering force*

Speed related power steering causes the

steering wheel force to increase with the

speed of the car in order to give the driver

enhanced sensitivity.

On motorways the steering feels firmer.

Steering is light and requires no extra effort

when parking and at low speed.

The driver can choose between three differ-

ent levels of steering force for road respon-

siveness or steering sensitivity in the menu

system MY CAR, MY CAR (p. 110):

•

Once there, search for

Steering force

level and select Low, Medium or High.

This setting is not accessible when the car is

moving.

NOTE

In certain situations the power steering

may become too hot and then needs to be

temporarily cooled - during this time the

power steering operates with reduced

power and turning the steering wheel may

then be perceived to be slightly heavier.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced

steering assistance the combined instru-

ment panel shows a message.

Related information

•

MY CAR (p. 110)

07 Driver support

184

Electronic stability control (ESC) -

general

Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and

improves the car's traction.

The activation of the ESC system

during braking may be noticed as a

throbbing sound. The car may

accelerate slower than expected

when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

The stability system ESC is supplementary

assistance - it cannot handle all situations

in all road conditions.

The driver always bears responsibility that

the vehicle is driven safely and that appli-

cable road traffic rules and regulations are

followed.

The ESC system consists of the following

functions:

•

Active Yaw Control

•

Spin Control

•

Traction control system

Active Yaw Control

The function checks the driving and brake

force of the wheels individually in order to

stabilise the car.

Spin Control

The function prevents the driving wheels from

spinning against the road surface during

acceleration.

Traction control system

The function is active at low speed and trans-

fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-

ning to the one that is not.

Related information

•

Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-

tion (p. 184)

•

Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-

bols and messages (p. 186)

Electronic stability control (ESC) -

operation

Selection of level - Sport mode

The ESC system is always activated - it can-

not be deactivated.

However, the driver can

select the Sport mode,

which allows for a more

active driving experience.

Sport mode is selected in

the menu system MY CAR.

For a description of the menu system, see

MY CAR (p. 110).

In Sport mode the system detects whether

the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-

ments and cornering are more active than in

normal driving and then allows controlled

skidding with the rear section up to a certain

level before it intervenes and stabilises the

car.

If, for example, the driver stops a controlled

skid by releasing the accelerator pedal, then

the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the

car.

With Sport mode, maximum traction is also

obtained if the car has become stuck, or

when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or

deep snow.

07 Driver support

185

Sport mode is indicated in the com-

bined instrument panel by means of

this symbol illuminating with a con-

stant glow until the driver deselects

the function or until the engine is switched off

- after the next time the engine is started the

ESC system is back in its normal mode again.

Related information

•

Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 184)

•

Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-

bols and messages (p. 186)

07 Driver support

186

Electronic stability control (ESC) -

symbols and messages

Table

Symbol Message Specification

ESC Temporarily OFF

ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is

reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required

ESC system disengaged.

•

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

•

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

and

"Message"

There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) - Read it!

Constant glow for

2 seconds.

System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.

07 Driver support

187

Related information

•

Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 184)

•

Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-

tion (p. 184)

07 Driver support

188

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Road Sign Information (RSI)*

The road sign information function (RSI –

Road Sign Information) helps the driver to

remember which speed-related road signs the

car has passed.

Examples of readable speed related signs

The RSI function gives information on current

speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is star-

ting/ending and when overtaking is prohibi-

ted.

If both a sign for motorway/road for motor-

ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum

permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to

show the sign symbol for maximum permitted

speed.

WARNING

RSI does not work in all situations but is

designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi-

bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven

safely and that applicable road traffic rules

and regulations are followed.

Related information

•

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation

(p. 188)

•

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations

(p. 190)

Road sign information (RSI)* -

operation

The road sign information function (RSI –

Road Sign Information) helps the driver to

remember which speed-related road signs the

car has passed.

The function is operated as follows:

Recorded speed information

When RSI has recorded a road sign with an

imposed speed, the combined instrument

panel displays the sign as a symbol.

Together with the symbol for

the current speed limit, a

sign showing that overtaking

is prohibited may also be

displayed where appropriate.

Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

07 Driver support

}}

189

End of restriction or motorway

A corresponding road sign is shown in the

combined instrument panel for

approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI

detects a sign that involves the end of a

speed limit - or other speed-related informa-

tion, e.g. end of a motorway.

Examples of such signs are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

Following which, the sign information is hid-

den until the next speed-related sign is

detected.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs

Sometimes different speed limits are signpos-

ted for the same road - an additional sign

then indicates the circumstances under which

the different speeds apply. The road section

may be particularly susceptible to accidents

in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed

only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

The speed applicable on an

exit is indicated in certain

markets by means of an

additional sign containing an

arrow.

Speed signs linked to this

type of additional sign are displayed only if

the driver is using the direction indicator.

Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a

specific distance or at a certain time of day.

The driver's attention is drawn to the situation

by means of a symbol for an additional sign

under the symbol showing speed.

Display of additional information

A symbol for additional sign in the form of an

empty frame under the combined instrument

panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has

detected an additional sign with supplemen-

tary information for the current speed limit.

Setting in MY CAR

There are options for RSI in the MY CAR

menu system; see MY CAR (p. 110).

Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

||
07 Driver support
07
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Road sign information On/Off
The combined instrument panel's speed sym-
bol display can be disabled. The function can
be activated/deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see MY CAR (p. 110).
Speed warning
The driver can opt to receive a warning when
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is
exceeded. The function can be activated/
deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 110).
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 188)
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 190)
•
MY CAR (p. 110)
Road sign information (RSI)* -
limitations
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed. The function has the follow-
ing limitations.
The RSI function's camera sensor has limita-
tions just like the human eye - read more
about camera sensor limitations (p. 224)).
Signs which indirectly provide information on
a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are several examples of what can dis-
rupt the function:
•
Faded signs
•
Signs positioned on bends
•
Rotated or damaged signs
•
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
•
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 188)
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 188)

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
Cruise control*
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
a more relaxed driving on motorways and
long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Overview
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
panel.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
vene when the cruise control is not main-
taining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Related information
•
Cruise control* - managing speed
(p. 191)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 192)
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed
(p. 193)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
Cruise control* - managing speed
It is possible to activate, set and change the
stored speed.
Activating and setting the speed
To start the cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button for
CRUISE (without speed limiter) or 
(with speed limiter).
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com-
bined instrument panel illuminates -
cruise control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button 
 or  .
> The current speed is stored in memory
and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) illuminates at the selected
speed and the symbol (6) changes from
GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the
stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long
presses on the   or   steering wheel but-
ton.

07 Driver support

192

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h:

•

Use short presses - each press gives

+/- 5 km/h.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

•

Hold down the button and release it at

the required speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelerator

pedal prior to pressing the

/ button,

then it is the car's current speed when the

button is pressed that is stored.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not

affect the cruise control setting - the car

returns to the last stored speed when the

accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are

held depressed for several minutes then it

is blocked and deactivated. To be able to

reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be

stopped and the engine restarted.

Related information

•

Cruise control* (p. 191)

Cruise control* temporary

deactivation and standby mode

The function can be temporarily deactivated

and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode

To temporarily disengage cruise control and

set it in standby mode:

•

Press the steering wheel button

> The combined instrument panel's

marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour

from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is

temporarily disengaged.

Standby mode due to driver intervention

Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and

automatically set in standby mode if:

•

the foot brake is used

•

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer

than 1 minute

•

the gear lever/selector is moved to N

position

•

the driver maintains speed higher than

the stored speed for longer than

1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not

affect the setting - the car returns to the last

stored speed when the accelerator pedal is

released.

Automatic standby mode

Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and

set in standby mode if:

•

wheels lose traction

•

engine speed is too low/high

•

speed falls below approx. 30 km/h.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

Related information

•

Cruise control* (p. 191)

•

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 191)

•

Cruise control* - resume set speed

(p. 193)

•

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 193)

Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
Cruise control* - resume set speed
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed.
After temporary deactivation and standby
mode (p. 192) it is possible to resume the set
speed.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button 
.
> The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from GREY to WHITE - the car then fol-
lows the last stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
the 
 button.
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 191)
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 191)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 192)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 193)
Cruise control* - deactivate
How it is deactivated is described here.
Cruise control is switched off with the steer-
ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the
engine - the set/stored speed is thus cleared
and cannot then be resumed with the 
 but-
ton.
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 191)
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 191)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 192)
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed
(p. 193)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed combined with a pre-selected
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys
on motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 197)
and time interval (p. 198) to the car in front.
When the radar detector detects a slower
vehicle in front of the car, the speed is auto-
matically adapted to that. When the road is
clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
or set to standby mode (p. 199) and the car
comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the
driver is warned instead by the Distance
Warning (p. 208) function about the short
distance.

||
07 Driver support
07
194
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
vene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita-
ble distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of
which the driver should be aware before it
is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con-
trol is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
For a limited time after the service, the
ACC function can have a somewhat lim-
ited range. The system is calibrated whilst
driving and full function returns automati-
cally.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 200) function.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed (p. 197)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
(p. 198)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode (p. 199)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 200)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
(p. 200)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
tance (p. 200)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
control functionality (p. 202)
•
Radar sensor (p. 203)
•
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 203)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 205)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function
It consists of a cruise control system and a
coordinated spacing system.

07 Driver support
07
}}
195
Function overview
Function overview
4
.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad (p. 196)
Radar sensor (p. 203)
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
cle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow
or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 198) is
measured primarily by a radar sensor
(p. 203). The cruise control function regulates
the speed with acceleration and braking. It is
normal for the brakes to emit a low sound
when they are being used by the adaptive
cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot
beneath the brake pedal - it may then
become trapped.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to
what the driver set for time interval (p. 198). If
the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in
front then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front
exceeds the stored speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control
the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must
brake himself/herself. This applies with large
differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor (p. 203) braking may come unexpect-
edly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h
5
 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
standby mode (p. 199) at which automatic
braking ceases - the driver must then take
over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
4
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
5
Queue Assist (p. 200) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range 0-200 km/h.

07 Driver support

196

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Warning lamp - braking by driver

required

Adaptive cruise control has a braking

capacity that is equivalent to approx. 40% of

the car's braking capacity.

1. Collision warning system warning lamp and

warning sound

If the car needs to be braked more heavily

than the adaptive cruise control capacity and

the driver does not brake, then the warning

lamp and warning sound from the Collision

warning system (p. 218) are used in order to

alert the driver that immediate intervention is

required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to see in

strong sunlight or when wearing sun-

glasses.

WARNING

The adaptive cruise control only warns of

vehicles which its radar unit has detected -

hence a warning may not be given, or it

may be given with a certain delay. Do not

wait for a warning without braking when so

required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load

Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control

is primarily intended for use when driving on

level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in

keeping the correct distance from the vehicle

ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,

with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which

case, be extra attentive and ready to slow

down.

Related information

•

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate

(p. 200)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking

another vehicle (p. 200)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview

Standby mode ceases and the stored

speed is resumed.

Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

(Not used)

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =

standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol

(WHITE = standby mode).

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

197

Related information

•

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - function

(p. 194)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and

messages (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - managing

speed

To start the ACC:

•

Press the steering wheel button

- a

similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the

combined instrument panel (8) which

shows that the adaptive cruise control is

in standby mode (p. 199).

To activate ACC:

•

At the required speed - press the steering

wheel button

or .

> The current speed is stored in the mem-

ory, the combined instrument panel

shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around

the stored speed for a second or so and

its marking changes from WHITE to

GREEN.

When this symbol changes colour

from WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is

active and the car maintains the

stored speed.

Only when the symbol shows

an image of another vehicle

is the distance to the vehicle

in front controlled by the

ACC.

At the same time a speed

range is marked:

•

the higher speed with GREEN marking is

the pre-programmed speed

•

the lower speed is the speed of the vehi-

cle in front.

Changing the stored speed

Stored speed is changed with short or long

presses on the

or steering wheel but-

ton.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h:

•

Use short presses - each press gives

+/- 5 km/h.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

•

Hold down the button and release it at

the required speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelerator

pedal prior to pressing the

/ button,

then it is the car's current speed when the

button is pressed that is stored.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not

affect the setting - the car returns to the last

||
07 Driver support
07
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
NOTE
If any of the adaptive cruise control but-
tons are held depressed for several
minutes then the function is blocked and
deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the
car must be stopped and the engine
restarted.
In certain situations it cannot be reactiva-
ted - in which case, the combined instru-
ment panel (p. 206) shows 
Adaptive
cruise control unavailable.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corre-
sponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately
3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
•
Increase or decrease with the steering
wheel buttons 
/ .
At low speed, when the distances are short,
the adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
in front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Dis-
tance Warning (p. 208) function is activated.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
If the adaptive cruise control does not
appear to react when activated, this may
be because the time distance to the vehi-
cle in front is preventing an increase in
speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Read more how speed is handled (p. 197).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
(p. 200)

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

199

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary

deactivation, and standby mode

The adaptive cruise control can be temporar-

ily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation/standby mode

To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise

control and set it in standby mode:

•

Press the steering wheel button

This symbol and the stored speed's

marking then change colour from

GREEN to WHITE.

Standby mode due to driver intervention

The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis-

engaged and set automatically in standby

mode if:

•

the foot brake is used

•

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer

than 1 minute

•

the gear selector is moved to N position

(automatic gearbox)

•

the driver maintains speed higher than

the stored speed for longer than

1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not

affect the setting - the car returns to the last

stored speed when the accelerator pedal is

released.

Automatic standby mode

The adaptive cruise control is dependent on

other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC

(p. 184). If any of these systems stops work-

ing, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated

automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal

will sound and the message

Adaptive cruise

control cancelled is shown in the combined

instrument panel. The driver must then inter-

vene and adapt the speed and distance to

the vehicle ahead.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

•

the driver opens the door

•

the driver takes off his seatbelt

•

engine speed is too low/high

•

speed has fallen below 30 km/h

•

wheels lose traction

•

brake temperature is high

•

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet

snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

Resume set speed

Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is

reactivated with one press on the steering

wheel button

- the speed is then set to the

last stored speed.

NOTE

A pronounced increase in speed may

occur after the cruise control has been

reactivated with the

button.

Related information

•

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - overview

(p. 196)

•

Cruise control* (p. 191)

Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

Does not apply to a car with Queue assistance - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.

07 Driver support
07
200
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator
9
, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel-
erate the car towards the vehicle in front.
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be acti-
vated in more situations other than during
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
to another road - the car will then acceler-
ate briefly.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
With a short press on the steering wheel but-
ton 
 the adaptive cruise control is set in
standby mode (p. 199). It is switched off with
an additional short press - the set/stored
speed is thus cleared and cannot then be
resumed with the 
 button.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 206)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
Queue assistance also provides the adaptive
cruise control with enhanced functionality at
speeds below 30 km/h.
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the
queue assistance function (also referred to as
"Queue Assist").
Queue assistance has the following functions:
•
Extended speed range - also below
30 km/h and when stationary
•
Change of target
•
Automatic braking ceases when station-
ary
•
Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even
though it is capable of following another vehi-
cle down to a standstill, a speed lower than
30 km/h cannot be selected/stored.
9
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

07 Driver support

}}

201

Extended speed range

NOTE

In order to activate the adaptive cruise

control, the driver's door must be closed

and the driver must be wearing the seat-

belt.

With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive

cruise control can follow another vehicle

within the range 0-200 km/h.

NOTE

A vehicle in front must be within a reason-

able distance in order to enable activation

of the adaptive cruise control at a speed

lower than 30 km/h.

For shorter stops in connection with inching

in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is

automatically resumed if the stops do not

exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer

before the car in front starts moving again

then the Adaptive cruise control is set in

standby mode with automatic braking. The

driver must then reactivate it in one of the fol-

lowing ways:

•

Press the steering wheel button

•

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The adaptive cruise control will then

resume following the vehicle in front.

NOTE

The Queue Assist function can hold the car

stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes -

then the parking brake is applied and the

adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

•

The parking brake must be released

before the adaptive cruise control can

be reactivated.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then

there may be stationary traffic in front.

When the adaptive cruise control is following

another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and

changes target from a moving to a stationary

vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow

down for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When the adaptive cruise control is follow-

ing another vehicle at speeds in excess of

30 km/h and the target is changed from a

moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the

adaptive cruise control will ignore the sta-

tionary vehicle and instead select the

stored speed.

•

The driver must intervene him/herself

and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change

of target

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged

and set in standby mode:

•

when the speed is below 5 km/h and the

adaptive cruise control is uncertain

whether the target object is a stationary

vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed

bump.

•

when the speed is below 5 km/h and the

vehicle in front turns off so the adaptive

cruise control no longer has a vehicle to

follow.

Termination of automatic braking at a

standstill

In certain situations, queue assistance stops

automatic braking at a standstill. This means

that the brakes are released and the car may

start to roll - the driver must therefore inter-

vene and brake the car himself/herself in

order to maintain its position.

||
07 Driver support
07
202
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Queue assistance releases the foot brake and
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby
mode in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
•
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control
in standby mode.
Automatic activation parking brake
In certain situations queue assistance applies
the parking brake in order to keep the car
remaining stationary.
This takes place if:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
•
ESC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
•
Queue assistance has held the car sta-
tionary for more than 4 minutes
•
the engine is switched off
•
the brakes have overheated.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
Changing from ACC to CC
A symbol for active cruise control is shown in
the combined instrument panel:
CC
Cruise Control
ACC
Adaptive Cruise
Control
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
With one press of the button the adaptive
part (spacing system) in the cruise control is
deactivated, at which point the car just fol-
lows the set/stored speed.
•
Give a long press on the steering wheel
button 
 - the combined instrument
panel's symbol changes from 
 to  .
> By these means the standard cruise con-
trol (p. 191) CC (Cruise
Control) is activated.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
follows the set speed.
Changing back from CC to ACC
Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on
the 
 button in accordance with the deacti-
vation instructions (p. 200). The next time the
system is switched on it is the Adaptive
cruise control that is activated.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
Radar sensor
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
in the same lane.
The radar sensor is used by the following
functions:
•
Distance Warning*
•
Adaptive cruise control*
•
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detec-
tion*
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen-
sor may be damaged:
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened.
Modification of the radar sensor could result
in it being illegal to use.
Related information
•
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 203)
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)
•
Collision warning system* (p. 218)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 208)
Radar sensor - limitations
A radar sensor (p. 203) has certain limitations
- due to its limited field of vision for example.
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
detect a vehicle in front is significantly
reduced if:
•
the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed
•
its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g.
in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects
have collected in front of the radar sen-
sor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see subheading "Maintenance"
(p. 222).
Field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
In some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances -
e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the
car and vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.

07 Driver support

204

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with

regard to the traffic conditions and inter-

vene when the adaptive cruise control is

not maintaining a suitable speed or suita-

ble distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle

all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive

cruise control in the owner's manual in

order to learn about its limitations, of

which the driver should be aware before it

is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for

maintaining the correct distance and

speed, even when the adaptive cruise con-

trol is being used.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil-

iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the

grille.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision

avoidance system. The driver must inter-

vene if the system does not detect a vehi-

cle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake

for humans or animals, and not for small

vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-

cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary

vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for

example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at

junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot

of water or slush on the road, in heavy

rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding

roads or on slip roads.

Related information

•

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)

•

Collision warning system* (p. 218)

•

Distance Warning* (p. 208)

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message 
Radar blocked See manual then it
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
sensor (p. 203) cannot detect other vehicles
in front of the car.
This message indicates that neither of the
functions for Distance Alert (p. 208) or Colli-
sion Warning with Auto Brake (p. 218) are
working.
The following table presents examples of
possible causes for a message being shown
along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 196)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 194)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 206)

07 Driver support

206

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols

and messages

Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may

display a symbol and/or text message. Here

are some examples - follow the recommenda-

tion given if appropriate:

Symbol Message Specification

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.

The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

Set ESC to Normal to

enable Cruise

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 184) has been set in

Normal mode.

Adaptive cruise control

cancelled

The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.

Adaptive cruise control

unavailable

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

•

brake temperature is high

•

the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See man-

ual

The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.

•

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy

rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 202) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides

information on appropriate alternatives.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 203).

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

207

Symbol Message Specification

Adaptive cruise control

Service required

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

•

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press brake to hold

vehicle

+ acoustic alarm

The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take

over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.

•

The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver

depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Lead

vehicle required

Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h with-

out a vehicle in front within the activation distance.

Only with Queue Assist.

Related information

•

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 193)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - overview

(p. 196)

•

Adaptive cruise control* - function

(p. 194)

07 Driver support

208

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Distance Warning*

The Distance Warning function (Distance

Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to

the vehicle ahead becomes too short.

Distance Warning is active at speeds above

30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in

front of the car, in the same direction. No dis-

tance information is provided for oncoming,

slow or stationary vehicles.

Orange-coloured warning lamp

An orange-coloured warning lamp in the

windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if

the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter

than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during the

time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING

Distance warning only reacts if the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than

the preset value - the speed of the driver's

vehicle is not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to

switch the function on or off. The function is

switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the

button.

Some combinations of the selected equip-

ment leave no vacant space for a button in

the centre console - in which case the func-

tion is operated in the car's menu system MY

CAR (p. 110) - there, search for and locate

the function

Distance Alert.

Set time interval

Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Time interval - On.

Different time intervals to the

vehicle in front can be

selected and shown in the

combined instrument panel

as 1-5 horizontal lines - the

more lines the longer the

time interval. One line corre-

sponds to approximately 1 second to the

vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately

3 seconds.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
209
The same symbol is also shown when Adap-
tive cruise control (p. 194) is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 194).
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 209)
•
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 210)
Distance Warning* - limitations
This function, which uses the same radar
sensor as Adaptive cruise control (p. 193) and
Collision warning with auto brake (p. 218),
has certain limitations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could
affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
For further information on radar sensor limita-
tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 203)
and (p. 223).
Related information
•
Distance Warning* (p. 208)
•
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 210)

07 Driver support

210

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Distance Warning* - symbols and

messages

The function has certain symbols and mes-

sages that can be shown in the combined

instrument panel if the function is reduced

due to its limitations.

Symbol

Message Specification

Radar blocked See

manual

Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 203).

Collision warning

Service required

Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information

•

Distance Warning* (p. 208)

•

Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 209)

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
City Safety™
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto-
matically braking the car in the event of immi-
nent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the
car is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 218)* these two
systems complement each other.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be per-
formed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not engage in all driv-
ing situations or traffic, weather or road
conditions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
humans and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possi-
ble to reduce collision speed. In order to
obtain full brake function, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the proper distance and
speed.
Related information
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 213)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 211)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 212)
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 215)
•
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 217)
City Safety™ - function
City Safety detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
of collision, City Safety will automatically
brake the car, which may be experienced as
heavy braking.

||
07 Driver support
07
212
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window
13
.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety can
completely avoid a collision.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking
procedure and stops the car in normal cir-
cumstances, just behind the vehicle in front.
For most drivers this is well outside normal
driving style and may be experienced as
being uncomfortable.
If the difference in speed between the vehi-
cles is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety
may not avoid the collision on its own - to
obtain full brake force, the driver must
depress the brake pedal and this could then
make it possible to avoid a collision, even at
speed differences above 15 km/h.
When the function is activated and brakes,
the combined instrument panel shows a text
message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
NOTE
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake
lights come on.
Related information
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 213)
•
City Safety™ (p. 211)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 212)
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 215)
•
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 217)
City Safety™ - operation
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated
automatically when the engine is started.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disa-
ble City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind-
screen.
City Safety™ handled in the menu system
MY CAR (p. 110) and after starting the engine
the function can be deactivated as follows:
•
Search in MY CAR for 
Driver support
system and select the Off option at City
Safety.
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless
of whether the system was enabled or
disabled when the engine was switched
off.
13
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

}}

213

WARNING

The laser sensor also transmits laser light

when City Safety™ is disabled manually.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 211)

•

City Safety™ - limitations (p. 213)

•

City Safety™ - function (p. 211)

•

City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 215)

•

City Safety™ - symbols and messages

(p. 217)

•

MY CAR (p. 110)

City Safety™ - limitations

The sensor in City Safety is designed to

detect cars and other large vehicles in front of

the car irrespective of whether it is day or

night.

However, the function does have some limita-

tions.

The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety

has poorer functionality - or none at all - in

e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust

storms or white-out situations. Misting, dirt,

ice or snow on the windscreen may also dis-

rupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for

projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-

ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than

the bonnet limit the function.

The laser beam from the sensor in City Safety

measures how the light is reflected. The sen-

sor cannot detect objects with low reflection

capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle

generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to

the number plate and rear light reflectors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-

tance is extended, which may reduce the

capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In

such situations the ABS

and ESC

systems

will provide best possible braking force with

maintained stability.

When your own car is reversing, City Safety is

temporarily deactivated.

City Safety is not activated at low speeds -

under 4 km/h, which is why the system does

not intervene in situations where a vehicle in

front is being approached very slowly, e.g.

when parking.

Driver commands are always prioritised,

which is why City Safety does not intervene in

situations where the driver is steering or

accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli-

sion is unavoidable.

When City Safety has prevented a collision

with a stationary object the car remains sta-

tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the

car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-

ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed

as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine

stops when City Safety has stopped the car,

unless the driver manages to depress the

clutch pedal beforehand.

(Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.

(Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.

||
07 Driver support
07
214
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
location (p. 211)).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor.
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a
height of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual is shown in the com-
bined instrument panel it indicates that the
laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in front of the car. This means in turn
that City Safety is not operational.
The 
Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual message is not shown for all situa-
tions in which the laser sensor is blocked.
The driver must therefore be diligent about
keeping the windscreen and area in front of
the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
laser sensor is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field
of vision is blocked.
Remove the
blocking object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone
chips in the windscreen in front of either of
the laser sensor's "windows" and they
cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
(or larger), then a workshop must be con-
tacted for replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location
(p. 211)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
•
Volvo recommends that you do not
repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the area in front of the laser sensor -
instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop to
verify that the correct windscreen is
ordered and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted dur-
ing replacement.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 211)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 211)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 212)

07 Driver support

}}}}

215

City Safety™ - laser sensor

The City Safety™ function includes a sensor

which transmits laser light (see illustration

(p. 211) for sensor location). Contact a quali-

fied workshop in the event of a fault or if the

laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended. It is abso-

lutely essential to follow the prescribed

instructions when handling the laser sensor.

The following two labels relate to the laser

sensor:

The upper label in the figure describes the

laser beam's classification:

•

Laser radiation - Do not look into the

laser beam with optical instruments -

Class 1M laser product.

The lower label in the figure describes the

laser beam's physical data:

•

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies

with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)

standards for laser product design with

the exception of deviations in accordance

with "Laser Notice No. 50" from

26 July 2001.

Radiation data for the laser sensor

The following table specifies the laser sen-

sor's physical data.

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 µJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal x verti-

cal)

28° × 12°

WARNING

If any of these instructions are not followed

then there is a risk of eye injury!

•

Never look into the laser sensor (which

emits spreading invisible laser radia-

tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer

with magnifying optics such as a mag-

nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi-

lar optical instruments.

•

Testing, repair, removal, adjustment

and/or replacement of the laser sen-

sor's spare parts must only be carried

out by a qualified workshop - we rec-

ommend an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

•

To avoid exposure to harmful radia-

tion, do not carry out any readjust-

ments or maintenance other than

those specified here.

•

The repairer must follow specially

drawn up workshop information for the

laser sensor.

•

Do not remove the laser sensor (this

includes removing the lenses). A

removed laser sensor does not fulfil

laser class 3B as per standard IEC

60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-

safe and therefore entails a risk of

injury.

•

The laser sensor's connector must be

unplugged before removal from the

windscreen.

07 Driver support

216

•

The laser sensor must be fitted onto

the windscreen before the sensor's

connector is plugged in.

•

The laser sensor transmits a laser light

when the remote control key is in key

position II (p. 75) even if the engine is

switched off.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 211)

•

City Safety™ - limitations (p. 213)

•

City Safety™ - function (p. 211)

•

City Safety™ - operation (p. 212)

•

City Safety™ - symbols and messages

(p. 217)

07 Driver support

217

City Safety™ - symbols and

messages

In conjunction with automatic braking by the

City Safety™ (p. 211) system, one or more

symbols may illuminate in the combined

instrument panel and a text message may be

shown. A text message can be acknowledged

by briefly pressing the OK button on the

direction indicator stalk.

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety

City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen sensors blocked

See manual

The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

•

Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 213).

City Safety Service required

City Safety™ is not operational.

•

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 211)

•

City Safety™ - limitations (p. 213)

•

City Safety™ - function (p. 211)

•

City Safety™ - operation (p. 212)

•

City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 215)

07 Driver support
07
218
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Collision warning system*
16
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
ing with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated
in situations where the driver should have
started braking earlier, which is why it cannot
help the driver in every situation.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed
to be activated as late as possible in order to
avoid unnecessary intervention.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can pre-
vent a collision or reduce collision speed.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not
be used as an excuse for the driver to change
his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies
on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do
the braking, there might be a risk of a colli-
sion sooner or later.
Two system levels
Depending on how the car is equipped, the
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" function
may appear in two variants:
Level 1
The driver is merely warned
17
 of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
car is braked automatically if the driver him-
self does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of the internal components of
the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake
and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection"
must only be performed at a workshop -
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* - function
(p. 219)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 221)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 223)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 224)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 226)
16
Not available as an option for certain engines.
17
No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

219

Collision warning system* - function

Function overview

Audio-visual warning signal in the event

of a collision risk.

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes

three steps in the following order:

Collision warning

Brake support

Auto Brake

The collision warning system and City

Safety™ (p. 211) complement each other.

1 - Collision warning

The driver is first warned of a potentially

imminent collision.

The collision warning system can detect

pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are sta-

tionary or moving in the same direction in

front of the driver's vehicle.

If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian,

cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention

is attracted with a flashing red warning signal

(1) and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support

If the risk of collision has increased further

after the collision warning then the brake sup-

port is activated.

This means that the brake system is prepared

for rapid braking by applying the brakes

lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently

quickly then full brake function is imple-

mented.

Brake support also reinforces the driver's

braking if the system considers that the brak-

ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake

The automatic brake function is activated

last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet

started to take evasive action and the risk of

collision is imminent then the automatic brak-

ing function is deployed - this takes place

irrespective of whether or not the driver

brakes. Braking then takes place with full

brake force in order to reduce collision speed,

or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to

avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and

full brake intervention may come very late or

simultaneously.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

With system Level 2 only.

07 Driver support

220

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

The collision warning system does not

engage in all driving situations or traffic,

weather or road conditions. The collision

warning system does not react to vehicles

or cyclists driving in another direction to

the car or to animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a

high risk for collision. This section "Func-

tion" and the section "Limitations" inform

about limitations that the driver must be

aware of before using the Collision Warn-

ing system with Auto Brake.

Warnings and brake interventions for

pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at

a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.

Warnings and brake interventions for

pedestrians and cyclists do not work in

darkness and tunnels - not even when

streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a col-

lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure

full brake performance, the driver should

always depress the brake pedal - even

when the car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The

driver is always responsible that the cor-

rect distance and speed are maintained -

even when the collision warning system

with auto-brake is used.

Related information

•

Collision warning system* (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - detection

of cyclists

The function only "sees" cyclists from behind,

who are travelling in the same direction.

Optimum examples of what the system interprets

as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con-

tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen-

tre line.

Optimal performance of the system requires

that the system function that detects a cyclist

receives as unambiguous information as pos-

sible about the body and bicycle contours -

this implies the opportunity to identify the

bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper

and lower body combined with a normal

human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle

are not visible to the function's camera then

the system cannot detect a cyclist.

•

For the function to be able to detect a

cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid-

ing an "adult bicycle".

•

The bicycle must be equipped with a

highly visible and approved

rearward-

facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm

above the roadway.

•

The function can only detect cyclists

directly from behind and who are travel-

ling in the same direction - not at an

angle from behind, not from the side.

•

Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand

edge of the car's imagined/extended side

lines may be detected late or not at all.

•

The function's capacity to detect cyclists

at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the

human eye.

The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

221

•

The function's capacity to detect cyclists

is deactivated when driving in darkness

and tunnels - even when streetlights are

lit.

•

For optimum bicycle detection, the City

Safety™ function must be activated, see

City Safety™ (p. 211).

WARNING

Collision Warning with Auto Brake &

Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.

The function cannot detect:

•

all cyclists in all situations and does

not see partially obscured cyclists, for

example.

•

cyclists in clothing that obscures the

contours of the body or who are

approaching from the side.

•

bicycles that have no rearward-facing

red reflector.

•

bicycles loaded with large objects.

The driver is always responsible that the

vehicle is driven properly and with a safety

distance adapted to the speed.

Related information

•

Collision warning system* (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - detection

of pedestrians

Optimal examples of what the system regards as

pedestrians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requires

that the system function that detects pedes-

trians receives as unambiguous information

as possible about the contours of the body -

this implies the opportunity to identify the

head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower

body combined with a normal human pattern

of movement.

If large parts of the body are not visible to the

function's camera then the system cannot

detect a pedestrian.

•

In order for a pedestrian to be detected

he/she must appear full-length and have

a height of at least 80 cm.

•

The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-

trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just

like the human eye.

•

The camera sensor's capacity to detect

pedestrians is deactivated when driving in

darkness and tunnels - even when street-

lights are lit.

WARNING

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and

Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a

means of assistance. The function cannot

detect all pedestrians in all situations and

does not see, for example:

•

partially obscured pedestrians, people

in clothing that hides their body con-

tour or pedestrians shorter than

80 cm.

•

pedestrians who are carrying larger

objects.

The driver is always responsible that the

vehicle is driven properly and with a safety

distance adapted to the speed.

Related information

•

Collision warning system* (p. 218)

07 Driver support

222

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - operation

Warning signals On and Off

1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event

of a collision risk.

You can select whether the collision warning

system's acoustic and visual warning signals

should be switched on or off.

When starting the engine, the setting that was

selected when the engine was switched off is

obtained automatically.

NOTE

The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-

tions are always enabled - they cannot be

deactivated.

Settings for the collision warning system are

made via the centre console's screen and the

menu system MY CAR, see (p. 110).

Light and acoustic signals

When the collision warning system's light and

acoustic warnings are activated, the warning

lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested

each time the engine is started by briefly illu-

minating the warning lamp's separate points

of light.

After starting the engine, both the light and

acoustic signals can be switched off:

•

Search for

Collision warning in Driver

support system in the menu system MY

CAR (p. 110) - and there select to

uncheck the function.

Acoustic signal

After starting the engine the warning sound

can be activated/deactivated separately:

•

Search for

Warning sound in Collision

warning in the menu system MY CAR

(p. 110) - and there select On or Off.

Following which, the collision warning system

is only indicated with a light signal.

Set warning distance

The warning distance regulates the distance

at which the visual and acoustic warnings are

deployed.

•

Search for

Warning distance in

Collision warning in the menu system

MY CAR (p. 110) - and there select Long,

Normal or Short.

The warning distance determines the sys-

tem's sensitivity. Warning distance

Long pro-

vides an earlier warning. First test with Long

and if this setting produces too many warn-

ings, which could be perceived as irritating in

certain situations, then change to warning

distance

Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep-

tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use

the warning lamp and warning sound will

be used by the cruise control even if the

collision warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the

driver in the event of a risk of a collision,

but the function cannot shorten driver

reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to

be effective, always drive with Distance

Warning (p. 208) set at time interval 4–5.

The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

223

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set

Long warnings could be perceived as

being late in certain situations, e.g. when

there are large differences in speed or if

vehicles in front brake heavily.

WARNING

No automatic system can guarantee

100 % correct function in all situations.

Therefore, never test Collision Warning

with Auto Brake by driving at people or

vehicles - this may cause severe damage

and injury and risk lives.

Checking settings

The current settings can be controlled via the

centre console's screen and the menu sys-

tem (p. 110) MY CAR.

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor

For the sensors to work correctly, they must

be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be

cleaned regularly with water and car sham-

poo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

will reduce their function and may prevent

measurement.

Related information

•

Collision warning system* (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - limitations

The function has certain limitations - for

example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h.

The collision warning system's visual warning

signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 219)) may

be difficult to notice in the event of strong

sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are

being worn or if the driver is not looking

straight ahead. The warning sound should

therefore always be activated.

On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-

tance is extended, which may reduce the

capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa-

tions the ABS and ESC (p. 184) systems will

provide best possible braking force with

maintained stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporar-

ily disengaged in the event of high passen-

ger compartment temperature caused by

strong sunlight for example. If this occurs

then the warning sound is activated even if

it is deactivated in the menu system.

•

Warnings may not appear if the dis-

tance to the vehicle in front is small or

if steering wheel and pedal move-

ments are large, e.g. a very active driv-

ing style.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||
07 Driver support
07
224
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect
a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front
correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists
27
 - the system
can provide effective warnings and brake
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark-
ness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control
(p. 193). Read more about radar sensor limi-
tations (p. 203).
If warnings are perceived as being too fre-
quent or disturbing then the warning distance
can be reduced (p. 222). This would lead to
the system warning at a later stage, which
reduces the total number of warnings.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo-
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-
vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situa-
tions where the car is approaching a vehicle
in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car,
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 218)
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
- by the functions:
•
Active main beam (p. 87)
•
Road sign information (p. 188)
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 228)
•
Lane assistance (p. 231)
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
27
For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

225

The camera sensors have limitations similar

to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in

darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick

fog for example. Under such conditions the

functions of camera-dependent systems

could be significantly reduced or temporarily

disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-

riageway, snow or ice on the road surface,

dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings

could also significantly reduce camera sensor

function when it is used to scan the carriage-

way and detect pedestrians and other vehi-

cles.

The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-

ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and

vehicles cannot be detected in some situa-

tions, or they are detected later than anticipa-

ted.

During very high temperatures the camera is

temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes

after the engine is started in order to protect

camera functionality.

Fault tracing and action

If the display shows the message

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

then this means that the camera sensor is

blocked and cannot detect pedestrians,

cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of

the car.

At the same time, this means that - besides

Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the fol-

lowing functions will not have full functionality

either:

•

Active main beam

•

Driver Alert Control

•

Road sign information

The following table presents possible causes

for a message being shown along with the

appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen

surface in front of

the camera is dirty

or covered with ice

or snow.

Clean the wind-

screen surface in

front of the camera

from dirt, ice and

snow.

Thick fog, heavy

rain or snow means

that the camera

does not work suffi-

ciently well.

No action. At times

the camera does

not work during

heavy rain or snow-

fall.

Cause Action

The windscreen

surface in front of

the camera has

been cleaned but

the message

remains.

Wait. It may take

several minutes for

the camera to

measure the visibil-

ity.

Dirt has appeared

between the inside

of the windscreen

and the camera.

Visit a workshop to

have the wind-

screen inside the

camera cover

cleaned - an author-

ised Volvo work-

shop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

Collision warning system* (p. 218)

07 Driver support

226

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - symbols

and messages

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and

Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to

assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-

ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in

front that are stationary or moving in the same

direction.

Symbol

Message Specification

Collision warning sys-

tem OFF

Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision warning sys-

tem Unavailable

The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto Braking was acti-

vated

Auto Brake has been active.

The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen sensors

blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

•

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 224).

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or
if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 203).
Collision warning Serv-
ice required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 218)
•
Collision warning system* - function
(p. 219)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 221)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 223)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 224)

07 Driver support

228

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driver Alert System*

The Driver Alert System is intended to assist

drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or

who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are

driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of different

functions which can either be switched on at

the same time or individually:

•

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 229).

•

Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 231).

A switched-on function is set in standby

mode and is not activated automatically until

speed exceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speed

decreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is

dependent on the lane having side markings

painted on each side.

WARNING

Driver Alert System does not work in all

situations but is designed merely as a sup-

plementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi-

bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven

safely.

Related information

•

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 228)

•

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 231)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)*

The DAC function is intended to attract the

driver's attention when he/she starts to drive

less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes dis-

tracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly

deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily

intended for major roads. The function is not

intended for city traffic.

A camera detects the side markings painted

on the carriageway and compares the section

of the road with the driver's steering wheel

movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle

does not follow the carriageway evenly.

In some cases driving ability is not affected

despite driver fatigue. In which case there

may not be any warning issued for the driver.

Not available as an option for certain engines.

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
For this reason it is always important to stop
and take a break in the event of any signs of
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals, and make sure you are
well rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warn-
ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
•
in strong side winds
•
on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations
(p. 224).
Related information
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 228)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 229)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 230)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
Settings are made from the centre console
display screen and its menu system.
On/Off
The Driver Alert function can be set in
standby mode via the menu system MY CAR
(p. 110):
•
Checked box - function activated.
•
Unchecked box - the function is deacti-
vated.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h and remains active as long as the
speed is over 60 km/h.
If the vehicle is being driven errati-
cally, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text mes-
sage 
Driver Alert Time for a break
- the linked symbol is illuminated in the com-
bined instrument panel at the same time. The
warning is repeated after a time if driving abil-
ity does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as
dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
Related information
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 228)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 228)

07 Driver support

230

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols

and messages

DAC (p. 228) can show symbols and text

messages on the combined instrument panel

or in the centre console's display screen in

different situations.

Here are some examples:

Symbol

Message Specification

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen sensors

blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

•

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 224).

Driver Alert system Serv-

ice required

The system is disengaged.

•

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information

•

Driver Alert System* (p. 228)

•

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 228)

•

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation

(p. 229)

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
The purpose of Lane Departure Warning
(Lane Departure Warning) is to help the driver
to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally
leaving its own lane in certain situations on
motorways and similar major routes.
Principle for LDW
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/
lane.
If the car crosses one of the side lines the
driver is alerted with an acoustic signal.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time
the wheels cross a line. So there is no
acoustic alarm when there is a line
between the car's wheels.
WARNING
Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and
does not engage in all driving situations or
traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable laws and road
traffic regulations are followed.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 231)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 232)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 233)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 234)
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 228)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
function
Certain settings can be made for the Lane
Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning)
function.
Off & On
Press the centre console's button to activate
or deactivate the function. The button's lamp
illuminates when the function is switched on.
This function is complemented in the com-
bined instrument panel with intuitive graphics
in different situations.
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 110).
Select from the options:

07 Driver support

232

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

On at startup - The function is set in

standby mode each time the engine is

started. Otherwise the same value as

when the engine was switched off is

obtained.

•

Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity

increases, an alarm is triggered earlier

and fewer limitations apply.

Related information

•

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 231)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

operation

Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure

Warning) is complemented in the combined

instrument panel with intuitive graphics in dif-

ferent situations. Here are some examples:

LDW function side lines.

•

The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines -

the function is active and detects/"sees"

one side line, or both.

•

The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -

the function is active but detects neither

left nor right side line.

•

The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -

the function is in standby mode because

the speed is below 65 km/h.

•

The LDW symbol has no side lines - the

function is deactivated.

Related information

•

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 231)

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

233

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

limitations

Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure

Warning) camera sensor has limitations in a

similar way to the human eye.

For more information, read about camera

sensor limitations (p. 224).

NOTE

There are some situations where LDW

does not give any warning, such as:

•

Direction indicators are switched on

•

The driver has his/her foot on the

brake pedal

•

In the event of rapid depression of the

accelerator pedal

•

In the event of rapid steering wheel

movements

•

If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.

Related information

•

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 231)

When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 231).

07 Driver support

234

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

symbols and messages

In situations where there is no Lane assis-

tance function, a symbol may be shown in the

combined instrument panel in combination

with an explanatory message - follow the rec-

ommendation given if appropriate.

Message examples:

Symbol Message Specification

Lane Departure Warning ON/

Lane Departure Warning OFF

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after approx. 5 seconds.

Windscreen sensors blocked

See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

•

Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 224).

Driver Alert system Service

required

The system is disengaged.

•

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 231)

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
Park Assist*
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's screen indicate the dis-
tance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system (p. 110) MY CAR.
Parking assistance is available in two vari-
ants:
•
Rear only
•
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
WARNING
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals
near the car.
Related information
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)
•
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 238)
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 239)
Park assist syst* - function
The parking assistance system is automati-
cally activated when the engine is started -
the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
On/Off for parking assistance.
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.

07 Driver support

236

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The centre console's display screen shows

an overview of the relationship between the

car and detected obstacle.

Marked sectors show which of the four sen-

sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the

car symbol a selected sector box is, the

shorter the distance between the car and a

detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the

shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of

or behind the car. Other sound from the audio

system is muted automatically.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is

constant and the active sensor's field nearest

the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is

within the distance for the constant tone both

behind and in front of the car, then the tone

sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or

low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"

and are then temporarily not detected by

the sensors - the pulsating tone may then

unexpectedly stop instead of changing

over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects,

such as projecting loading docks.

•

In such situations, pay extra attention

and manoeuvre/reposition the car par-

ticularly slowly or stop the current

parking manoeuvre - there may be a

high risk of damage to vehicles or

other objects since the sensors are

temporarily unable to function opti-

mally.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)

•

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)

•

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 238)

•

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

Park assist syst* - backward

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-

ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on

the centre console's screen indicate the dis-

tance to the detected obstacle.

G021423

The distance covered to the rear of the car is

about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles behind comes from one of the rear

loudspeakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when

reverse gear is engaged.

When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow-

bar, rear parking assistance is switched off

automatically - otherwise the sensors would

react to the trailer.

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

237

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike

carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu-

ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may

need to be switched off manually in order

that the sensors do not react to them.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)

•

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 238)

•

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

Park assist syst* - forward

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-

ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on

the centre console's screen indicate the dis-

tance to the detected obstacle.

The parking assistance system is automati-

cally activated when the engine is started -

the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If

parking assistance is switched off with the

button, the lamp goes out.

G021424

The distance covered in front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles in front comes from one of the front

loudspeakers.

Front park assist is active up to

approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is

illuminated in order to indicate that the sys-

tem is activated. When the speed is below

10 km/h the system is reactivated.

NOTE

Front parking assistance is deactivated

when the parking brake is applied or P

mode is selected in a car with an auto-

matic gearbox.

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember

that these must not obscure the sensors -

the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived

as an obstacle.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)

•

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 238)

•

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

07 Driver support

238

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park assist syst* - fault indication

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-

ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on

the centre console's display screen indicate

the distance to the detected obstacle.

If the combined instrument panel's

information symbol illuminates with

constant glow and the text message

Park Assist System Service required is

shown then parking assistance is disen-

gaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assis-

tance system may produce incorrect warn-

ing signals that are caused by external

sound sources that emit the same ultra-

sonic frequencies that the system works

with.

Examples of such sources include horns,

wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes

and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 238)

•

Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)

•

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the

sensors

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-

ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on

the centre console's screen indicate the dis-

tance to the detected obstacle.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and car shampoo.

Sensor location, front.

G021425

Sensor location, rear.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

may cause incorrect warning signals.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)

•

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)

•

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)

•

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

239

Park assist camera*

Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which

is activated when the reverse gear is selected.

The camera image is shown on the centre

console's screen.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's

electrical system, the protrusion of the

towbar is included when the function

measures the parking space.

WARNING

•

The parking camera serves as an aid.

It does not relieve the driver of respon-

sibility when reversing.

•

The camera has blind spots, where

obstacles cannot be detected.

•

Be aware of people and animals in the

vicinity of the car.

Function and operation

Camera location next to the opening handle.

The camera shows what is behind the car

and if something appears from the sides.

The camera shows a wide area behind the

car and part of the bumper and any towbar.

Objects on the screen may appear to tilt

slightly - this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be

closer to the car than they appear to be on

the screen.

If another view is active then the parking

camera system takes over automatically and

its camera image is displayed on the screen.

When reverse gear is selected, unbroken lines

are shown graphically which illustrate where

the car's approximate external dimensions

will be positioned with the current steering

wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,

reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a

trailer. The park assist lines can be deacti-

vated - see section Settings (p. 241).

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-

tance sensors (p. 235)* then their information

is shown graphically as coloured areas in

order to illustrate distances to detected

obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing

sensors" later in the text.

The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after

reverse gear has been disengaged or until the

car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or

35 km/h backward.

Light conditions

The camera image is adjusted automatically

according to prevailing light conditions.

Because of this, the image may vary slightly

in brightness and quality. Poor light condi-

tions can result in a slightly reduced image

quality.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow

and ice to ensure optimum function. This

is particularly important in poor light.

07 Driver support

240

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis-

played for the driver.

The lines on the screen are projected as if

they were at ground level behind the car and

are directly related to steering wheel move-

ment, which shows the driver the path the car

will then take - also when the car is turning.

NOTE

•

When reversing with a trailer which is

not connected electrically to the car,

the lines on the display show the route

the car will take - not the trailer.

•

The screen shows no lines when a

trailer is connected electrically to the

car's electrical system.

•

The parking camera is deactivated

automatically when towing a trailer if a

Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

IMPORTANT

Remember, that with the rear camera view

selected, the monitor only displays the

area behind the car. Be aware of the sides

and front of the car when manoeuvring in

reverse.

Boundary lines

The system's lines.

Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards

from the car

Boundary line, free reversing zone

The red line (1) frames in a zone

approx. 30 cm back from the bumper.

The yellow horizontal line (2) frames in a zone

up to approx. 1.5 m behind the bumper.

The yellow side lines end approx. 2.0 m

behind the bumper.

The boundary lines include the car's most

protruding parts, e.g. door mirrors and cor-

ners - also when the car is turning.

Cars with reversing sensors*

Coloured fields (one per sensor) show distance.

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-

tance (p. 235) the distance is shown with col-

oured fields for each sensor that registers an

obstacle.

The colour of the areas changes with

decreasing distance to the obstacle - from

green to yellow to red.

Colour / paint Distance (metres)

Green 0,8-1,5

Yellow 0,4–0,8

Red 0–0,4

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

241

Related information

•

Park assist camera - settings (p. 241)

•

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 242)

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

Park assist camera - settings

Activate switched-off camera

If the camera function is switched off when

reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the

following way:

•

Press CAM - the screen shows the cur-

rent camera view.

Change setting

The default setting is that the camera is acti-

vated when reverse gear is selected.

The settings for the parking camera can be

changed when the screen shows a camera

view:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is

shown - the screenchanges to a menu

with various options.

2. Turn to reach the desired option with

TUNE.

3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/

MENU once and go back out with EXIT.

Miscellaneous

If the car has several cameras* installed, the

active camera view on the screen can be

changed:

•

Press CAM or turn TUNE.

Related information

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

07 Driver support

242

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park assist camera - limitations

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mounted

on the rear of the car could obscure the

camera's view.

To bear in mind

Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it

only looks like a relatively small part of the

image is obscured, it could be a relatively

large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta-

cles could thereby go undetected until they

are very close to the car.

•

Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice

and snow.

•

Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-

warm water and car shampoo - take care

not to scratch the lens.

Related information

•

Park assist camera* (p. 239)

•

Park assist camera - settings (p. 241)

•

Park Assist* (p. 235)

BLIS*

BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a camera-

based information system that under certain

conditions can help the driver to notice vehi-

cles moving in the same direction as the host

vehicle in the so-called "blind spot".

The system is designed to work most effec-

tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-

lane highways.

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a

replacement for, a safe driving style and

use of the rearview mirrors. It can never

replace the driver's attention and responsi-

bility. The responsibility for changing lanes

safely always rests with the driver.

Overview

G021426

Rearview mirror with BLIS function

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car

where the system has detected the vehi-

cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at

the same time then both lamps illuminate.

Maintenance

In order to work most effectively the BLIS

camera lenses

must be clean. The lenses

can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

See (1) in the preceding illustration.

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

243

sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that

they are not scratched.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt

ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow

away from the lenses.

Related information

•

BLIS* - operation (p. 243)

•

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 245)

BLIS* - operation

BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function

designed for providing support for the driver

when driving in dense traffic on roads with

several lanes in the same direction.

Activate/deactivate BLIS

BLIS is activated when the engine is started.

The indicator lamps in the door panels flash

three times when BLIS is activated.

Button for activating/deactivating.

The system can be deactivated/activated

after starting the engine with one press on the

BLIS button.

Some combinations of the selected equip-

ment leave no vacant space for a button in

the centre console - in which case the func-

tion is operated in the car's menu system

(p. 110) MY CAR.

When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the

button extinguishes and a message is shown

in the combined instrument panel.

When BLIS is activated the lamp in the button

illuminates, the combined instrument panel

shows a new text message and the indicator

lamps in the door panels flash 3 times. Press

the left-hand stalk switch OK button in order

to switch off the text message.

When BLIS operates

A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3.0 m.

The system operates when the car is driven

at a speed above 10 km/h.

When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle

inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp

(2) illuminates with a constant glow, see over-

view illustration (p. 242).

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a

fault arises in the system. If, for example, the

07 Driver support

244

system's cameras are obscured then the

BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is

shown in the combined instrument panel. In

such cases, check and clean the lenses.

If necessary, the system can be switched off

temporarily, see "Activate/deactivate BLIS"

above.

Overtaking

The system is designed to react if:

•

you overtake another vehicle at a speed

of up to 10 km/h faster than the other

vehicle

•

you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling

up to 70 km/h faster than you are travel-

ling.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is

reversing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can con-

ceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can

prevent the vehicle in the screened area

from being detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness

In daylight the system reacts to the shape of

the surrounding vehicles. The system is

designed to detect motor vehicles such as

cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles are not

switched on then the system does not detect

the vehicles. This means for example that the

system does not react to a trailer without

headlamps which is towed behind a car or

truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to cyclists or

moped riders.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar

to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not

"see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall,

against strong light or in thick fog.

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp

may illuminate despite there being no other

vehicle within the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on

isolated occasions despite there being no

other vehicle within the blind spot then this

does not mean that a fault has arisen in

the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system

the display shows the text

BLIS Service

required.

The following illustrations show examples of

situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may

illuminate even if there is no other vehicle

within the blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.

noise barrier or concrete road surface.

07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

245

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components

must only be performed by a workshop -

an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

BLIS* (p. 242)

•

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 245)

BLIS - symbols and messages

In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot

Information) (p. 242) function fails or is inter-

rupted, the combined instrument panel may

show a symbol, supplemented by an explana-

tory message. Follow any recommendation

given.

Message examples:

Message Specification

BLIS ON

The BLIS system is acti-

vated.

BLIS Serv-

ice required

Blind spot syst. disen-

gaged - contact a work-

shop.

BLIS Cam-

era blocked

The BLIS camera is

blocked by dirt, snow or

ice - clean the lenses.

Message Specification

BLIS

Reduced

function

Reduced function in the

data transmission between

the BLIS system's camera

and the car's electrical sys-

tem.

The camera resets itself

when the data transmis-

sion between the BLIS sys-

tem's camera and the car's

electrical system returns to

normal.

BLIS OFF

The BLIS system is deacti-

vated.

A text message can be acknowledged by

briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-

tion indicator stalk.

Related information

•

BLIS* (p. 242)

07 Driver support

246

Type approval - radar system

Type approval for the radar system can be

read in the table.

Coun-

try/

Area

Singa-

pore

IDA: Infocomm Development

Authority of Singapore.

Brazil

Europe

Delphi Electronics &

Safety hereby declares that

L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR

are in compliance with the

essential requirements and

other relevant provisions of

Directive 1999/5/EC. This dec-

laration of conformity may, if

necessary, be consulted with

Delphi Electronics & Safety /

One Corporate Center /

Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005

USA.

Related information

•

Radar sensor (p. 203)

STARTING AND DRIVING

08 Starting and driving
08
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent
the car from being driven by individuals under
the influence of alcohol. Before the engine
can be started the driver must take a breath
test that verifies that he/she is not under the
influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration
takes place in accordance with each market's
limit value in force for driving legally.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information
•
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation
(p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine
(p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
•
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
sages (p. 252)
Alcohol lock* - functions and
operation
Functions
Nozzle for breath test.
Switch.
Transmission button.
Lamp for battery status.
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation - battery
Alcohol lock indicator lamp (4) shows battery
status:
Indicator
lamp (4)
Battery status
Flashing
green
Charging in progress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the charger
in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the alcohol lock in its holder. This
will keep the built-in battery fully charged
and the alcohol lock is activated automati-
cally when the car is opened.
Related information
•
Alcohol lock* (p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine
(p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
•
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
sages (p. 252)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

249

Alcohol lock* - storage

Store the alcohol lock in its holder. Release

the handheld unit by depressing it slightly in

its holder and releasing it - it then springs out

and can be removed from the holder.

Handheld unit storage and charging station.

•

Replace the handheld unit in the holder

by pushing it in until it engages.

•

Store the handheld unit in the holder -

this provides it with the best protection

and keeps its batteries fully charged.

Related information

•

Alcohol lock* (p. 248)

•

Alcohol lock* - functions and operation

(p. 248)

•

Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine

(p. 249)

•

Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)

•

Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-

sages (p. 252)

Alcohol lock* - before starting the

engine

The alcohol lock is activated automatically

and is then ready for use when the car is

opened.

Nozzle for breath test.

Switch.

Transmission button.

Lamp for battery status.

Lamp for result of breath test.

Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the

alcohol lock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the alcohol lock from its holder.

If the alcohol lock is outside the car when

||
08 Starting and driving
08
250
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
it is unlocked then it must first be acti-
vated with the switch (2).
3. Lift up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the trans-
mission to the car may have failed - in
which case, press the button (3) to trans-
mit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the alcohol
lock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp
(5) + Display
text
Specification
Green lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content meas-
ured.
Yellow lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Engine starting possi-
ble - measured alco-
hol content is above
0.1 mg/ml but below
the limit value in
force
A
.
Red lamp + Dis-
approved test
Wait 1 minute to
try again
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in force
A
.
A
Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what
applies in your country. See also Alcohol lock* (p. 248).
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
Alcohol lock* (p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation
(p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
•
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
sages (p. 252)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

251

Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind

In order to obtain correct function and as

accurate a measurement result as possible:

•

Avoid eating or drinking

approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

•

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the

alcohol in the washer fluid may result in

an incorrect measurement result.

Change of driver

In order to ensure that a new breath test is

carried out in the event of a change of driver -

depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)

simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At

which point the car returns to start inhibition

mode and a new approved breath test is

required before starting the engine.

Calibration and service

The alcohol lock must be checked and cali-

brated at a workshop

every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary the

combined instrument panel shows the mes-

sage

Alcoguard Calibration required See

manual. If calibration is not carried out within

these 30 days then normal engine starting will

be blocked - only starting with the Bypass

function will then be possible, see the follow-

ing heading "Emergency situation".

The message can be cleared by pressing the

send button (3) once. Otherwise it extin-

guishes on its own after approx. 2 minutes

but then reappears each time the engine is

started - only recalibration at a workshop

can clear the message permanently.

Cold or hot weather

The colder the weather the longer it takes

before the alcohol lock is ready for use:

Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-

ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 to +85 10

-5 to +10 60

-40 to -5 180

At temperatures below -20 ºC or above

+60 ºC the alcohol lock requires additional

power supply. The combined instrument

panel shows

Alcoguard Please insert

power cable. In which case, connect the

power supply cable from the glovebox and

wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time

can be reduced by taking the alcohol lock

indoors.

Emergency situation

In the event of an emergency situation or the

alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to

bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the

car.

NOTE

All Bypass activation is logged and saved

in memory, see Recording data (p. 18).

After the Bypass function has been activated

the combined instrument panel shows

Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time

while driving and can only be reset by a work-

shop

The Bypass function can be tested without

the error message being logged - in which

case, carry out all the steps without starting

the car. The error message is cleared when

the car is locked.

When the alcohol lock is installed, either the

Bypass or Emergency function is selected as

the bypassing option. This setting can be

changed afterwards at a workshop

Activating the Bypass function

•

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk

switch OK button and the button for haz-

ard warning flashers simultaneously for

approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru-

ment panel first shows

Bypass activated

An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||
08 Starting and driving
08
252
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Please wait for 1 minute and then
Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after
which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated more than
once. The error message shown during driv-
ing can only be cleared at a workshop
1
.
Activating the Emergency function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for haz-
ard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru-
ment panel shows 
Alcoguard Bypass
enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop
1
.
Related information
•
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation
(p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine
(p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* (p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
sages (p. 252)
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text
messages
In addition to the previously described mes-
sages related to how the alcohol lock works
before starting the engine (p. 249) the com-
bined instrument panel's display can also
show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Restart possi-
ble
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes -
engine starting possible
without new test.
Alcoguard
Service
required
Contact a workshop
A
.
Alcoguard No
signal
received
Transmission failed -
send manually with but-
ton (3) or take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Please try
again
Test failed - take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Please blow
longer
Blowing too short - blow
for longer.
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Please blow
softer
Blowing too hard - blow
more gently.
Alcoguard
Please blow
harder
Blowing too weak -
blow harder.
Alcoguard
preheating
Please wait
Heating not finished -
wait for text 
Alcoguard
Please blow for 5 sec-
onds.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Alcohol lock* (p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation
(p. 248)
•
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine
(p. 249)
•
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
1
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

08 Starting and driving
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
253
Starting the engine
The engine is started and switched off using
the remote control key and the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-
ted/inserted and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 164).
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch and press it in to its end posi-
tion. Note that if the car is equipped with
alcohol lock* then a breath test must first
be approved before the engine can be
started. For more information on the
Alcohol lock, see Alcohol lock* (p. 248).
2.
Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed
2
.
(For cars with automatic gearbox -
Depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a
slight delay before the engine can be
started - 
Engine preheating is displayed
in the meantime.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its
overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch after starting the engine
or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when leaving the
car, and make sure that the key position is
0 - in particular if there are children in the
car. For information on how this works -
see Key positions (p. 75).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal oper-
ating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
Keyless drive*
Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 168) starting
of the engine.
2
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.

08 Starting and driving

254

NOTE

A prerequisite for the engine to start is that

one of the car's remote control keys with

the Keyless drive function is in the passen-

ger compartment or cargo area.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from

the car while driving or during towing.

Related information

•

Switching off the engine (p. 254)

Switching off the engine

The engine is switched off using the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

To stop the engine:

•

Press START/STOP ENGINE - the

engine stops.

If the gear selector is not in P position or if

the car is moving:

•

Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or

hold the button depressed until the

engine stops.

Related information

•

Key positions (p. 75)

Steering lock

The steering lock makes steering difficult if

the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical

noise may be noticed when the steering lock

unlocks or locks.

Function

•

The steering lock is activated when the

driver's door is opened after the engine

has been switched off.

•

The steering lock is deactivated when the

remote control key is in the ignition

switch

and the START/STOP ENGINE

button is depressed.

Related information

•

Starting the engine (p. 253)

•

Key positions (p. 75)

•

Steering wheel (p. 80)

Cars with Keyless drive only need to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

255

Remote start (ERS)*

Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start)

means that the car's engine can be started

remotely in order to warm up/cool down the

passenger compartment before departure.

ERS is activated via key and/or via Volvo On

Call*.

The climate control starts with the same set-

tings that were being used when the car was

parked.

An ERS-started engine is activated for a

maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched

off. After two ERS-activations the engine

must be started in the normal way before

ERS can be re-used.

ERS is only available in cars with automatic

gearbox and cars that have a bonnet switch

installed.

NOTE

The service life of the remote control key's

battery is affected by the ERS function. In

the event of frequent use of ERS the bat-

tery should therefore be changed once per

year, see Remote control key - replacing

the battery (p. 167).

NOTE

Follow local/national rules/regulations on

idling. Also take into account the local/

national rules/regulations regarding the

noise level when the engine is running.

WARNING

To remote-start the engine, the following

criteria must be met:

•

The car must be supervised.

•

There must be no people or animals

inside or around the car.

•

The car must not be parked in a

closed, unventilated area - the exhaust

gases may seriously injure humans

and animals.

Related information

•

Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 255)

•

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-

sages (p. 257)

Remote start (ERS) - operation

The key's buttons for remote start.

Unlocking

Locking

Approach lighting

Unlocking, boot lid

Information

Remote starting the engine

To be able to remotely start the engine the

car must be locked and the bonnet closed.

Proceed as follows:

Available in the XC60, cars with alarm, most cars with 4-cylinder engines or if ERS is selected for new construction.

Only on PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 162).

08 Starting and driving

256

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

1. Briefly press on the key's button (2).

2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a

long press - at least 2 seconds - on

button (3).

If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the

following takes place:

1. The direction indicators flash quickly sev-

eral times.

2. The engine starts.

3. The direction indicators illuminate with a

constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that

the engine has started.

NOTE

After remote starting, the car continues to

be locked but with deactivated movement

detector*.

With PCC

key

The light indication for Approach

lighting

flashes several times when

the button is pressed and then goes

to constant glow if all criteria for

ERS have been fulfilled. However, this does

not mean that ERS has started the engine.

To check whether ERS has started the

engine, the user can press the button (5) - if

the engine has started, there is a light indica-

tion by the buttons (2) and (3).

Active functions

The following functions are activated with a

remote started engine:

•

Ventilation system

•

Audio/video system

•

Approach lighting.

Deactivated functions

The following functions are deactivated with a

remote started engine:

•

headlamps

•

Position lamps

•

Number plate lighting

•

Windscreen wiper.

ERS is interrupted

The following steps switch off an ERS-started

engine:

•

The remote control key's button

(1), (2) or (4) is depressed

•

The car is unlocked

•

A door is opened

•

Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is

depressed

•

The gear selector is moved out of P posi-

tion

•

Active ERS time exceeds 15 minutes.

When an ERS-started engine is switched off,

the direction indicators illuminate with a con-

stant glow for 3 seconds.

Related information

•

Remote start (ERS)* (p. 255)

•

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-

sages (p. 257)

For more information on the PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 162).

For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 160) and Approach lighting (p. 93).

08 Starting and driving

}}

257

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and

messages

In situations where the ERS function fails or is

interrupted, a symbol is shown in the com-

bined instrument panel, supplemented by an

explanatory text message.

ERS function unavailable

Message Specification

No remote

start Too

many tries

ERS unavailable

because a maximum of 2

ERS activations in suc-

cession are allowed.

No remote

start Low fuel

level

ERS unavailable

because fuel level too

low.

No remote

start Gear not

in P

ERS unavailable

because gear selector is

not in P position.

No remote

start Driver in

car

ERS unavailable

because someone is in

the passenger compart-

ment.

No remote

start Low

battery

ERS unavailable due to

low battery voltage.

Charge the battery by

starting the engine.

Message Specification

No remote

start Engine

warning

ERS unavailable due to

warning message from

engine. Contact a work-

shop

No remote

start Engine

coolant level

low

ERS unavailable due to

error message from

cooling system, see

Coolant - level (p. 348).

No remote

start Door

open

ERS unavailable

because a door/boot lid

was not closed.

No remote

start Bonnet

open

ERS did not activate

because the bonnet was

not closed.

No remote

start Car not

locked

ERS unavailable

because the car was not

locked.

No remote

star Key in

car

ERS did not activate

because the key was in

the car.

An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Interrupted ERS function

Message Specification

Remote start

off Gear not in

ERS interrupted

because gear selector

is not in P position.

Remote start

off Driver in

car

ERS interrupted

because someone is in

the passenger compart-

ment.

Remote start

off Engine

warning

ERS interrupted due to

error message from

engine. Contact a work-

shop

No remote

start Engine

coolant level

low

ERS interrupted due to

error message from

cooling system.

Remote start

off Bonnet

open

ERS interrupted

because the bonnet is

open.

Remote start

off Low bat-

tery

ERS interrupted since

the battery voltage is

too low.

Remote start

off Low fuel

level

ERS interrupted since

the fuel level is too low.

An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

08 Starting and driving

258

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information

•

Remote start (ERS)* (p. 255)

•

Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 255)

Jump starting with battery

If the starter battery (p. 360) is discharged

then the car can be started with current from

another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following

steps are recommended to avoid short cir-

cuits or other damage:

1. Set the car's electrical system in key

position 0, see Key positions - functions

at different levels (p. 75).

2. Check that the donor battery has a volt-

age of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another

car - switch off the donor car's engine

and make sure that the two cars do not

touch each other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's

clamps to the donor battery's positive

terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid

short circuits with other components in the

engine compartment.

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the

battery in your car and remove the cover,

see Starter battery - replacement

(p. 363).

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp

onto the car's positive terminal (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's

clamps to the donor battery's negative

terminal (3).

8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding

point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at

the top, the outer screw head (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are

affixed securely so that there are no

sparks during the starting attempt.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and

allow it to run a few minutes at a speed

slightly higher than idle

approx. 1500 rpm.

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

259

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-

charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during the

start procedure. There is a risk of sparks

forming.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -

first the black and then the red.

> Make sure that none of the black jump

lead's clamps comes into contact with

the battery's positive terminal or the

clamp connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

•

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen

gas, which is highly explosive. A spark

can be formed if a jump lead is con-

nected incorrectly, and this can be

enough for the battery to explode.

•

The battery contains sulphuric acid,

which can cause serious burns.

•

If sulphuric acid comes into contact

with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with

large quantities of water. If acid

splashes into the eyes - seek medical

attention immediately.

Related information

•

Starting the engine (p. 253)

Gearboxes

There are two main types of gearbox. Manual

gearbox and automatic gearbox.

•

Manual gearbox (p. 259)

•

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 261)

and Powershift (p. 264)

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system

components, the working temperature of

the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of

overheating, a warning symbol is illumi-

nated in the combined instrument panel in

conjunction with a text message being

shown. Follow the recommendation given

in the text message.

Related information

•

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*

(p. 261)

Manual gearbox

The function of the gearbox is to change the

gear ratio depending on speed and power

requirements.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions -

reverse gear position differs between them.

Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted

on the gear lever.

•

Depress the clutch pedal fully during

each gear change.

•

Take your foot off the clutch pedal

between gear changes.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when

parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear

is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa-

tions.

08 Starting and driving

260

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Reverse gear inhibitor

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi-

bility of mistakenly attempting to engage

reverse gear during normal forward travel.

•

Follow the gearing pattern printed on the

gear lever and start from neutral position,

N before moving it to R position.

•

Engage reverse gear only when the car is

stationary.

NOTE

With the upper variant of the shifting pat-

tern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous

illustration) - first press down the gear

lever in the N position in order to engage

reverse gear.

Related information

•

Gearboxes (p. 259)

•

Transmission fluid - grade and volume

(p. 398)

Gear shift indicator*

The gear shift indicator notifies the driver

when it is appropriate to engage the next

higher or lower gear.

An essential detail in connection with environ-

mental driving is to drive in the right gear and

to change gear in good time.

An indicator is available as an aid on certain

variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which

notifies the driver when it is appropriate to

engage the next higher or lower gear in order

to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump-

tion.

However, taking into consideration characte-

ristics such as performance and vibration-free

running, it may be advantageous to change

gear at a higher engine speed. The framed

number indicates the current gear.

Manual gearbox

Gear shift indicator for man-

ual gearbox. Only one

marker is illuminated at a

time - during normal driving

it is only illuminated in the

centre.

At the recommended upshift the cursor illumi-

nates "+", and at the recommended down-

shift the cursor illuminates "-" (marked red in

the illustration).

Automatic gearbox

Combined instrument panel "Digital" with

gear shift indicator.

The framed number indicates the current

gear.

With "Analogue" combined

instrument panel, the gear

positions and indicator

arrows are displayed in its

centre.

Related information

•

Manual gearbox (p. 259)

•

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*

(p. 261)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

261

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*

The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear

modes - Automatic and Manual.

D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear

positions. S: Sport mode*.

Combined instrument panel (p. 60) shows the

position of the gear selector using the follow-

ing indications:

P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Gear positions

Automatic gear positions are

indicated on the right of the

combined instrument panel.

(Only one marker is illumi-

nated at a time - the one

showing the current gear

selector position.)

Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when

the mode is active.

Parking position - P

Select P position when starting the engine or

when the car is parked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector

from the P position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and key position must be II, see

Key positions - functions at different levels

(p. 75).

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when

the P position is engaged. Also apply the

parking brake (p. 281) when the car is

parked.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to

allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when posi-

tion P is selected.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when

parking on a slope - the automatic trans-

mission's P position is not sufficient to

hold the car in all situation.

Reverse position - R

The car must be stationary when R position is

selected.

Neutral position - N

No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started. Apply the parking brake if the car is

stationary with the gear selector in N position.

In order to be able to move the gear selector

from N to another gear position, the brake

pedal must be depressed and key position

must be II, see Key positions - functions at

different levels (p. 75).

Drive position - D

D is the normal driving position. Shifting up

and down takes place automatically based on

the level of acceleration and speed. The car

must be stationary when the gear selector is

moved to D position from R position.

Geartronic – Manual gear positions

(+S-)

The driver can also change gear manually

using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The

car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal

is released.

The manual gear position is reached

by moving the lever to the side from

position D to the end position at

"+S-". The combined instrument

panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from

WHITE to ORANGE and the digits

1, 2, 3 etc.

are displayed in a box, corresponding to the

gear that has just been selected.

•

Move the lever forwards towards "+"

(plus) to change up a gear and release the

08 Starting and driving

262

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

lever, which returns to its rest position

between + and –.

•

Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to

change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be

selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the

driver allows the speed to decrease lower

than a level suitable for the selected gear, in

order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

•

Move the lever to the side to the end

position at D.

NOTE

If the gearbox has a Sport programme

then the gearbox will only become manual

after the gear selector has been moved

forwards or backwards in its "+S–" posi-

tion. The combined instrument panel then

changes indication from

S to show which

of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.

Paddles*

As a supplement to manual gear changing

with the gear selector there are also controls

located on the steering wheel, so-called

"paddles".

To be able to change gear with the steering

wheel paddles they must first be activated.

This is by means of pulling one of the paddles

toward the steering wheel - the combined

instrument panel then changes indication

from "D" to a figure, which indicates the cur-

rent gear.

To then change gear one step:

•

Pull one of the paddles backwards -

towards the steering wheel - and release.

Both steering wheel "paddles".

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

A gear change occurs at each pull of the pad-

dle provided that the engine speed does not

leave the permitted range.

After each gear change the combined instru-

ment panel changes figure to show the cur-

rent gear.

NOTE

Automatic deactivation

If the steering wheel paddles are not used

then they are deactivated after a short time

- this is indicated when the combined

instrument panel switches indication, from

the figure for the current gear back to "D".

The exception is during engine braking -

then the paddles are activated as long as

engine braking is in progress.

Manual deactivation

The steering wheel paddle shifters can

also be deactivated manually:

•

Pull both paddles toward the steering

wheel and hold until the combined

instrument panel changes character

from the figure for the current gear to

"D".

The paddles can also be used with the gear

selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles

are constantly activated without being deacti-

vated.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

263

Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)

The Sport programme provides

sportier characteristics and allows

higher engine speed for the gears.

At the same time it responds more

quickly to acceleration. During active driving,

the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading

to a delayed upshift.

To activate Sport mode:

•

Move the gear selector to the side from D

position to the end position at "+S–" - the

combined instrument panel changes indi-

cation from

D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while

driving.

Geartronic - Winter mode

It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads

if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the

gear selector from D position to the end

position at "+S–" - the combined instru-

ment panel changes indication from

D to

the figure

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever

forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the dis-

play shifts the indication from

1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate care-

fully.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the

car moves off with a lower engine speed and

reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down

When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the

way to the floor (beyond the position normally

regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is

immediately engaged. This is known as kick-

down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-

down position, the gearbox automatically

changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-

tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear-

box control program has a protective down-

shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down

function.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/

kick-down which would result in an engine

speed high enough to damage the engine.

Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift

down in this way at high engine speed – the

original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can

change one or more gears at a time depend-

ing on engine speed. The car changes up

when the engine reaches its maximum speed

in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Towing

If the car has to be towed - see important

information in the section Towing (p. 300).

Related information

•

Transmission fluid - grade and volume

(p. 398)

•

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*

(p. 264)

•

Gearboxes (p. 259)

With certain engines only.

If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

08 Starting and driving

264

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*

The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits

the motive force from the engine to the drive

wheels with double mechanical clutch discs,

as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses

a hydraulic torque converter.

D: Automatic gear positions. +S–: Manual gear

positions. S: Sport mode*.

Powershift transmission operates in the same

way and has similar controls and functions as

the Geartronic automatic transmission.

One exception is the function "Geartronic -

Winter mode" (p. 261):

•

Powershift enables driving away on a

slippery road surface if 2nd gear is

engaged manually - instead of 3rd gear

with Geartronic.

Towing

The model with Powershift transmission

should not be towed as it is dependent on the

engine running in order to receive sufficient

lubrication. If towing (p. 300) still has to take

place, the route must be as short as possible

and then at very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether the

car is equipped with Powershift or Geartronic

transmission, this can be verified by checking

the designation on the gearbox label under

the bonnet, Type designations (p. 387). The

designation ”MPS6” means that it is

Powershift transmission - otherwise it is

Geartronic automatic transmission.

See also important information in section

Towing (p. 300).

To bear in mind

The transmission's double clutch has over-

load protection that is activated if it becomes

too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with

the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for

a long time.

Overheated transmission causes the car to

shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol

illuminates and the combined instrument

panel shows a message. The transmission

can also overheat during slow driving in

queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradi-

ent, or with a trailer hitched. The gearbox

cools down when the car is stationary, with

foot brake depressed and the engine running

at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues

can be avoided by driving in stages:

•

Stop the car and wait with your foot on

the brake pedal until there is a moderate

distance to the traffic ahead, drive for-

ward a short distance, and then wait

another moment with your foot on the

brake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car station-

ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the

car with the accelerator pedal. The gear-

box could then overheat.

Text message and action

In some situations the combined instrument

panel may show a text message at the same

time as a symbol is illuminated.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

265

Symbol Message Driving characteristics Action

Transmission hot Brake to

hold

Difficulty in maintaining even speed

at constant engine speed.

Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the

foot brake

Transmission hot Park

safely Let engine run

Significant pulling in the car's trac-

tion.

Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe

manner

Transmission cooling Let

engine run

No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the

engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P posi-

tion until the message clears.

For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an

increased degree of seriousness should the

transmission become too hot. In parallel with

the text message, the driver is also advised

that the car's electronics are temporarily

changing the driving characteristics. Follow

the instructions in the text message where

appropriate.

NOTE

The examples in the table are no indication

of the car being defective, but show that a

safety function has been activated with a

view to preventing damage to any of the

car's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the text

Transmission hot Park safely Let

engine run is ignored then the heat in the

gearbox may become so high that the

power transmission between engine and

gearbox is temporarily halted in order to

prevent the clutch from malfunctioning -

the car then loses drive and is stationary

until gearbox temperature has cooled to

an acceptable level.

For more possible text messages with their

respective proposals for solutions concerning

automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 108).

A text message extinguishes automatically

after the action has been carried out or after

one press on the indicator stalk OK button.

Related information

•

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 261)

•

Transmission fluid - grade and volume

(p. 398)

08 Starting and driving

266

Gear selector inhibitor

There are two different types of gear selector

inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G021351

M: Manual shifting

- "+/-"- or "-Sport mode.

The gear selector can be moved forward and

back freely between N and D. Other positions

are locked with a latch that is released with

the inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever

can be moved forwards or backwards

between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

The automatic gearbox has special safety

systems:

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

•

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when

moving the gear selector to another posi-

tion.

Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock

Parking position (P)

In order to be able to move the gear selector

from P to other gear positions, the brake

pedal must be depressed and the key posi-

tion (p. 75) must be II.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in N position and the

car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds

(irrespective of whether the engine is running)

then the gear selector is locked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector

from the N position to another gear position,

the brake pedal must be depressed and the

key position (p. 75) must be II.

Deactivate automatic gear selector

inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat

starter battery, the gear selector must be

moved from the P position so that the car can

be moved.

Lift the rubber mat in the compartment

behind the centre console and locate a

hole

for the key blade (p. 164) in the

bottom of the compartment.

Search for a spring-loaded button down

in the hole with the key blade; depress

the button with the blade and hold.

Move the gear selector from the P posi-

tion and pull up the key blade.

4. Set the rubber mat back in place.

The illustration is schematic.

There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

267

Related information

•

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 261)

•

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 264)

Hill start assist (HSA)*

The foot brake can be released before setting

off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start

Assist) function means that the car does not

roll backwards.

The function means that the pedal pressure in

the brake system remains for several seconds

while the driver's foot is moved from brake

pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after

several seconds or when the driver acceler-

ates.

Related information

•

Starting the engine (p. 253)

All-wheel drive - (AWD)*

Optimal traction is achieved with all-wheel

drive.

All-wheel drive is always available

All-wheel drive (All Wheel Drive) means that

the car is driving all four wheels at the same

time.

The power is automatically distributed

between the front and rear wheels. An elec-

tronically controlled clutch system distributes

the power to the wheels that have the best

grip on the current road surface. This pro-

vides the best traction and prevents wheel

spin. Under normal driving conditions, the

majority of power is transmitted to the front

wheels.

All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain,

snow and icy conditions.

Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.

08 Starting and driving
08
268
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/Stop*
Some engine and gearbox combinations
come fitted with a Start/Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic
or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then
switched off temporarily and restarts auto-
matically when the journey is due to continue.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor-
poration's core values and it influences all of
our operations. This target orientation has
resulted in several separate energy-saving
functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with
the collective task of reducing fuel consump-
tion, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust
emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter
and cleaner.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop auto-
matically, whenever appropriate.
Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the
Start/Stop function depending on whether the
gearbox is manual or automatic.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)
Start/Stop* - function and operation
The Start/Stop function is activated automati-
cally when the engine is started with the key.
The Start/Stop function is
activated automatically when
the engine is started with the
key. The driver is made
aware of this by the func-
tion's symbol illuminating in
the combined instrument
panel and the On/Off button
lamp illuminating.
All of the car's normal sys-
tems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as nor-
mal even with an engine that has stopped
automatically, except that some equipment
may have the function temporarily reduced,
e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or
extremely high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stopping the engine
The following is required for the engine to
auto-stop:

08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
Conditions M/A
A
Declutch, set the gear lever in neu-
tral position and release the clutch
pedal - the engine stops automati-
cally.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake
and then keep your foot on the
pedal - the engine stops automati-
cally.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If the ECO function is acti-
vated then the engine may
auto-stop before the car is
completely stationary.
For certain engine variants the engine may
auto-stop before the car is stationary regard-
less of whether the ECO function is activated.
When the engine is auto-stopped,
the combined instrument panel's
symbol for the Start/Stop function
illuminates.
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions M/
A
A
With the gear lever in neutral posi-
tion:
1. Depress the clutch pedal or
press the accelerator pedal -
the engine starts.
2. Engage a suitable gear and
drive.
M
Release the foot pressure on the
foot brake - the engine starts auto-
matically and the journey can con-
tinue.
A
Maintain foot pressure on the foot
brake and depress the accelerator
pedal - the engine auto-starts.
A
The following option is also availa-
ble on a downhill gradient:
Release the foot brake and let the
car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
M +
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out with a push of
this button.
Disengaged function is indicated by
the combined instrument panel's
Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off
button's lamp extinguishing.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it
is reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* (p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)

08 Starting and driving
08
270
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
Although the Start/Stop function is activated,
the engine does not always stop automati-
cally.
The engine does not auto-stop if:
Conditions M/A
A
the car has not first achieved
approx. 8 km/h after a key start or
the last auto-stop.
M +
A
the driver has opened the seat-
belt's buckle.
M +
A
the capacity of the starter battery
is below the minimum permissible
level.
M +
A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M +
A
ambient temperature is around
freezing point or above
approx. 30 °C.
M +
A
the windscreen's electric heating
is activated.
M +
A
the environment in the passenger
compartment differs from the pre-
set values - indicated by the venti-
lation fan running at a high speed.
M +
A
Conditions M/A
A
the car is reversed. M +
A
the starter battery temperature is
below the freezing point or is too
high.
M +
A
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M +
A
the exhaust system's particulate
filter is full - the temporarily disen-
gaged Start/Stop function is reac-
tivated as soon as an automatic
cleaning cycle has been per-
formed (see Diesel particle filter
(DPF) (p. 292)).
M +
A
the road is very steep. M +
A
a trailer is connected electrically to
the car’s electrical system.
M +
A
the bonnet has been opened
B
.
M +
A
the gearbox does not have normal
operating temperature.
A
Conditions M/A
A
the atmospheric air pressure is
less than equivalent to
1500-2500 metres above sea level
- the current air pressure varies
with the prevailing weather condi-
tions.
A
adaptive cruise control Queue
Assist is activated.
A
the gear selector is in S position
C
or "+/-".
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
B
With certain engines only.
C
Sport mode.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* (p. 268)
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

271

•

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages

(p. 274)

•

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts

An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain

cases without the driver having decided that

the journey should continue.

In the following cases the engine also starts

automatically if the driver has not depressed

the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes

his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic

gearbox):

Conditions

M/A

Misting forms on the windows. M + A

The environment in the passenger

compartment deviates from the

preset values.

M + A

There is a temporarily high current

take-off or starter battery capacity

drops below the lowest permissi-

ble level.

M + A

Repeated pumping of the brake

pedal.

M + A

The bonnet is opened

M + A

The car starts to roll, or there is a

small increase in speed if the car

auto-stopped without being com-

pletely stationary.

M + A

Conditions

M/A

The driver's seatbelt buckle is

opened with the gear selector in D

or N position.

Steering wheel movements

The gear selector is moved out of

the D position to S position

, R or

"+/-".

The driver's door is opened with

the gear selector in D position - a

"ping" sound and text message

inform that the Start/Stop function

is active.

M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

With certain engines only.

Sport mode.

WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the engine

has stopped automatically - the engine

may suddenly start automatically. First

switch off the engine as normal using the

START/STOP ENGINE button before

opening the bonnet.

Related information

•

Start/Stop* (p. 268)

•

Start/Stop* - function and operation

(p. 268)

•

Starting the engine (p. 253)

08 Starting and driving
08
272
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
auto-start
The engine does not always auto-start after
having auto-stopped.
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
Conditions M/A
A
A gear is engaged without
declutching - a display text
prompts the driver to set the gear
lever in neutral position in order to
enable auto-start.
M
The driver is unrestrained. M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear
selector is in P position and the
driver’s door is open - a normal
engine start must take place.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* (p. 268)
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)

08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, pro-
ceed in accordance with the below:
1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is
locked in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the
engine starts automatically.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be
set in neutral position. The combined
instrument panel then shows the text 
Put
gear in neutral.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* (p. 268)
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)
Start/Stop* - settings
The car's MY CAR menu system, under the
DRIVe heading, contains information about
Volvo's Start/Stop system, as well as recom-
mendations for energy-saving driving techni-
ques.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* (p. 268)
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)

08 Starting and driving

274

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages

The Start/Stop function can show text mes-

sages in the combined instrument panel.

Text message

In combination with this indicator

lamp the Start/Stop function may

show text messages in the com-

bined instrument panel for certain situations.

For some of them there is a recommended

action that should be performed. The follow-

ing table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Info/Action

M/A

Auto Start/Stop Service

required

Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-

ommended.

M + A

Autostart Engine running +

acoustic signal

Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in

D position.

Press start button

The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP

ENGINE button.

M + A

Depress clutch pedal to

start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Depress brake and clutch

pedals to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Put gear in neutral to start

Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral posi-

tion.

08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
Symbol Message Info/Action
M/A
A
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the
engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP
ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following com-
pletion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Related information
•
Start/Stop* (p. 268)
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 268)
•
Starting the engine (p. 253)
•
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 273)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 272)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 271)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 270)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 273)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)

08 Starting and driving

276

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ECO*

ECO

is an innovative Volvo function for

automatic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing

fuel consumption by up to 5%, depending on

the driver's driving style. The function gives

the driver the option of a more active environ-

mentally conscious way of driving.

General

The following are changed

upon activation of the ECO

function:

•

Gearbox gearshift points.

•

Engine management and response from

the accelerator pedal.

•

Start/Stop function - the engine can also

auto-stop before the car has stopped

down to being completely stationary.

•

The Eco Coast function is activated -

engine braking ceases.

•

Climate control system settings - some

electricity consumers are deactivated or

operate at reduced power.

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, sev-

eral parameters in the climate control sys-

tem's settings are changed, and several

electricity consumer functions are

reduced. Certain settings can be reset

manually, but full functionality is only

restored by deactivating the ECO function.

ECO - Operation

ECO On/Off

ECO symbol

The ECO function is deactivated when the

engine is switched off, and must therefore be

activated after each time the engine is

started. There are exceptions for certain

engines. However, it is easily verified by

means of both the combined instrument

panel

ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp

illuminating when the function is activated.

ECO function On or Off

Disengaged ECO function is

indicated by the combined

instrument panel

ECO sym-

bol and the ECO button lamp

extinguishing. The function is

then switched off until it is

reactivated with the ECO

button.

Eco Coast - Function

The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice

that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in

turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to

coast for longer distances. When the driver

releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is

automatically disengaged from the engine

whose speed is reduced to idling speed with

minimum consumption.

This function is intended for use in the event

of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to

coast forward to an intersection or a red light.

Eco Coast enables proactive driving where

the driver can use the so-called "Pulse &

Glide" technique and a minimum of braking.

A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily

deactivated ECO function can also collec-

Not possible on the XC60 and XC70 with AWD.

08 Starting and driving

277

tively contribute to reduced consumption.

Accordingly:

•

Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without

engine braking = Low consumption

and

•

Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting

with engine braking = Minimum con-

sumption.

NOTE

However, to achieve optimal low fuel con-

sumption, Eco Coast in combination with

short coasting distances should generally

be avoided.

Activating Eco Coast

The function is activated when the accelera-

tor pedal is fully released, in combination with

the following parameters:

•

ECO button activated

•

Gear selector in D position

•

Speed within the range of

approx. 65-140 km/h

•

The road's downhill gradient is not

steeper than approx. 6%.

Deactivate Eco Coast

In certain situations it may be desirable to

deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples

of such situations include:

•

on steep downhill gradients - to be able

to use engine braking.

•

before an imminent overtaking manoeu-

vre - in order to be able to complete it in

the safest possible way.

Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to

engine braking can be performed as follows:

•

Press the ECO button.

•

Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-"

position.

•

Change gear with the steering wheel pad-

dle shifters.

•

Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.

Eco Coast - Limitations

The function is not available if:

•

cruise control is activated

•

the road's downhill gradient is steeper

than approx. 6%

•

manual gear changing is performed with

the steering wheel paddle shifters*

•

engine and/or gearbox are not at normal

operating temperature.

•

the gear selector is moved from D- to "S

+/-" position

•

speed is outside the range of

approx. 65-140 km/h

More information and settings

The car's menu system MY CAR contains

further information on the ECO concept - see

the section MY CAR (p. 110).

Related information

•

General information on climate control

(p. 123)

08 Starting and driving

278

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Foot brake

The foot brake is used to reduce the car's

speed while driving.

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If

a brake circuit is damaged then the brake

pedal will engage deeper and a higher pres-

sure on the pedal is needed to produce the

normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted

by a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the

engine is running.

If the foot brake is used when the engine is

switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a

higher pedal pressure must be used to brake

the car.

For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)*

(p. 267)* function, the pedal returns more

slowly than usual to normal position if the car

is parked on a gradient or on an uneven sur-

face.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a

heavy load the brakes can be relieved by

using engine braking. Engine braking is most

efficiently used if the same gear is used

downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads

on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving

conditions (p. 394).

Braking on wet roads

When driving for a long time in heavy rain

without braking, the braking effect may be

delayed slightly when next using the brakes.

This may also be the case after a car wash. It

is then necessary to depress the brake

harder. For this reason, maintain a greater

distance to the traffic ahead.

Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads

and after a car wash. The brake discs are

then warmed up, dry more quickly and are

protected against corrosion. Take the prevail-

ing traffic situation into account when brak-

ing.

Braking on salted roads

When driving on salted roads a layer of salt

may form on the brake discs and brake lin-

ings. This may extend braking distance. For

this reason, keep an extra large safety dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead. Also make sure of

the following:

•

Brake occasionally to remove any layer of

salt. Make sure that other road users are

not put at risk by the braking.

•

Gently depress the brake pedal when

driving is finished and before the next

journey starts.

Maintenance

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-

ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as

specified in the Service and Warranty Book-

let.

New and replacement brake linings and brake

discs only provide optimal brake performance

after a few hundred kilometres after "wearing-

in". Compensate for the reduced brake per-

formance by depressing the brake pedal

harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake

linings that are approved for your Volvo.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's compo-

nents must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about

the procedure or engage a workshop to

carry out the inspection - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended.

08 Starting and driving
08
279
Symbols and messages
Symbol Specification
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started -
automatic function check.
WARNING
If   and   illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake sys-
tem checked - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Related information
•
Parking brake (p. 281)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 280)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 280)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 279)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System), prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
The function allows the steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid
a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in
the brake pedal when this is engaged and this
is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto-
matically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 278)
•
Parking brake (p. 281)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 280)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 280)

08 Starting and driving
08
280
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning
flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated in order
to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking.
The function means that the brake light
flashes instead of - as in normal braking -
shining with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h in the event of heavy
braking. After the car's speed has been
slowed down to below 10 km/h the brake
light returns from flashing to the normal con-
stant glow - while at the same time the car's
hazard warning lights (p. 90) are activated.
These flash until the driver accelerates the car
up to a higher speed again or switches off the
hazard warning lights.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 278)
•
Parking brake (p. 281)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 280)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 279)
Foot brake - emergency brake
assistance
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking
force and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and
increases the braking force when necessary.
The brake force can be reinforced up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
EBA function is interrupted when the pressure
on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
(hold) the brake pedal as long as neces-
sary. If the brake pedal is released then all
braking ceases.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 278)
•
Parking brake (p. 281)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 280)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 279)

08 Starting and driving

}}

281

Parking brake

The parking brake holds the car stationary,

when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani-

cally locking/blocking two wheels.

Function

A faint electric motor noise can be heard

when the electrically-controlled parking brake

is being applied. The noise can also be heard

during the automatic function checking of the

parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake

is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.

If it is applied when the car is moving then the

normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts

on all four wheels. Brake function changes

over to the rear wheels when the car is almost

stationary.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low then the park-

ing brake can neither be released nor applied.

Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage

is too low, see Jump starting with battery

(p. 258).

Applying the parking brake

Parking brake control - apply.

1. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

2. Press the parking brake control.

The combined instrument pan-

el's symbol starts flashing - once there

is a constant glow the parking brake is

applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make

sure that the car is at a standstill position.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st

gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear

selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

Emergency brake

In an emergency the parking brake can be

applied when the vehicle is in motion by

pressing and holding the parking brake con-

trol. The braking procedure is stopped when

the control is released.

NOTE

An acoustic signal sounds while emer-

gency braking is active at high speeds.

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked facing uphill:

•

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

•

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when

parking on a slope - leaving the car in

gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis-

sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all

situation.

08 Starting and driving

282

Disengaging the parking brake

Parking brake control - release.

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch

2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

3. Apply the parking brake control.

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

bol extinguishes.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be released

manually by depressing the clutch pedal

instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-

mends that the brake pedal is used.

Releasing automatically

1. Start the engine.

2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.

3. Ease up the clutch and depress the

accelerator.

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

bol extinguishes.

Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch

2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

3. Pull the control.

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

bol extinguishes.

Releasing automatically

1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

4. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and depress the accelerator.

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

bol extinguishes.

NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is

only released automatically if the engine is

running and the driver is wearing a seat-

belt. The parking brake is released imme-

diately on cars with automatic gearbox

when the accelerator pedal is depressed

and the gear selector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

car to roll backward when the parking brake

is released automatically on a steep incline.

Avoid this by depressing the control while

driving off. Release the control when the

engine achieves traction.

Replacing the brake linings

The rear brake linings must be replaced at a

workshop due to the design of the electric

parking brake - an authorised Volvo work-

shop is recommended.

For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.

08 Starting and driving

}}

283

Symbols and messages

For information on how the combined instru-

ment panel's text messages can be shown

and deleted, see Messages - handling

(p. 109).

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

"Message"

•

Read the combined instrument panel's message.

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.

•

Read the combined instrument panel's message.

Handbrake not

fully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:

•

Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

•

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.

08 Starting and driving

284

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Handbrake not

applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:

•

Try to release and apply the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

•

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door

open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.

Handbrake

Service

required

A fault has arisen:

•

Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

•

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the car has to be parked before a possible

fault has been rectified, then the wheels must

be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear

engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selec-

tor must be in position P (automatic gearbox).

A text message can be acknowledged by

briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-

tion indicator stalk.

Related information

•

Foot brake (p. 278)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

285

Driving in water

Fording means that the car is driven through a

water-covered roadway. Fording must be car-

ried out with great caution.

The car can be driven through water at a

maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum

speed of walking pace. Extra caution must be

exercised when passing through flowing

water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed

and do not stop the car. When the water has

been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly

and check that full brake function is achieved.

Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake

function.

•

Clean the electric contacts of the electric

engine block heater* and trailer coupling

after driving in water and mud.

•

Do not let the car stand with water over

the sills for any long period of time - this

could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters

the air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water could

enter the transmission. This reduces the

lubricating ability of the oils and shortens

the service life of these systems.

Damage to any component, engine, trans-

mission, turbocharger, differential or its

internal components caused by flooding,

hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not

covered by the warranty.

In the event of the engine stalling in water,

do not try restart - tow the car from the

water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo

workshop is recommended. Risk of engine

breakdown.

Related information

•

Recovery (p. 302)

•

Towing (p. 300)

Overheating

Under special conditions, for example hard

driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is

a risk that the engine and drive system may

overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driv-

ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer*

(p. 294).

•

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front

of the grille when driving in hot climates.

•

If the temperature in the engine's cooling

system is too high then a warning symbol

is illuminated in the combined instrument

panel's information display and a text

message

High engine temperature

Stop safely is shown there - stop the car

in a safe way and allow the engine to run

at idling speed for several minutes in

order to cool down.

•

If the text message

High engine

temperature Turn off engine or Engine

coolant level low Stop safely

is shown

then the engine must be switched off

after stopping the car.

•

In the event of overheating in the gearbox

a built-in protection function is activated

which, amongst other things, illuminates

a warning symbol in the combined instru-

ment panel, and its display shows the

text message

Transmission hot Reduce

speed or Transmission hot Stop safely

Wait for cooling - follow the recommen-

dation given and lower the speed and

08 Starting and driving

286

stop the car in a safe way and allow the

engine to run at idling speed for a few

minutes in order to allow the gearbox to

cool down.

•

If the car overheats, the air conditioning

may be switched off temporarily.

•

Do not turn the engine off immediately

you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to

operate for a time after the engine has

been switched off.

Driving with open tailgate/boot lid

When driving with the boot lid open, toxic

exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car

through the cargo area.

WARNING

Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic

exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car

through the cargo area.

Related information

•

Loading (p. 151)

Overload - starter battery

The electrical functions in the car load the

starter battery (p. 360) to varying degrees.

Avoid using the key position II (p. 75) when

the engine is switched off. Instead use posi-

tion I - which uses less power.

Also, be aware of different accessories that

load the electrical system. Do not use func-

tions which use a lot of power when the

engine is switched off. Examples of such

functions are:

•

ventilation fan

•

headlamps

•

windscreen wiper

•

audio system (high volume).

If the starter battery voltage is low then the

combined instrument panel's information dis-

play shows the text

Low battery charge

Power save mode. The energy-saving func-

tion then shuts down certain functions or

reduces certain functions such as the ventila-

tion fan and/or audio system.

– In which case, charge the starter battery

by starting the engine and then running it

for at least 15 minutes - starter battery

charging is more effective during driving

than running the engine at idling speed

while stationary.

08 Starting and driving
08
287
Before a long journey
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to
go through the following points:
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 402) is nor-
mal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
•
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 314) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 345)
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 311)
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform
certain checks in order to ensure that the car
can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
•
The engine coolant (p. 348) must contain
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To avoid health
risks, different types of glycol must not be
mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
vent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 394).
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
•
Use washer fluid (p. 360) to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal require-
ment in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 287)

08 Starting and driving

288

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing

The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as

follows:

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on

the lighting panel - the flap opens when the

button is released.

In the combined instrument panel's

display the arrow on the symbol indi-

cates which side of the car the fuel cap is

located.

•

Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in

until a click confirms that it is closed.

Related information

•

Filling up with fuel (p. 288)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening

The fuel filler flap can be opened manually

when electric opening from the passenger

compartment is not possible.

G024631

1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo

area (same side as fuel filler flap) and

locate the green cord with handle.

2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the

fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".

IMPORTANT

Pull the wire gently - minimal force is

required to disengage the hatch lock.

Related information

•

Filling up with fuel (p. 288)

Filling up with fuel

Important things to consider when refuelling.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank

in the event of high outside temperatures.

Open the cap slowly.

•

After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it

until one or more clicking sounds are

heard.

Filling up with fuel

•

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the

pump nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot

weather.

08 Starting and driving
08
289
Filling with a fuel can
15
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo
area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an open-
able cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid
past the cover before filling can begin.
Related information
•
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 288)
•
Fuel - handling (p. 289)
Fuel - handling
Fuel of a lower quality than that recom-
mended by Volvo must not be used as engine
power and fuel consumption is negatively
affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and die-
sel are highly toxic and could cause per-
manent injury or be fatal if swallowed.
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of
fuels which are not recommended will
invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any sup-
plementary service agreements; this is
applicable to all engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
Economical driving (p. 293)
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 290)
•
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 292)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 402)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 400)
15
Only applies to cars with diesel engine.

08 Starting and driving

290

Fuel - petrol

Petrol is used as fuel.

Only use petrol from well-known producers.

Never use fuel of dubious quality. Petrol must

fulfil the EN 228 standard if this is available.

•

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

•

98 RON is recommended for optimum

performance and minimum fuel consump-

tion.

When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,

fuel with the highest possible octane rating is

recommended for optimum performance and

fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

•

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid

damaging the catalytic converter.

•

Fuel containing metallic additives must

not be used.

•

Do not use any additives which have

not been recommended by Volvo.

Alcohols-ethanol

IMPORTANT

•

Fuel that contains up to

10 percent by volume ethanol is per-

mitted.

•

EN 228 E10 petrol (max

10 percent by volume ethanol) is

approved for use.

•

Ethanol higher than E10 (max

10 percent by volume ethanol) is not

permitted. T.ex. E85 is not permitted.

Related information

•

Fuel - handling (p. 289)

•

Economical driving (p. 293)

•

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

(p. 402)

•

Fuel tank - volume (p. 400)

Fuel - diesel

Diesel is used as fuel.

Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-

ers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel

fuel must fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435

standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to

contaminants in the fuel, such as metals and

a high volume of sulphur for example.

At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a par-

affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,

which may lead to ignition problems. Special

diesel fuel designed for low temperatures

around freezing point is available from the

major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous

at low temperatures and reduces the risk of

paraffin precipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is

reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When

refuelling, check that the area around the fuel

filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the

paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-

gent and water.

08 Starting and driving
08
291
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME
(Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
Special additives
•
Marine diesel fuel
•
Heating oil
•
FAME
16
 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
workshop in order to restart the engine after
fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel
starvation, the fuel system needs a few
moments to carry out a check. Do this before
starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch and push it in to the end posi-
tion. For more information, see Key posi-
tions (p. 75).
2. Press the START button without
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel. For more information,
see Volvo service programme (p. 337).
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Related information
•
Fuel - handling (p. 289)
•
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 292)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 402)
16
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.

08 Starting and driving
08
292
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission con-
trol.
The particles in the exhaust gases are collec-
ted in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to
burn away the particles and empty the filter.
This requires the engine to have reached nor-
mal operating temperature.
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur-
ing regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances
in cold weather then the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature. This
means that regeneration of the diesel particle
filter does not take place and the filter is not
emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full
of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
shown in the combined instrument panel, and
the message 
Soot filter full See manual is
shown in its information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the
car until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature, preferably on a main road or
motorway. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regenera-
tion:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase tem-
porarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tem-
perature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with parti-
cles, it may be difficult to start the engine
and the filter is non-functional. Then there
is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced.
Related information
•
Fuel - handling (p. 289)
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 290)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 402)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 400)
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close
to the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata-
lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sond
TM
 oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve
fuel economy. For more information, see Fuel
consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 402).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con-
tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.
This value is fed into an electronic system
that continuously controls the injectors. The
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is
continuously adjusted. These adjustments
create optimal conditions for efficient com-
bustion, and together with the three-way cat-
alytic converter reduce harmful emissions
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous
oxides).

08 Starting and driving
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
293
Related information
•
Economical driving (p. 293)
•
Fuel - petrol (p. 290)
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 290)
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv-
ing style and speed to the prevailing condi-
tions.
•
For lowest fuel consumption, activate
ECO* (p. 276)
17
.
•
Use the ECO Guide which indicates how
fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see
Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 64).
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adap-
ted to the current traffic situation and
road - lower engine speeds result in lower
fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator
(p. 260).
•
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
•
High speed results in increased fuel con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select
ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 404).
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the con-
sumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher consumption -
remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
For information about Volvo Car Corpora-
tion's environmental philosophy, see Environ-
mental philosophy (p. 22).
For more information about fuel consumption,
see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 402).
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates impor-
tant systems such as the power steering
and brake servo.
17
Only applies to cars with automatic gearbox.

08 Starting and driving

294

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information

•

Fuel - handling (p. 289)

•

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

(p. 402)

•

Fuel tank - volume (p. 400)

Driving with a trailer*

When driving with a trailer there are a number

of important points to think about regarding

e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how

the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.

The total of the weight of the passengers and

all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's

payload by a corresponding weight. For more

detailed information, see Weights (p. 391).

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,

then the car is delivered with the necessary

equipment for driving with a trailer.

•

The car's towing bracket must be of an

approved type.

•

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with

your Volvo dealer that the car is fully

equipped for driving with a trailer.

•

Distribute the load on the trailer so that

the weight on the towing bracket com-

plies with the specified maximum towball

load.

•

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-

mended pressure for a full load. For infor-

mation on the tyre pressure, see Tyres -

approved tyre pressures (p. 404).

•

The engine is loaded more heavily than

usual when driving with a trailer.

•

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is

brand new. Wait until it has been driven

at least 1000 km.

•

The brakes are loaded much more than

usual on long and steep downhill slopes.

Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your

speed.

•

For safety reasons, the maximum permit-

ted speed for the car when coupled with

a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow

the regulations in force for the permitted

speeds and weights.

•

Maintain a low speed when driving with a

trailer up long, steep ascents.

•

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of

more than 12%.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the car's towing

bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer

has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable

approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does

not drag on the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on

the trailer

If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi-

cators are broken, then the combined instru-

ment panel's symbol for direction indicators

flashes faster than normal and the information

display shows the text

Trailer indicator

malfunction

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light

are broken then the

Trailer brake light

malfunction text is shown.

08 Starting and driving
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
295
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car
is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see Towing capacity and towball
load (p. 392).
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
may be certified for higher or lower towing
weights than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox
(p. 295)
•
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox
(p. 295)
•
Towing bracket/Towbar* (p. 296)
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)
Driving with a trailer* - manual
gearbox
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheat-
ing.
•
Do not run the engine at higher revolu-
tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines:
3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature
may become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
•
In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is
2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of
the coolant.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 294)
Driving with a trailer* - automatic
gearbox
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the opti-
mum gear related to load and engine
speed.
•
In the event of overheating a warning
symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel with a message that is
shown in the information display - follow
the recommendation given.
Steep inclines
•
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to
drive at a high gear with low engine revo-
lutions.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
•
Block the wheels with chocks when park-
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

||
08 Starting and driving
08
296
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with a trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission, see
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 264).
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
off.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 261)
Towing bracket/Towbar*
A towing bracket means that it is possible to
e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
If the car is equipped with a detachable/
removable towbar, the installation instruc-
tions for the loose section must be followed
carefully, see Detachable towbar* - attach-
ment/removal (p. 297).
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
•
Follow the installation instructions
carefully.
•
The detachable section must be
locked with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window
shows green.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 294)
Detachable towbar* - storage
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo
area.
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
Related information
•
Detachable towbar* - specifications
(p. 297)
•
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 297)
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 294)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

297

Detachable towbar* - specifications

Specifications for detachable towbar.

Specifications

G021485

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 1127

B 87

C 855

D 428

E 112

F 360

G Side member

H Ball centre

Related information

•

Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal

(p. 297)

•

Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 296)

•

Driving with a trailer* (p. 294)

Detachable towbar* - attachment/

removal

The attachment/removal of the detachable

towbar is performed in the following way:

Attaching

G018928

Remove the protective cover by first

pressing in the catch

and then pulling

the cover straight back

G021487

Ensure that the mechanism is in the

unlocked position by turning the key

clockwise.

08 Starting and driving

298

G021488

The indicator window must show red.

G021489

Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

G021490

The indicator window must show green.

G000000

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked

position. Remove the key from the lock.

G021494

Check that the towbar is secure by pull-

ing it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it

must be detached and reattached in

accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,

the remainder of the towbar should be

clean and dry.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

299

G021495

Safety cable.

WARNING

Take care to secure the trailer's safety

cable in the intended bracket.

Removing the towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.

Push in the locking wheel and turn it

anticlockwise

until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it

comes to a stop. Hold it in this position

while pulling the towbar rearward and

upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in

the car, see Detachable towbar* - storage

(p. 296).

G018929

Push the protective cover until it snaps

tight.

Related information

•

Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 296)

•

Detachable towbar* - specifications

(p. 297)

•

Driving with a trailer* (p. 294)

08 Starting and driving

300

Towing

During towing, one vehicle is towed by

another vehicle using a tow rope.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit

for towing before towing begins.

1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the

remote control key in the ignition switch

and giving a long press on the START/

STOP ENGINE button - key position II is

activated, see Key positions (p. 75) for

more information about key positions.

2. The remote control key must remain in

the ignition switch while the car is being

towed.

3. Keep the towline taut when the towing

vehicle reduces speed by holding your

foot gently pressed on the brake pedal -

thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

•

Check that the steering lock is

unlocked before towing.

•

The remote control key must be in key

position II - in position I all airbags are

deactivated.

•

Never remove the remote control key

from the ignition switch when the car

is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not

work when the engine is switched off - the

brake pedal needs to be depressed

about 5 times more heavily and the steer-

ing is considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox

Prior to towing:

– Move gear lever into neutral and release

the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic

Prior to towing:

– Move the gear selector to position N and

release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

•

Do not tow the vehicle at speeds

higher than 80 km/h or for distances in

excess of 80 km.

•

Note that the car must always be

towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Automatic gearbox Powershift

Models with the Powershift gearbox should

not be towed. If towing still has to take place,

the route must be as short as possible and

then with very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or

not the car is equipped with Powershift trans-

mission, this can be verified by checking the

designation on the gearbox label under the

bonnet, see Type designations (p. 387). The

designation ”MPS6” means that it is

Powershift transmission - otherwise it is

Geartronic automatic transmission.

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

•

However, the car can be towed for a

short distance at low speed to move it

from a dangerous position - not further

than 10 km and not faster than

10 km/h. Note that the car must

always be towed with the wheels roll-

ing forward.

•

In the event of moving a longer dis-

tance than 10 km, the car must be

transported with the drive wheels

raised from the road - professional

recovery is recommended.

Prior to towing:

– Move the gear selector to position N and

release the parking brake.

Jump starting

Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.

Use a donor battery if the starter battery is

08 Starting and driving

}}

301

discharged and the engine does not start, see

Jump starting with battery (p. 258).

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damaged

during attempts to tow-start the engine.

Related information

•

Towing eye (p. 301)

•

Recovery (p. 302)

Towing eye

The towing eye is screwed into a threaded

socket behind a cover on the right-hand side

of the bumper, front or rear.

Attaching the towing eye

Take out the towing eye that is located

under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

The cover for the towing eye's attach-

ment point is available in two variants

which must be opened in different ways:

•

Open the variant with a recess using a

coin or similar inserted in the recess,

turning it outwards. Then turn out the

cover completely and remove it.

•

The second variant has a marking

along one side or in a corner: Press the

marking with a finger and fold out the

opposite side/corner at the same time

using a coin or similar - the cover turns

around its axis and can then be

removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to its

flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.

using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and

return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the

bumper.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car

up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-

form. The car's position and ground clear-

ance determine whether it is possible. If the

slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too

steep, or if the ground clearance under the

car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-

aged if you try to pull it up using the towing

eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi-

cle's lifting device if necessary.

08 Starting and driving

302

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain

behind the recovery vehicle while the car

pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing

on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck

or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for

recovery assistance.

Related information

•

Towing (p. 300)

•

Recovery (p. 302)

Recovery

Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor-

ted away by means of another vehicle.

Call a recovery service for recovery assis-

tance.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car

up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-

form. The car's position and ground clear-

ance determine whether it is possible. If the

slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too

steep, or if the ground clearance under the

car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-

aged if you try to pull it up using the towing

eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi-

cle's lifting device if necessary.

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain

behind the recovery vehicle while the car

pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing

on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck

or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for

recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transpor-

ted with the wheels rolling forward.

•

An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with

raised front suspension must not be

towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It

should not be towed further than 50

km.

Related information

•

Towing (p. 300)

WHEELS AND TYRES

09 Wheels and tyres

304

Tyres - maintenance

Amongst other things, the function of the

tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road

surface, dampen vibration and protect the

wheel from wear.

Driving characteristics

Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-

ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre

pressure and speed rating are important for

how the car performs.

Tyre age

All tyres older than 6 years old should be

checked by an expert even if they seem

undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even

if they are hardly ever or never used. The

function can therefore be affected. This

applies to all tyres that are stored for future

use. Examples of external signs which indi-

cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are

cracks or discoloration.

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they

begin to harden at the same time as the fric-

tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri-

orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh

tyres as possible when you replace them.

This is especially important with regard to

winter tyres. The last four digits in the

sequence mean the week and year of manu-

facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking

(Department of Transportation), and this is

stated with four digits, for example 1510. The

tyre in the figure was manufactured in week

15 of 2010.

Summer and winter wheels

When summer and winter wheels are

changed the wheels should be marked with

which side of the car they were mounted on,

for example L for left and R for right.

Wear and maintenance

Correct tyre pressure (p. 306) results in more

even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli-

mate and road condition affect how quickly

your tyres age and wear.

To avoid differences in tread depth and to

prevent wear patterns arising, the front and

rear wheels can be switched with each other.

A suitable distance for the first change is

approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km inter-

vals.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo

workshop is contacted for checking if you are

uncertain about tread depth. If significant dif-

ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread

depth) between tyres have already occurred,

then the least worn tyres must always be fit-

ted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier

to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car

continuing forwards in a straight line rather

than having the rear end skidding to one side,

resulting in possible complete loss of control

over the car. This is why it is important for the

rear wheels never to lose grip before the front

wheels.

WARNING

A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control

over the car.

09 Wheels and tyres

305

Storage

Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying

down or hanging up - never standing up.

Related information

•

Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)

•

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 309)

•

Tyres - load index (p. 309)

•

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 305)

•

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 306)

Tyres - direction of rotation

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed

to only turn in one direction have the direction

of rotation marked with an arrow.

G021778

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same

direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should

only be switched between front and rear

positions, never between left and right-hand

sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted

incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics

and capacity to force rain and slush out of the

way are adversely affected. Tyres with the

greatest tread depth should always be fitted

to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of

skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have

the same type and dimension, and also the

same make.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures

specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 404).

Related information

•

Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)

•

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 309)

•

Tyres - load index (p. 309)

•

Tyres - maintenance (p. 304)

•

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 306)

09 Wheels and tyres

306

Tyres - tread wear indicators

Tread wear indicators show the status of the

tyre's tread depth.

G021829

Tread wear indicators.

A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation

across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's

tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the

letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the

tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the

tread will be level in height with the tread

wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon

as possible. Remember that tyres with little

tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and

snow.

Related information

•

Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)

•

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 309)

•

Tyres - load index (p. 309)

•

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 305)

•

Tyres - maintenance (p. 304)

Tyres - air pressure

Tyres can have different air pressures which

are measured in bar.

Check the air pressure in the tyres

The tyre pressures must be checked every

month.

This also applies to the car's spare wheel.

09 Wheels and tyres

307

•

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended

tyre dimension.

•

ECO pressure

•

Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).

Check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. "Cold

tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature. After several

few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up

and the pressure increases.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-

sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs

the car's driving characteristics. Driving on

tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could

result in the tyres overheating and being

damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling

comfort, road noise and driving characteris-

tics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is

a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also

varies depending on ambient temperature.

Tyre pressure label

G021830

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side

door pillar (between frame and rear door)

shows which pressures the tyres should have

at different loads and speed conditions. This

is also specified in the tyre pressure table,

see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 404).

Fuel economy, ECO pressure

In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at

speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is

recommended (applies to both full and light

load), see Tyres - approved tyre pressures

(p. 404).

Related information

•

Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)

•

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 309)

•

Tyres - load index (p. 309)

•

Tyres - maintenance (p. 304)

•

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 306)

ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

09 Wheels and tyres

308

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions

Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in

accordance with the examples in the table

below.

The car has an approval for the complete

vehicle. This means that certain combinations

of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.

Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen-

sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.

7 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

16 Rim diameter in inches

50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel

centre to wheel contact surface

against the hub)

Related information

•

Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)

•

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 404)

Tyres - dimensions

The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see

the examples in the table below.

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.

Example of designation: 225/50R17 98W.

225 Tyre width (mm)

50 Ratio between tyre wall height and

tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

17 Rim diameter in inches (")

98 Codes for the maximum permitted

tyre load, tyre load index (LI)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted

speed, speed rating (SS). (In this

case 270 km/h.)

The car has an approval for the complete

vehicle with certain combinations of wheel

rims and tyres.

WARNING

19-inch wheels must never be used on

cars that are not equipped with the R-

Design or Sport chassis options. The use

of 19-inch wheels on cars with standard

chassis constitutes a safety risk, with a

risk of vehicle damage, and it impairs the

car's driving characteristics.

Related information

•

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 309)

•

Tyres - load index (p. 309)

•

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 305)

•

Tyres - maintenance (p. 304)

•

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 404)

•

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 308)

09 Wheels and tyres
09
309
Tyres - load index
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
certain load.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter-
mines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Minimum permissible index is indicated in the
load index table.
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)
•
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 404)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 309)
•
Tyres - maintenance (p. 304)
Tyres - speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed and therefore belongs to a particular
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond
with the car's top speed. The table below
indicates the maximum permitted speed that
applies for each speed rating (SS). The only
exception to these regulations is the winter
tyre (p. 310)
2
, where a lower speed rating
may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car
must not be driven faster than the speed rat-
ing of the tyre (for example, class Q can be
driven at a maximum of 160 km/h). Traffic
regulations determine how fast a car can be
driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is speci-
fied in the table.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which
have the same or a higher load index
(p. 309) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than
specified. If a tyre with too low a load
index or speed rating is used, it may over-
heat.
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 309)
•
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 305)
2
Both those with metal studs and those without.

09 Wheels and tyres

310

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at

the hubs and are available in different ver-

sions.

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140

Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts

and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved

by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-

sories. Check the torque with a torque

wrench.

Locking wheel bolts*

Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both

aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo

area floor there is space for the sleeve for the

lockable wheel bolts.

Related information

•

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 308)

Winter tyres

Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for

winter road conditions.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu-

lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend-

ent on engine variant. When driving on winter

tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted

to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a

Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and

tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres

Studded winter tyres should be run in gently

for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly

into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-

cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded

tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-

peratures place considerably higher demands

on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo

therefore recommends not to drive on winter

tyres that have a tread depth of less than

4 mm.

Using snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the front

wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow

chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this

wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-

lent chains designed for the car model,

and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event

of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you

consult an authorised Volvo workshop.

The wrong snow chains may cause serious

damage to your car and lead to an acci-

dent.

Related information

•

Changing wheels - removing wheels

(p. 311)

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

311

Changing wheels - removing wheels

The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. win-

ter wheels/winter tyres.

Spare wheel*

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only

intended for use temporarily and must be

replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as

possible. The car's handling may be altered

by the use of the spare wheel. The spare

wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The

car's ground clearance is affected accord-

ingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not

machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is

fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow

chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive

cars the drive on the rear axle can be discon-

nected. The spare wheel must not be

repaired.

The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel

is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 404).

IMPORTANT

•

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a

spare wheel on the car.

•

The car must never be driven fitted

with more than one "Temporary

Spare" wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

well with the outside down. The same bolt

runs through to secure the spare wheel and

the foam block. The foam block contains all

the tools needed to change the wheels.

Taking out the spare wheel under the

cargo area floor

1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear

and forwards.

2. Undo the retaining screw.

3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

Removing

Set up warning triangle (p. 314) if a wheel is

replaced in trafficked location. The car and

jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.

1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 281) and

engage reverse gear, or position P if the

car has an automatic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that

the threads are thoroughly lubricated and

that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack*

that belongs to the car model in question,

which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maxi-

mum lift capacity at a specified minimum

lifting height.

2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench*,

removal tool for wheel covers* and the

plastic wheel bolt cap removal tool. They

will be found in the foam block. If another

jack is selected, see Raising the car

(p. 340).

09 Wheels and tyres

312

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel

bolts.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels which will remain on the ground to

prevent them from rolling. Use heavy

wooden blocks or large stones for exam-

ple.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable

wheel covers. Use the removal tool to

hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel

covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers

can be pulled away by hand.

5. Screw together the towing eye with the

wheel wrench* to the stop position.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed all the

way into the wheel bolt wrench.

6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel

bolts with the intended tool.

7. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anti-

clockwise with the wheel wrench.

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

313

WARNING

Never position anything between the

ground and the jack, nor between the jack

and the car's jacking point.

8. There are two jacking points on each side

of the car. Wind up the jack so that the

flange in the bodywork ends up in the

notch in the head of the jack.

G017465

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and

level.

9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the

wheel.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised

on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is

raised on the jack. If a wheel must be

changed in a trafficked environment, pas-

sengers must stand in a safe place.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for

occasional, short-term use, such as when

changing a wheel after a puncture, chang-

ing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the

jack for the specific car model may be

used to raise the car. If the car is to be

jacked up more often, or for a longer time

than is required just to change a wheel,

use of a garage jack is recommended. In

this instance, follow the instructions for

use that come with the equipment.

Related information

•

Changing wheels - fitting (p. 313)

•

Jack* (p. 315)

•

Warning triangle (p. 314)

•

Wheel bolts (p. 310)

Changing wheels - fitting

It is important that the procedure for fitting

the wheel is carried out correctly.

Installation

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised

on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is

raised on the jack. If a wheel must be

changed in a trafficked environment, pas-

sengers must stand in a safe place.

1. Clean the contact surfaces between

wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts

thoroughly.

||
09 Wheels and tyres
09
314
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
6. Refit any full wheel covers.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must
be positioned over the valve on the wheel
rim during fitting.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Applies to cars with tyre pressure monitor-
ing
3
: Contact an authorised Volvo workshop
for updating the software at each change of
tyre dimension. A software download may be
necessary both when changing to larger and
smaller dimensions, and also when switching
between summer and winter wheels.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 311)
•
Jack* (p. 315)
•
Warning triangle (p. 314)
•
Wheel bolts (p. 310)
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is used to warn other
road users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up
3
Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

315

The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of

the boot lid with two clips.

Detach the warning triangle case by pull-

ing both of the snap latches outwards.

Take the warning triangle from the case,

fold out and assemble the two loose

sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support

legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warn-

ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a

suitable place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are

properly secured in the cargo area after use.

Tools

Amongst other things, the car contains towing

eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.

Located under the cargo area floor are the

car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.

There is also space here for the sleeve for the

locking wheel bolts and tools for the plastic

wheel bolt caps.

Related information

•

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)

•

Towing eye (p. 301)

•

Changing wheels - removing wheels

(p. 311)

•

Wheel bolts (p. 310)

•

Jack* (p. 315)

Jack*

A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when

changing the tyres.

The original jack should only be used for

changing to the spare wheel. The jack's

thread must always be well greased.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for

occasional, short-term use, such as when

changing a wheel after a puncture, chang-

ing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the

jack for the specific car model may be

used to raise the car. If the car is to be

jacked up more often, or for a longer time

than is required just to change a wheel,

use of a garage jack is recommended. In

this instance, follow the instructions for

use that come with the equipment.

Tools - returning into place

||
09 Wheels and tyres
09
316
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced
in the reverse order to taking out. Note that
there is an arrow on the upper foam block. It
must point forwards in the car.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Related information
•
Warning triangle (p. 314)
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)
First aid kit*
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
A case with first aid equipment is located in
the cargo area.
Tyre pressure monitoring*
4
Tyre pressure monitoring warns the driver
when the pressure is too low in one or more
of the car's tyres. For certain markets the tyre
pressure monitoring is standard in accord-
ance with legal requirements.
There are two systems for tyre pressure
monitoring, TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System) and TM (Tyre Monitor). In the event
of uncertainty about which system the car
has, open the menu system MY CAR and
search for the car's settings:
•
The 
Tyre pressure menu is used if it is
TPMS, see Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem (TPMS)* - general (p. 317)
•
The 
Tyre monitoring menu is used if it is
TM, see Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)*
(p. 322).
The system does not replace normal tyre
maintenance.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*
- general (p. 317)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - adjust
(recalibration) (p. 318)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti-
fying low tyre pressure (p. 321)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti-
vate/deactivate (p. 320)
4
Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
317
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec-
ommendations (p. 320)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - drive-
able punctured tyres* (p. 321)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
12
 - general
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
driver when the pressure is too low in one or
more of the car's tyres.
Tyre pressure monitoring uses sensors
located inside the air valve in each wheel.
When the car is driven at about 30 km/h the
system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-
sure is too low then a warning lamp 
 illumi-
nates in the combined instrument panel and
one of the following messages is shown:
•
Tyre pressure low Check front right
tyre
•
Tyre pressure low Check front left
tyre
•
Tyre pressure low Check rear right
tyre
•
Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check front right
tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check front left
tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check rear right
tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check rear left
tyre
•
Tyre pressure system Service
required
Both factory-fitted and optional wheels can
be equipped with TPMS sensors in the
valves.
If wheels without TPMS sensors are used or if
a sensor has failed then 
Tyre pressure
system Service required will be shown.
Always check the system after changing a
wheel in order to ensure that replacement
wheels work with the system.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,
see Tyres - air pressure (p. 306).
The system does not replace normal tyre
maintenance.
IMPORTANT
If a fault occurs in the TPMS system the
warning lamp 
 in the combined instru-
ment panel will flash for approx. 1 minute
and then illuminate with a constant glow. A
message is also shown in the combined
instrument panel.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - adjust
(recalibration) (p. 318)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti-
fying low tyre pressure (p. 321)
12
Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
09
318
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti-
vate/deactivate (p. 320)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec-
ommendations (p. 320)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - drive-
able punctured tyres* (p. 321)
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*
19
 -
adjust (recalibration)
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
driver when the pressure is too low in one or
more of the car's tyres.
TPMS can be adjusted in order to follow Vol-
vo's tyre pressure recommendations (p. 306),
such as when driving with a heavy load, for
example.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibra-
tion is started.
Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 110).
1. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label
on the driver's side door pillar (between
front and rear doors).
2. Start the engine.
3. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
the menus for tyre pressure.
4.
Select 
Calibrate tyre pressure and
press OK.
5. Drive for at least 10 minutes at a speed of
at least 30 km/h.
> Calibration is performed automatically
following initialisation by the driver.
The system provides no confirmation
when the calibration is complete.
The new reference values apply until steps
1-5 are carried out again.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 316)
•
Tyres - air pressure (p. 306)
19
Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

319

Tyre pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)*

- status

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the

driver when the pressure is too low in one or

more of the car's tyres.

System and tyre status

The current status of the system and the tyres

can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 110).

1. Select the menu system MY CAR to open

the menus for tyre monitoring.

Select

Tyre pressure.

The status is colour-coded for each tyre in

accordance with the following:

•

All-green: the system is operating nor-

mally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is

slightly above the recommended level.

•

Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pres-

sure is too low.

•

Red wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure

is very low.

•

All wheels grey: the system is temporarily

unavailable. It may be necessary to drive

the car for a few minutes at a speed

above 30 km/h before the system

becomes active again.

•

All wheels grey and the message

Tyre

pressure system Service required: an

error has occurred in the system. Contact

a Volvo dealer or workshop.

Clearing warning messages

If a tyre pressure message has been shown

and the TPMS warning lamp has been illumi-

nated:

1. Check the tyre pressure on the indicated

tyre/tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.

2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pres-

sure in accordance with the tyre pressure

label on the driver's side door pillar

(between front and rear doors).

3. In some cases it may be necessary to

drive the car for a few minutes at a speed

above 30 km/h in order to clear the warn-

ing text. At which point, the TPMS warn-

ing lamp is extinguished as well.

NOTE

•

The TPMS system uses a so-called

compensated pressure value, based

on both tyre temperature and ambient

temperature. This means that the tyre

pressure may differ slightly from the

recommended pressures listed on the

tyre pressure label on the driver's side

door pillar (between front and rear

doors). For this reason, it may be nec-

essary to inflate the tyres to a slightly

higher pressure in order to clear a low

tyre pressure message.

•

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the

pressure should be checked on cold

tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are

the same temperature as the ambient

temperature (approx. 3 hours after the

car has been driven). After a few kilo-

metres of driving, the tyres warm up

and the pressure increases.

WARNING

•

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to

tyre failure, which could result in the

driver losing control of the car.

•

The system cannot indicate sudden

tyre damage in advance.

Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres

320

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*

activate/deactivate

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the

driver when the pressure is too low in one or

more of the car's tyres.

NOTE

The car must be stationary when the tyre

pressure monitoring is activated/deacti-

vated.

Settings are made using the centre console's

controls, see MY CAR (p. 110).

1. Start the engine.

2. Select the menu system MY CAR to open

the menus for tyre pressure.

Select

Tyre pressure and press OK.

X is shown in the information dis-

play if the system is activated, the

option disappears if the system is

deactivated.

Related information

•

Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 316)

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*

recommendations

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the

driver when the pressure is too low in one or

more of the car's tyres.

•

Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors

are fitted to all wheels on the car, includ-

ing winter wheels.

•

Volvo recommends that sensors are not

moved between different wheels.

•

The spare wheel is not equipped a with

TPMS sensor.

•

If the spare wheel or a wheel without a

TPMS sensor is used, the error message

Tyre pressure system Service

required will be shown in the combined

instrument panel.

•

If a wheel has been changed, or if the

TPMS sensor has been moved to another

wheel then the seal, nut and valve core

must be replaced.

•

When TPMS sensors are installed, the car

should be switched off for at least 15

minutes otherwise an error message will

be shown in the combined instrument

panel.

WARNING

When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS,

hold the nozzle of the pump directly

against the valve to avoid damaging the

valve.

NOTE

•

After a tyre has been inflated, always

refit the dust cap in order to avoid

damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,

etc.

•

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust

caps can rust and become difficult to

unscrew.

NOTE

If you want to change the tyre dimension

then the TPMS system must be reconfig-

ured. For further information - contact a

Volvo dealer.

Related information

•

Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 316)

Standard in certain markets.

Only in certain markets.

Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

321

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*

driveable punctured tyres*

If SST (Self Supporting run flat Tires)* is

selected, the car is also equipped with TPMS

(p. 316).

This type of tyre has a specially reinforced

side wall that makes continued driving possi-

ble to a limited extent despite the tyre losing

all or some of its pressure. These tyres are fit-

ted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can also

be fitted to this rim.)

If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the

yellow TPMS lamp in the combined instru-

ment panel illuminates and a message is

shown in the information display. If this

occurs, reduce speed to max. 80 km/h. The

tyre must be replaced as soon as possible.

Drive carefully, in some cases it can be diffi-

cult to see which tyre is faulty. In order to

establish which tyre needs attention, check

all four tyres.

WARNING

Only people with knowledge of SST tyres

should fit them.

SST tyres must only be fitted together with

TPMS.

After an error message about low tyre

pressure has been shown, do not drive

faster than 80 km/h.

Maximum mileage before tyre replacement

is 80 km.

Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking

or turning.

SST tyres must be replaced if they are

damaged or punctured.

Related information

•

Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 316)

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*

rectifying low tyre pressure

The tyre pressure monitoring system TPMS

(Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)

warns

the driver when the pressure is too low in one

or more of the car's tyres and indicates the

tyre to which it applies.

Yellow is shown at the first indication of low

tyre pressure, stop and check the tyre pres-

sure as soon as possible.

Red indicates a much lower pressure than

recommended, stop and rectify the tyre pres-

sure immediately.

If a message for low tyre pressure is shown in

the display:

1. Check the tyre pressure on the tyre in

question.

2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.

3. Drive at least at 30 km/h for several

minutes and check that the message dis-

appears.

Related information

•

Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 316)

Standard in certain markets.

Option only in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres

322

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)*

The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses the

rotation speed of the tyres in order to deter-

mine whether they have the correct tyre pres-

sure. If the pressure is too low, the tyre's

diameter is changed and, as a result, so is the

rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with

each other the system can determine whether

one or more tyres have pressure that is too

low.

Messages

If the tyre pressure is too low then a warning

lamp (

) illuminates in the combined instru-

ment panel and one of the following mes-

sages is shown:

•

Tyre pressure low Check front right

tyre

•

Tyre pressure low Check front left

tyre

•

Tyre pressure low Check rear right

tyre

•

Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre

•

Tyre pressure low Check tyres

•

Tyre pressure system Service

required

•

The tyre pressure system is currently

not active

IMPORTANT

If a fault occurs in the TM system the

warning lamp

in the combined instru-

ment panel will flash for approx. 1 minute

and then illuminate with a constant glow. A

message is also shown in the combined

instrument panel.

The system does not replace normal tyre

maintenance.

TM calibration

In order for TM to work correctly, a reference

value for the tyre pressure must be deter-

mined. This must be performed each time the

tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is

changed.

Recalibration

Settings are made using the centre console's

controls, see MY CAR (p. 110).

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in

accordance with the tyre pressure label

on the driver's side door pillar (between

front and rear doors) and select key posi-

tion II, see Key positions - functions at

different levels (p. 75).

3. Select the menu system MY CAR to open

the menus for tyre monitoring.

Select

Calibrate tyre pressure and

press OK.

5. Start and drive the car.

> Recalibration is carried out while the

car is being driven and can be inter-

rupted at any time. If the engine is

switched off while recalibration is in

progress then it is resumed when the

car is driven again. The system pro-

vides no confirmation when the cali-

bration is complete.

The new reference value applies until steps

1-5 are repeated.

NOTE

Remember that the TM system must be

recalibrated at each tyre change or if the

tyre pressure is changed. If new reference

values are not stored then the system can-

not function properly.

NOTE

•

After a tyre has been inflated, always

refit the dust cap in order to avoid

damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,

etc.

•

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust

caps can rust and become difficult to

unscrew.

Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

323

System and tyre status

The current status of the system and the tyres

can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 110).

1. Select the menu system MY CAR to open

the menus for tyre monitoring.

Select

Tyre monitoring.

The status is colour-coded for each tyre in

accordance with the following:

•

All-green: the system is operating nor-

mally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is

slightly above the recommended level.

•

Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pres-

sure is too low.

•

All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have

pressure that is too low.

•

All wheels grey and the message

The

tyre pressure system is currently not

active: the tyre pressure system is tem-

porarily deactivated. It may be necessary

to drive the car for a short time above 30

km/h before the system becomes active

again.

•

All wheels grey and the message

Tyre

pressure system Service required: an

error has occurred in the system. Contact

a Volvo dealer or workshop.

Clearing warning messages

If a tyre pressure message has been shown

and the TM warning lamp has been illumi-

nated:

1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a

tyre pressure gauge.

2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pres-

sure in accordance with the tyre pressure

label on the driver's side door pillar

(between front and rear doors).

3. Recalibrate the TM system.

NOTE

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pres-

sure should be checked on cold tyres.

"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same

temperature as the ambient temperature

(approx. 3 hours after the car has been

driven). After a few kilometres of driving,

the tyres warm up and the pressure

increases.

WARNING

•

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to

tyre failure, which could result in the

driver losing control of the car.

•

The system cannot indicate sudden

tyre damage in advance.

Emergency puncture repair*

The emergency puncture repair kit,

Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal

a puncture and check and adjust the tyre

pressure (p. 404).

The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 325)

consists of a compressor and a bottle of seal-

ant. The sealing works as a temporary repair.

The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced

before its expiration date and after use. The

sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured

in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only

intended for sealing tyres with a puncture

in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited

capacity to seal tyres which have punctures

in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emer-

gency puncture repair kit if they have larger

slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the

compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets.

Choose the socket that is nearest to the

punctured tyre.

||
09 Wheels and tyres
09
324
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
If the compressor is connected to one of
the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel con-
sole, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 325)
•
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 327)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 325)
•
Tools (p. 315)
Emergency puncture repair kit* -
location
The emergency puncture repair kit,
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal
a puncture and check and adjust the tyre
pressure.
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
under the floor in the cargo area.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets (p. 150) in the tunnel console then no
other current consumer may be connected
to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 325)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant
(p. 329)
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

325

Emergency puncture repair kit* -

overview

Overview of the component parts of the

emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary

Mobility Kit (TMK).

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Related information

•

Emergency puncture repair kit* - location

(p. 324)

•

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant

(p. 329)

•

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)

Emergency puncture repair* -

operation

Sealing a puncture with the emergency punc-

ture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

Emergency puncture repair

For information on the function of the parts, see

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview

(p. 325).

09 Wheels and tyres

326

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate

the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being

sealed in a trafficked location.

If the puncture was caused by a nail or

similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It

helps to seal the hole.

2. Detach the label for maximum permitted

speed (which is fitted on one side of the

compressor) and affix it to the steering

wheel.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h

after the emergency tyre repair kit has

been used. Volvo recommends that you

visit an authorised Volvo workshop for

inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum

driving distance is 200 km). The staff there

can determine whether or not the tyre can

be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the

case of contact with skin, wash away the

fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use.

The seal is broken automatically when the

bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle's stopper.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped

with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

6. Connect the hose from the compressor to

the valve.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and

start the car.

NOTE

If the compressor is connected to one of

the two 12 V sockets in the tunnel console

then no other current consumer may be

connected to the other one.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without

supervision when the engine is running.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the

compressor is running. If cracks or

unevenness arise then the compressor

must be switched off immediately. The

journey should not be continued. Contact-

ing an authorised tyre centre is recom-

mended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure

can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure

drops after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must

not run for more than 10 minutes.

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

327

10. Switch off the compressor to check the

pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini-

mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum

3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure

reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too

high.)

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the

hole in the tyre is too big. The journey

should not be continued. Contacting an

authorised tyre centre is recommended.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the

cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and

fit the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately

3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so

that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

NOTE

Sealant will spurt out of the puncture dur-

ing the first few rotations of the tyre.

WARNING

Make sure that nobody is standing near

the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed

onto them when the car is driven away.

The distance should be at least two

metres.

Related information

•

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)

•

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking

(p. 327)

•

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview

(p. 325)

Emergency puncture repair* -

rechecking

When a tyre has been sealed with the emer-

gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility

Kit (TMK), a subsequent check must be made

after approx. 3 kilometres of driving.

Check tyre pressure

1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure

gauge.

•

If it is below 1.3 bar

then the tyre is

insufficiently sealed. The journey

should not be continued. Contact a

tyre centre.

•

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3

bar

, the tyre must be inflated to the

pressure specified in accordance with

the tyre pressure table, see Tyres -

approved tyre pressures (p. 404).

Release air using the pressure reduc-

ing valve if the tyre pressure is too

high.

1 bar = 100 kPa.

||
09 Wheels and tyres
09
328
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable.
Fit the valve cap.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to
the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for
the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends a visit to
an authorised Volvo workshop for inspec-
tion of the sealed tyre (maximum driving
distance is 200 km). The staff there can
determine whether or not the tyre can be
repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)
•
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 325)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 325)
Emergency puncture repair kit* -
inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
the compressor in the emergency puncture
repair kit (p. 325).
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.

09 Wheels and tyres
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
329
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see Tyres - approved tyre pressures
(p. 404). Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 325)
•
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 327)
Emergency puncture repair kit* -
sealant
The container (bottle) with the emergency
puncture repair kit (p. 325) contains sealant
and it can be replaced.
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu-
ral rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)

09 Wheels and tyres

330

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Type approval - tyre pressure

monitoring (TPMS)

Type approval of the sensors in tyre pressure

monitoring - TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System)* can be read in the table.

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

331

Country/Area

Brazil

Ukraine

09 Wheels and tyres

332

Country/Area

Israel

09 Wheels and tyres

}}

333

Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)

Country/

Area

Countries in

the EU:

Exporting country: Germany

Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH

Type of equipment: TPMS unit

09 Wheels and tyres

334

Country/

Area

Czech Repub-

lic:

Continental tímto prohlašuje, že tento Radio Transmitter je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými

ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Denmark: Undertegnede Continental erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radio Transmitter overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige

relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Germany: Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass sich das Gerät Radio Transmitter in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen

und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Continental seadme Radio Transmitter vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud

direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

UK Hereby, Continental declares that this Radio Transmitter is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant

provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Spain: Por medio de la presente Continental declara que el Radio Transmitter cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera

otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Greece: ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΣΑ Continental ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Radio Transmitter ΣΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΑ ΠΡΟΣ Σ ΟΣΩΕΣ ΑΠΑΗΣΕΣ Α

Σ ΛΟΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΕΣ ΑΑΞΕΣ ΗΣ ΟΗΑΣ 1999/5/Ε.

France: Par la présente Continental déclare que l'appareil Radio Transmitter est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres

dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Italy: Con la presente Continental dichiara che questo Radio Transmitter è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni

pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latvia: Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka Radio Transmitter atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem

noteikumiem.

Lithuania: Šiuo Continental deklaruoja, kad šis Radio Transmitter atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

Netherlands: Hierbij verklaart Continental dat het toestel Radio Transmitter in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere

relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

09 Wheels and tyres

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

335

Country/

Area

Malta: Hawnhekk, Continental, jiddikjara li dan Radio Transmitter jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn

relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Hungary: Alulírott, Continental nyilatkozom, hogy a Radio Transmitter megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az

1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Poland: Niniejszym Continental oświadcza, że Radio Transmitter jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi

postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Portugal: Continental declara que este Radio Transmitter está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva

1999/5/CE.

Slovenia: Continental izjavlja, da je ta Radio Transmitter v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive

1999/5/ES.

Slovakia: Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že Radio Transmitter spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice

1999/5/ES.

Finland: Continental vakuuttaa täten että Radio Transmitter tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä

koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Sweden: Härmed intygar Continental att denna Radio Transmitter står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga

relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Iceland: Hér með lýsir Continental yfir því að Radio Transmitter er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun

1999/5/EC.

Norway: Continental erklærer herved at utstyret Radio Transmitter er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i

direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Related information

•

Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 316)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

10 Maintenance and service

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

337

Volvo service programme

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-

ble, follow the Volvo service programme as

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised

Volvo workshop to perform the service and

maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the

personnel, special tools and service literature

to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and

follow the instructions in the Service and

Warranty Booklet.

Related information

•

Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 351)

Book service and repair*

Manage service, repair and booking informa-

tion directly in your Internet-connected car.

This service

provides a convenient way to

book a service and workshop visit directly in

the car. Car information is sent to your dealer,

who can prepare the workshop visit. The

dealer will contact you to schedule an

appointment time. For certain markets, the

system reminds you of a scheduled appoint-

ment time as it approaches and the naviga-

tion system

can also guide you to the work-

shop when the time comes.

Before the service can be used

Volvo ID and my profile

•

and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo

ID (p. 21).

•

to your profile and carry out the following:

1. Check that the car is connected to your

profile.

2. Check that your contact information is

correct.

3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to con-

tact for service and repair.

4. Choose preferred communication chan-

nel (phone). Booking information is

always sent to the car and to you via

email.

Prerequisite for booking from car

•

To send and receive booking information

from and to the car, the car must be con-

nected to the Internet, see the Sensus

Infotainment supplement for information

about how to connect the car to the Inter-

net.

•

Since the booking information is sent

over your private phone subscription, you

will be asked whether you want to send

the information. The question is asked

once and then applies to the selected

connection for a limited time.

•

For the service to work and for the sys-

tem to communicate via the car's screen,

notifications/pop-up messages must be

accepted. In the normal view for the MY

CAR source, press OK/MENU and then

Service & repair Display

notifications

Using the service

All menus and settings are accessed from the

normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/

MENU and then

Service & repair.

When it is time for service, and in some cases

when the car is in need of repair, this is noti-

Applies to certain markets.

Applies to Sensus Navigation.

10 Maintenance and service

338

fied in the combined instrument panel (p. 60)

and via a pop-up menu in the screen.

Service message in the screen.

Meaning of the answer options in the

screen's pop-up menu:

•

Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your

dealer who then comes back with a

booking proposal. The service lamp and

service message in the combined instru-

ment panel are extinguished.

•

No - No more pop-up messages will be

shown in the screen. The message in the

combined instrument panel remains. After

this option has been selected, it is possi-

ble to start the manual booking in the car,

see below.

•

Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown

the next time the car is started.

Book a service or repair manually

1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre

console and select

Service & repair

Dealer information Request service

or repair

> Vehicle data is sent automatically to

your dealer.

2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to

the car.

3. Accept or request a new booking pro-

posal.

After the booking has been accepted the

booking information is stored in the car, see

My bookings. The car will automatically com-

municate with you via the screen by means of

reminders about the booking and guide you

to the workshop visit.

You can also book a workshop visit via My

Volvo. Go to "My bookings" and select

"Update" in order to gain access to bookings

from My Volvo.

My bookings

Show booking information in the car's screen.

Accept or request a new booking proposal.

–

Select Service & repair My bookings.

Call the dealer

With a Bluetooth

phone connected to the

car, you can call your dealer. For connecting

the phone, see the Sensus Infotainment sup-

plement.

–

Select Service & repair Dealer

information

Call dealer.

Using the navigation system

Enter your workshop as destination or way-

point in the navigation system.

–

Select Service & repair Dealer

information

Set single destination.

–

Select Service & repair Dealer

information

Add as waypoint.

Sending vehicle data

Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo data-

base (not your dealer) from which Volvo deal-

ers can retrieve vehicle information using the

car's identification number (VIN

). The num-

ber is printed in the car's service and war-

ranty booklet, alternatively inside the wind-

screen's bottom left-hand corner.

–

Select Service & repair Send car

data

Applies to certain markets.

Applies to Sensus Navigation.

Vehicle Identification Number

10 Maintenance and service

339

Booking information and vehicle data

When you decide to book a service from your

car, the booking information and vehicle data

will be sent. Vehicle data information consists

of information within the following areas:

•

service requirement

•

function status

•

fluid levels

•

Meter reading

•

the car's vehicle identification number

(VIN

)

•

The car's software version.

Related information

•

Volvo ID (p. 21)

Vehicle Identification Number

10 Maintenance and service

340

Raising the car

When raising the car it is important that the

jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended

points on the car's underbody.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that

belongs to the car model in question. If a

jack is selected other than the one recom-

mended by Volvo, follow the instructions

supplied with the equipment.

10 Maintenance and service

341

Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).

If the car is raised with a front workshop jack

then this must be positioned under one of the

four lifting points furthest in under the car. If

the car is raised with a rear workshop jack

then it must be positioned under one of the

lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack

is positioned so that the car cannot slide off

the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop

lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be

positioned under the outer lifting points (jack-

ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting

points can be used at the front.

Related information

•

Changing wheels - removing wheels

(p. 311)

10 Maintenance and service

342

Bonnet - opening and closing

The bonnet can be opened when the handle

by the pedals has been pulled backward and

the lock by the radiator grille has been moved

to the left.

G010951

Pull the handle by the pedals. You will

hear when the catch releases.

Move the catch to the left and open the

bonnet. (The catch hook is located

between the headlamp and radiator grille,

see illustration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when

closed.

Related information

•

Engine compartment - checking (p. 343)

•

Engine compartment - overview (p. 342)

Engine compartment - overview

The overview shows some service-related

components.

Engine compartment 4-cyl.

The appearance of the engine compartment may

differ depending on engine variant.

Filling engine oil

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Radiator

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid

(located on the driver's side)

Starter battery

Relay and fuse box

Filling washer fluid

Air filter

10 Maintenance and service

343

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage

and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-

tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri-

cal system must always be in key position

0 when work is being performed in the

engine compartment; see Key positions -

functions at different levels (p. 75).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition

coil when the car's electrical system is in

key position II or when the engine is hot.

Engine compartment except 4-cyl.

G018945

The appearance of the engine compartment may

differ depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Filling engine oil

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid

(located on the driver's side)

Starter battery

Relay and fuse box

Filling washer fluid

Air filter

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage

and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-

tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri-

cal system must always be in key position

0 when work is being performed in the

engine compartment; see Key positions -

functions at different levels (p. 75).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition

coil when the car's electrical system is in

key position II or when the engine is hot.

Related information

•

Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 342)

•

Engine compartment - checking (p. 343)

Engine compartment - checking

Some oils and fluids should be checked at

regular intervals.

Regular checking

Check the following oils and fluids at regular

intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

•

Coolant

•

Engine oil

•

Power steering fluid

•

Washer fluid

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located at

the front of the engine compartment,

behind the radiator) may start automati-

cally some after the engine has been

switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a

workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop

is recommended. There is a risk of fire if

the engine is hot.

Related information

•

Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 342)

•

Engine compartment - overview (p. 342)

•

Coolant - level (p. 348)

•

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 345)

•

Power steering fluid - level (p. 350)

•

Washer fluid - filling (p. 360)

Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

10 Maintenance and service

344

Engine oil - general

An approved engine oil must be used in order

that the recommended service intervals can

be applied.

Volvo recommends:

When driving under adverse conditions, see

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 394).

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the

engine's service intervals all engines are

filled with a specially adapted synthetic

engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil

has been made very carefully with regard

to service life, starting characteristics, fuel

consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in

order that the recommended service inter-

vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed

grade of oil for both filling and oil change,

otherwise you will risk affecting service life,

starting characteristics, fuel consumption

and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-

ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed

grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are

carried out at an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of

low/high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain

engine variants have an oil pressure sensor,

and then the combined instrument panel's

warning symbol for low oil pressure is used.

Other variants have an oil level sensor, when

the driver is informed via the instrument's

warning symbol and display texts. Cer-

tain variants have both systems. Contact a

Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-

ance with the intervals specified in the Serv-

ice and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is

permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-

ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a

higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving

conditions (p. 394).

For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade

and volume (p. 395).

Related information

•

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 345)

10 Maintenance and service

}}

345

Engine oil - checking and filling

The oil level is detected on certain engine

variants with the electronic oil level sensor, on

other engine variants it is checked with the oil

dipstick.

Engine with oil dipstick

G021734

Dipstick and filler pipe.

Checking the oil level in a new car is espe-

cially important before the first scheduled oil

change.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level

every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure-

ments are made on a cold engine before star-

ting. The measurement will be inaccurate if

taken immediately after the engine is

switched off. The dipstick will indicate that

the level is too low because the oil has not

had time to flow down into the oil sump.

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

Measurement and filling if required

1. Ensure that the car is level. After switch-

ing off the engine it is important to wait

5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back

to the sump.

2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.

3. Re-insert the dipstick.

4. Pull it out and check the level.

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres

should be added. If the level is signifi-

cantly below, then an additional amount

is required.

6. If required, check the level again, do it

after driving a short distance. Then repeat

steps 1 - 4.

WARNING

Never fill above the MAX mark. The level

should never be above MAX or below MIN

as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-

fold due to the risk of fire.

Engine with electronic oil level sensor,

4-cyl.

Filler pipe

Does not apply to 4-cyl. engine or 5-cyl. diesel engine, which have electronic oil level sensor.

Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

||
10 Maintenance and service
10
346
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action needs to be taken on engine oil
level until a message is shown in the com-
bined instrument panel's display, see the fol-
lowing illustration.
Message and graphic in the display. The left-
hand display is shown in the digital combined
instrument panel and the right-hand in the ana-
logue.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation -
combined instrument panel (p. 107).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil
level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
If notified of low oil level, only fill with the
volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car
must have been driven approx. 30 km and
have been stationary for 5 minutes with the
engine switched off and on level ground
before the oil level indication is correct.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-
fold due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl.
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
following sequence.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 75).
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position 
Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu naviga-
tion, see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 107).
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level are not met (time after engine shut-
down, the car's inclination, outside tem-
perature, etc.) then the message 
Not
available will be shown. This does not
mean that there is something wrong in the
car's systems.

10 Maintenance and service

}}

347

Engine with electronic oil level sensor,

5-cyl. diesel

Filler pipe

No action needs to be taken on engine oil

level until a message is shown in the com-

bined instrument panel's display, see the fol-

lowing illustration.

Message and graphic in the display. The left-

hand display is shown in the digital combined

instrument panel and the right-hand in the ana-

logue.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic

oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the

engine is switched off, see Menu navigation -

combined instrument panel (p. 107).

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is

shown, visit a workshop - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil

level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level low

Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the system

during driving. The system cannot directly

detect changes when the oil is filled or

drained. The car must be driven

about 30 km before the oil level display is

correct.

WARNING

Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)

appears as shown in the illustration below.

The level must never be above MAX or

below MIN, as this could lead to engine

damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-

fold due to the risk of fire.

Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

10 Maintenance and service

348

Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel

If the oil level needs to be checked then it

should be carried out in accordance with the

following sequence.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions

- functions at different levels (p. 75).

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand

stalk switch to position

Oil level.

> You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

For more information on menu naviga-

tion, see Menu navigation - combined

instrument panel (p. 107).

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill

more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-

mended filling level is 4. Message and graphic in

the display. The left-hand display is shown in the

digital combined instrument panel and the right-

hand in the analogue.

Related information

•

Engine oil - general (p. 344)

Coolant - level

The coolant cools the internal combustion

engine to the correct operating temperature.

The heat that is transferred from the engine to

the coolant can be used to heat the passen-

ger compartment.

The coolant level must lie between the MIN

and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Checking the level and topping up

When topping up the coolant, follow the

instructions on the packaging. Never top up

with water only. The risk of freezing increases

with both too little and too much coolant con-

centrate.

10 Maintenance and service

}}

349

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant

requires topping up when the engine is at

operating temperature, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly to gently

release the overpressure.

For capacities and for standards regarding

water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol-

ume (p. 397).

Check the coolant regularly

The level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system is

not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could

occur, causing a risk of damage to the

engine.

IMPORTANT

•

A high content of chlorine, chlorides

and other salts may cause corrosion in

the cooling system.

•

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion

agent as recommended by Volvo.

•

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%

water and 50% coolant.

•

Mix the coolant with approved quality

tap water. In the event of any doubt

about water quality, used ready-mixed

coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-

ommendations.

•

When changing coolant/replacing

cooling system components, flush the

cooling system clean with approved

quality tap water or flush with ready-

mixed coolant.

•

The engine must only be run with a

well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,

temperatures that are too high may

occur resulting in the risk of damage

(cracks) in the cylinder head.

Brake and clutch fluid - level

Brake and clutch fluid level should be

between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.

Checking the level

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-

voir. The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks that are visible inside the reser-

voir. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at

every other regular service.

The fluid should be changed annually on cars

driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent

braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-

cal climates with high humidity.

For capacities and recommended brake fluid

grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume

(p. 399).

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in

the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-

ther before topping up the brake fluid.

Volvo recommends that the reason for the

loss of brake fluid is investigated by an

authorised Volvo workshop.

10 Maintenance and service

350

Filling

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.

The fluid reservoir is protected under the

cover over the cold zone in the engine com-

partment. The round cover must be removed

first before the reservoir cap can be reached.

Turn and open the cover located on the

covering.

Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the

fluid. The level must be between the MIN

and MAX marks, which are located on

the inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

Power steering fluid - level

The power steering fluid level must be

between the reservoir's MIN and MAX marks.

The fluid does not need to be changed.

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steering

fluid reservoir clean when checking. The

cover must not be opened.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The level must be between

the MIN and MAX marks.

For recommended fluid grade, see Power

steering fluid - grade (p. 399).

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steering

system, or if the engine is switched off and

must be towed, then the car can still be

steered.

10 Maintenance and service

}}

351

Climate control system - fault tracing

and repair

The air conditioning system must only be

serviced and repaired by an authorised work-

shop.

Fault tracing and repair

The air conditioning system contains fluores-

cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when

looking for leaks.

Volvo recommends that you contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pres-

surised refrigerant R134a. This system

must only be serviced and repaired by an

authorised workshop.

Related information

•

Volvo service programme (p. 337)

Lamp replacement - general

Lamp replacement can be carried out for

bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps,

please refer to a workshop.

The bulbs are specified (p. 357). The follow-

ing list contains locations of bulbs and other

light sources that are specialised, such as

LED

lamps, or are unsuitable for changing

for some other reason, except at a work-

shop

•

Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon

lamps)

•

Position/parking lamps front

•

Daytime running lights

•

Side direction indicators, door mirrors

•

Approach lighting, door mirrors

•

Interior lighting

•

Position/parking lamps rear

•

Side marker lamps rear

•

Brake light.

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, the

replacement of Xenon lamps must be car-

ried out at a workshop - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended. Working

with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau-

tion because the headlamp is equipped

with a high voltage unit.

WARNING

The car's electrical system must be in key

position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key

positions - functions at different levels

(p. 75).

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs

with your fingers. Grease from your fingers

is vaporised by the heat, coating the

reflector and then causing damage.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the bro-

ken bulb has been replaced then we rec-

ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo

workshop.

LED (Light Emitting Diode)

An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

10 Maintenance and service

352

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog

lamps and rear lamps may temporarily

have condensation on the inside of the

lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is

designed to withstand this. Condensation

is normally vented out of the lamp housing

when the lamp has been switched on for a

time.

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 352)

•

Lamp replacement - location of rear

lamps (p. 355)

•

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting

(p. 357)

•

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area

(p. 356)

•

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting

(p. 356)

Lamp replacement - headlamps

All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the

engine compartment. First loosen and remove

the whole headlamp.

Removing the headlamp

Set the car's electrical system in key position

0, see Key positions - functions at different

levels (p. 75).

Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.

Pull the headlamp straight forward.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the

connector.

G010325

Detach the headlamp connector by

pressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the connec-

tor with your other hand.

5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a

soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

6. Replace the bulb in question.

Securing the headlamp

1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound

should be heard.

2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.

Check that they are firmly inserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The headlamp must be mounted and the con-

nector firmly connected before the lighting is

switched on or the remote control key is

inserted into the ignition switch.

10 Maintenance and service

353

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

•

Lamp replacement - cover for main/

dipped beam bulbs (p. 353)

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/

dipped beam bulbs

Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by

releasing the headlamp's larger cover.

G021745

Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp

replacement - headlamps (p. 352).

1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.

2. Press down the clips on the cover and

remove it.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 352)

•

Lamp replacement - dipped beam

(p. 353)

•

Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 354)

•

Lamp replacement - extra main beam

(p. 354)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam

The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the

headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

G021746

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 352).

2. Remove the cover (p. 353).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder

downwards.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it

in. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

10 Maintenance and service

354

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lamp replacement - main beam

The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head-

lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

G021747

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 352).

2. Remove the cover (p. 353).

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise

and then pulling straight out.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket

and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It

can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamp replacement - extra main beam

The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the

headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.

G021748

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 352).

2. Remove the cover (p. 353).

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder

downwards.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it

in. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamp replacement - direction

indicators front

The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside

the headlamp's smaller cover.

G021750

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 352).

2. Remove the small round cover.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the

bulb.

4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new

one. It can only be installed in one way.

5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and

press until a clicking sound is heard.

6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and

pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

10 Maintenance and service

}}

355

Lamp replacement - rear lamp

Lamps in the rear lamp cluster are replaced

from inside the cargo area.

Lamp housing, rear

G021754

The bulbs in the rear light cluster are replaced

from inside the cargo area (not the LED

lamps).

1. Remove the covers in the left/right-hand

panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are

located in separate bulb holders.

2. Press the catches together and pull out

the bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Plug in the connector.

5. Press the bulb holder into place and refit

the cover.

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - location of rear

lamps (p. 355)

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamp replacement - location of rear

lamps

The overview shows the location of the lamps

at the rear.

Brake light (LED)

Reversing lamp (p. 355)

Fog lamp (p. 355)

Indicator (p. 355)

Position/parking lights (LED)

Side marker lamps (LED)

10 Maintenance and service

356

Rear lamp cluster bulb holder

Reversing lamp (p. 355)

Fog lamp (p. 355)

Indicator (p. 355)

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamp replacement - number plate

lighting

The number plate lighting is located under the

boot lid handle.

G021756

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing

and withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it

into place.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo

area

The cargo area lighting is positioned on both

sides of the boot lid opening.

G021758

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so

that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

back the lamp housing.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

10 Maintenance and service

}}

357

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror

lighting

The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the

lamp lenses.

Removal of lamp lens

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens

and gently prize up the lock lugs on the

edge.

2. Snap off the lamp lens.

3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb

straight out to the side and replace with a

new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with

the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could

then be crushed.

Attaching the lamp lens

1. Refit the lamp lens.

2. Press it into place.

Related information

•

Lamps - specifications (p. 357)

Lamps - specifications

The specifications apply to bulbs. When

replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer

to a workshop.

Lighting

Type

Dipped beam, hal-

ogen

55 H7 LL

Main beam, Halo-

gen

65 H9

Extra main beam,

ABL

55 H7 LL

Front direction

indicators

21 H21W LL

Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5

Length 43 mm

Vanity mirror light-

ing

2 T5 Socket

W2x4.6d

Cargo area light-

ing

5 Socket SV8.5

Length 38 mm

Number plate

lighting

5 C5W LL

Direction indica-

tors, rear

21 PY21W SV

10 Maintenance and service

358

Lighting

Type

Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 P21W LL

Watt

Related information

•

Lamp replacement - general (p. 351)

Wiper blades

The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv-

ice position when they are to be replaced.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper

blades (for scraping off ice from the wind-

screen, for example) they must be in service

position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the

service position, make sure that they are

not frozen down.

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch

and briefly press the

START/STOP ENGINE button to set the

car's electrical system to key position I.

For detailed information on key positions,

see Key positions - functions at different

levels (p. 75).

2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE

button again to set the car’s electrical

system in key position 0.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk

switch up and hold it in position for

approx. 1 second.

> The wipers then move to standing

straight up.

The wipers return to their starting position

when you briefly press the START/STOP

ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-

tem to key position I (or when the car is

started).

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have

been folded up from the windscreen, they

must be folded back down onto the wind-

screen before the wipers are allowed to

return to their starting position. This is to

avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Not necessary in cars with the Keyless function.

10 Maintenance and service

359

Replacing the wiper blades

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv-

ice position. Press the button located on

the wiper blade mounting and pull

straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"

is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the

windscreen.

The wipers return from service position to

their starting position when you briefly press

the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the

car’s electrical system to key position I (or

when the car is started).

G021763

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The

blade on the driver's side is longer than on

the passenger side.

Cleaning

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,

see Car wash (p. 380).

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected

maintenance shortens the service life of

the wiper blades.

Related information

•

Washer fluid - filling (p. 360)

10 Maintenance and service

360

Washer fluid - filling

Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head-

lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti-

freeze must be used when the temperature is

below freezing point.

Topping up the washer fluid takes place by

opening the blue cap.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share

a common reservoir.

NOTE

When there is approx. 1 litre of washer

fluid remaining in the reservoir, a message

to top up the washer fluid will be shown in

the combined instrument panel, together

with the symbol

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom-

mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur-

ing cold weather and below freezing point.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equiva-

lent with a recommended pH of between 6

and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with

neutral water).

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the

temperature is below freezing to avoid

freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

Volume:

•

Cars with headlamp washing: 6.5 litres.

•

Cars without headlamp washing: 4.5

litres.

Related information

•

Wiper blades (p. 358)

•

Wipers and washers (p. 98)

Starter battery - general

The starter battery is used to drive the starter

motor and other electrical equipment in the

car.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat-

tery.

The service life and function of the starter

battery is influenced by factors such as the

number of starts, discharging, driving style,

driving conditions, climatic conditions, etc.

•

Never disconnect the starter battery when

the engine is running.

•

Check that the cables to the starter bat-

tery are correctly connected and properly

tightened.

Engine

Petrol Diesel

Voltage (V) 12 12

Cold start capacity

- CCA

(A)

520–800 700–800

In accordance with SAE or EN standard.

Cold Cranking Amperes.

10 Maintenance and service

}}

361

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery, in cars

with Start/Stop function, a battery of the

correct type must be fitted, EFB

in cars

with manual gearbox and AGM

in cars

with automatic gearbox.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure

you replace it with a battery with the same

cold starting capacity and type as the orig-

inal battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

•

The starter battery's container size

should be consistent with the original

battery's dimensions.

•

The starter battery's height is different

depending on size.

WARNING

•

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen

gas, which is highly explosive. A spark

can be formed if a jump lead is con-

nected incorrectly, and this can be

enough for the battery to explode.

•

The battery contains sulphuric acid,

which can cause serious burns.

•

If sulphuric acid comes into contact

with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with

large quantities of water. If acid

splashes into the eyes - seek medical

attention immediately.

IMPORTANT

When charging the starter battery or the

support battery (p. 364), only use a mod-

ern battery charger with controlled charg-

ing voltage. Fast charging function must

not be used since it may damage the bat-

tery.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed

then the energy saving function for info-

tainment system may be temporarily dis-

engaged, and/or the message in the com-

bined instrument panel's information dis-

play about the starter battery's state of

charge may be temporarily inapplicable,

following the connection of an external

starter battery or battery charger:

•

The negative battery terminal on the

car's starter battery must never be

used for connecting an external starter

battery or battery charger - only the

car chassis may be used as the

grounding point.

See Jump starting with battery (p. 258) for

a description of how the cable clamps

must be attached.

Enhanced Flooded Battery.

Absorbed Glass Mat.

10 Maintenance and service

362

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it

becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several

factors, including driving conditions and

climate. Battery starting capacity decrea-

ses gradually with time and therefore

needs to be recharged if the car is not

used for a longer time or when it is only

driven short distances. Extreme cold fur-

ther limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition,

at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec-

ommended or that the battery is con-

nected to a battery charger with automatic

trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a

maximum service life.

Related information

•

Battery - symbols (p. 362)

•

Starter battery - replacement (p. 363)

•

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 364)

Battery - symbols

There are information and warning symbols

on the batteries.

Symbols on the batteries

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the

owner's manual for the

car.

Store the battery out of

the reach of children.

The battery contains cor-

rosive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked

flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recy-

cling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in

an environmentally safe manner as it con-

tains lead.

Related information

•

Starter battery - general (p. 360)

10 Maintenance and service

}}

363

Starter battery - replacement

The starter battery in the car can be replaced

without the help of a workshop.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat-

tery.

Removal

First of all: Take the remote control key from

the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes

before any electrical connections are touched

- this is because the car's electrical system

needs to store the necessary information to

control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that the

rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by screwing one

quarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING

Connect and remove the positive and neg-

ative cables in the correct order.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable.

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-

tery.

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery aside.

Lift it up.

Fitting

10 Maintenance and service

364

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

> Check that it is correctly connected to

both battery and outlet in the body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier sec-

tion "Removal".)

8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)

9. Align the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See "Removal".)

For more information on the car's starter bat-

tery, see Jump starting with battery (p. 258).

Battery - Start/Stop

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip-

ped with a support battery in addition to the

starter battery.

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip-

ped with two 12 V batteries - one extra pow-

erful starter battery for starting and one sup-

port battery that helps during the Start/Stop

function's starting sequence.

For more information on the Start/Stop func-

tion, see Start/Stop* (p. 268).

For more information on the car's starter bat-

tery, see Jump starting with battery (p. 258).

The following table shows specifications for

the starter battery and support battery

respectively in cars with Start/Stop function.

Battery

Start, 12 V Support, 12

Cold

start

capacity

- CCA

(A)

720

760

Left-hand

drive car:

120

170

Right-hand

drive car:

120

Size,

L×W×H

(mm)

278×175×190

Left-hand

drive car:

150×90×106

150×90×130

Right-hand

drive car:

150×90×106

10 Maintenance and service

}}}}

365

Battery

Start, 12 V Support, 12

Capacity

(Ah)

Left-hand

drive car:

Right-hand

drive car:

In accordance with EN standard.

Cold Cranking Amperes.

Manual gearbox.

Automatic gearbox.

Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function

that only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary.

Others.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery, in cars

with Start/Stop function, a battery of the

correct type must be fitted, EFB

in cars

with manual gearbox and AGM

in cars

with automatic gearbox.

When replacing the support battery, a bat-

tery of AGM type must be fitted.

NOTE

•

The higher the current take-off in the

car, the more the alternator must be

working and the batteries charging =

Increased fuel consumption.

•

When the capacity of the starter bat-

tery has fallen below the lowest per-

missible level then the Start/Stop func-

tion is disengaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due

to high current take-off means:

•

The engine starts automatically

without

the driver depressing the clutch pedal

(manual gearbox).

•

The engine starts automatically without

the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot

brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

Location of the batteries

A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.

(1) Starter battery

(2) Support battery.

The support battery normally requires no

more service than the normal starter battery.

A workshop should be contacted in the event

of questions or problems - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed

then the Start/Stop function may tempo-

rarily cease to work after the connection of

an external battery or battery charger:

•

The negative battery terminal on the

car's starter battery must never be

used for connecting an external bat-

Enhanced Flooded Battery.

Absorbed Glass Mat.

Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.

See Starter battery - general (p. 360) for detailed description of the starter battery.

10 Maintenance and service

366

tery or battery charger - only the car

chassis may be used as the ground-

ing point.

See Jump starting with battery (p. 258) for

a description of how the cable clamps

must be attached.

NOTE

If the battery has become so discharged

that everything is "black" and in principle

the car does not have all the normal elec-

trical functions and the engine is subse-

quently started using an external battery or

battery charger, then the Start/Stop func-

tion will be activated. It will then be possi-

ble for the engine to be auto-stopped but

in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop

function may fail to auto-start the engine

due to inadequate capacity in the battery.

The battery must first be charged in order

to ensure a successful auto-start after an

auto-stop. At an outside temperature of

+15 °C the battery needs to be charged for

at least 1 hour. At a lower outside tem-

perature a charging time of 3-4 hours is

recommended. The recommendation is

that the battery is charged using an exter-

nal battery charger.

If this is not possible then the recommen-

dation is to temporarily deactivate the

Start/Stop function until the battery has

been adequately recharged.

For more information on charging the

starter battery, see Starter battery - gen-

eral (p. 360).

Related information

•

Battery - symbols (p. 362)

Electrical system

The electrical system is single-pole and uses

the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna-

tor.

The size, type and performance of the starter

battery depend on the car's equipment and

function.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure

you replace it with a battery with the same

cold starting capacity and type as the orig-

inal battery (see the label on the battery).

Related information

•

Starter battery - replacement (p. 363)

•

Starter battery - general (p. 360)

10 Maintenance and service

367

Fuses - general

All electrical functions and components are

protected by a number of fuses in order to

protect the car's electrical system from dam-

age by short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does

not work, it may be because the component's

fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If

the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a

fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that

you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for

checking.

Changing

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the

fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side

to see whether the curved wire has

blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new

fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with

an amperage higher than that specified

when replacing a fuse. This could cause

significant damage to the electrical system

and possibly lead to fire.

Location of central electrical units

Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand

drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central

electrical units under the glovebox change

sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Cargo area

Engine compartment cold zone (only

Start/Stop)

Related information

•

Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

•

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372)

•

Fuses - in the control module under the

glovebox (p. 374)

•

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

•

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold

zone (p. 378)

10 Maintenance and service

368

Fuses - in engine compartment

Fuses in the engine compartment protect

engine and brake functions, amongst other

things.

10 Maintenance and service

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

369

General fuses, engine compartment

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers

that facilitate the procedure for the removal

and fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration)

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. The fuses in (C) are located

under (A).

On the inside of the cover is a label that

shows the location of the fuses.

•

Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi

Fuse" type and must only be replaced by

a workshop

•

Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE"

type and should be replaced by a work-

shop

•

Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini

Fuse" type.

Function

[A]

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM)

under the glovebox

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM)

under the glovebox

Primary fuse for central elec-

trical unit in cargo area

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box

under the glovebox

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box

under the glovebox

- -

Electric additional heater*

100

Heated windscreen*

, left-

hand side

Windscreen wipers 30

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fan

Heated windscreen*

, right-

hand side

Function

[A]

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

Headlamp washers* 20

Headlamp levelling*; Active

Xenon headlamps - ABL*

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM)

under the glovebox

ABS 5

Adjustable steering force* 5

Engine control module; Trans-

mission control module; Air-

bags

Heated washer nozzles* 10

- -

Headlamp control 5

- -

An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

10 Maintenance and service

370

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function

[A]

- -

Relay coils 5

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Relay coil in main relay for

engine management system

(4-cyl.); Engine control module

(4-cyl.)

Relay coil in main relay for

engine management system

(5, 6-cyl.); Engine control

module (5, 6-cyl.)

Transmission control module 15

Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.

petrol); Supporting coolant

pump (4-cyl. diesel)

Relay coil in relay for solenoid

clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl. petrol);

Relay coils in central electrical

unit in engine compartment

cold zone (Start/Stop)

Start relay (5, 6-cyl. petrol)

Function

[A]

Glow control module (5-cyl.

diesel)

Engine control module (4-cyl.);

Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. petrol);

Capacitor (6-cyl.)

Engine control module (5, 6-

cyl. petrol)

Engine control module (5-cyl.

diesel)

Engine control module (4-cyl.) 20

Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl.);

Thermostat(4-cyl. petrol);

EVAP valve (4-cyl. petrol);

Cooling pump for EGR (4-cyl.

diesel)

Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl.

diesel, 6-cyl.); Control valves

(5-cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6-

cyl. petrol); Engine control

module (5, 6-cyl. petrol)

Function

[A]

Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.);

Valves (5, 6-cyl.); Engine con-

trol module (6-cyl.); Mass air

flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol); Oil

level sensor

Valves (4-cyl.); Oil pump (4-

cyl. petrol); Lambda-sond,

centre (4-cyl. petrol); Lambda-

sond, rear (4-cyl. diesel)

Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl.);

Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl.

petrol)

EVAP valve (5, 6-cyl. petrol);

Lambda-sonds (5, 6-cyl.);

Control module radiator roller

cover (5-cyl. diesel)

Coolant pump (5-cyl. petrol);

Crankcase ventilation heater

(5-cyl. petrol); Oil pump auto-

matic gearbox (5-cyl. petrol

Start/Stop)

Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol) 15

Diesel filter heater (diesel) 20

10 Maintenance and service

371

Function

[A]

Control module, radiator roller

cover (5-cyl. petrol)

Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl.);

Glow control module (4-cyl.

diesel); Oil pump (4-cyl. diesel)

7.5

Crankcase ventilation heater

(5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump auto-

matic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel

Start/Stop)

Coolant pump (4-cyl. petrol) 50

Glow plugs (diesel) 70

Cooling fan (4 - 5-cyl. petrol) 60

Cooling fan (6-cyl., 4, 5-cyl.

diesel)

Power steering 100

Ampere

For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is

empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's

cold zone (p. 378).

For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is

empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's

cold zone (p. 378).

Related information

•

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372)

•

Fuses - in the control module under the

glovebox (p. 374)

•

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

10 Maintenance and service

372

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - under glovebox

Fuses under the glovebox protect the info-

tainment system and seat functions, amongst

other things.

Positions

Function

[A]

Primary fuse for audio control

module*; Primary fuse for

fuses 16-20: Infotainment

- -

Heated steering wheel* 10

Function

[A]

- -

12 V socket, cargo area* 15

Control panel, driver's door 20

Control panel, front passenger

door

Function

[A]

Control panel, rear passenger

door, right

Control panel, rear passenger

door, left

Keyless* 20

Power seat, driver's side* 20

Power seat, passenger side* 20

10 Maintenance and service

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

373

Function

[A]

- -

Infotainment Control Module

or Screen

Audio control unit (amplifier)*;

TV*; Digital radio*

Audio control module or Con-

trol module Sensus

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5

- -

Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof;

Climate sensor*; Damper

motors, air intake

12 V socket, tunnel console 15

Seat heating, rear right* 15

Seat heating, rear left* 15

- -

Seat heating, front passenger

side

Seat ventilation front passen-

ger side*

Function

[A]

Seat heating, front driver's

side

Seat ventilation front driver's

side*

Parking assistance* 5

AWD control module* 15

Active chassis Four-C* 10

Ampere

Certain model variants.

Related information

•

Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

•

Fuses - in the control module under the

glovebox (p. 374)

•

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

•

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold

zone (p. 378)

10 Maintenance and service

374

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - in the control module under

the glovebox

Fuses in the control module under the glove-

box protect airbag and collision warning sys-

tem functions, amongst other things.

Positions

Function

[A]

- -

Interior lighting; Driver's door

control panel, power win-

dows; Power seats*

7.5

Combined instrument panel 5

Function

[A]

Adaptive cruise control, ACC*;

collision warning system*

Interior lighting; Rain sensor* 7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Central locking system, fuel

filler flap

Function

[A]

- -

Windscreen washers 15

Unlocking, boot lid 10

Folding head restraint* 10

Fuel pump 20

10 Maintenance and service

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

375

Function

[A]

Movement detector alarm*;

Climate panel

Steering lock 15

Siren*; Data link connector

OBDII

- -

Airbags 10

Collision warning system* 5

Accelerator pedal sensor;

Dimming interior rearview mir-

ror*; Seat heating, rear*

Electric additional heater*

7.5

Infotainment control module

(Performance); Audio (Per-

formance)

Brake light 5

Sunroof* 20

Immobiliser 5

Ampere

Related information

•

Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

•

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372)

•

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

•

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold

zone (p. 378)

10 Maintenance and service

376

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - in cargo area

Fuses in the cargo area protect the electric

parking brake, amongst other things.

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.

Positions

Function

[A]

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

Rear window defroster 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

- -

Function

[A]

- -

Function

[A]

Trailer socket 1* 40

- -

Ampere

Related information

•

Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

•

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372)

10 Maintenance and service

377

•

Fuses - in the control module under the

glovebox (p. 374)

•

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold

zone (p. 378)

10 Maintenance and service

378

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - in the engine compartment's

cold zone

Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone

are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.

Fuse locations in the engine compartment's cold zone.

•

Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"

type and must only be replaced by a

workshop

•

Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type

and must only be replaced by a work-

shop

•

Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.

For more information on Start/Stop - see

Start/Stop* (p. 268).

Positions

Function

[A]

Main fuse for central electrical

unit in the engine compart-

ment

175

Function

[A]

Main fuse for central elec-

tronic module (CEM) under

the glovebox, relay/fuse box

under the glovebox, central

electrical unit in cargo area

175

Electric additional heater* 100

An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

10 Maintenance and service

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

379

Function

[A]

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM)

under the glovebox

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box

under the glovebox

Heated windscreen* 60

Primary fuse for central elec-

trical unit in cargo area

Ventilation fan 40

- -

Start relay 30

- -

Support battery 70

Central electronic module

(CEM) - reference voltage

support battery

Ampere

Related information

•

Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

•

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372)

•

Fuses - in the control module under the

glovebox (p. 374)

•

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

10 Maintenance and service

380

Car wash

The car should be washed as soon as it

becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash

with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Handwashing

•

Remove bird droppings from the paint-

work as soon as possible. Bird droppings

contain chemicals that affect and discol-

our paintwork very quickly. An authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended for the

removal of any discoloration.

•

Hose down the underbody.

•

Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt

has been removed in order to reduce the

risk of scratches from washing. Do not

spray directly onto the locks.

•

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent

on very dirty surfaces. Note that the sur-

faces must not then be warmed up by the

sun!

•

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and

plenty of lukewarm water.

•

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm

soap solution or car shampoo.

•

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or

a water scraper. If you avoid allowing

water droplets to dry in strong sunlight

then the risk of water stains that may

need to be polished away is reduced.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a

workshop. There is a risk of fire if the

engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-

ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling

for example.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents

but use water and a non-scratching

sponge instead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog

lamps and rear lamps may temporarily

have condensation on the inside of the

lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is

designed to withstand this. Condensation

is normally vented out of the lamp housing

when the lamp has been switched on for a

time.

Automatic car washes

An automatic car wash is a simple and quick

way of washing the car, but it cannot reach

everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-

mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

The car must only be washed by hand

over the first few months. This is because

the paint is more delicate when it is new.

High-pressure washing

When using high-pressure washing, use

sweeping movements and make sure that the

nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to

the surface of the car (the distance applies to

all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto

the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the

car, including the parking brake, to ensure

that moisture and corrosion do not attack

the brake linings and reduce braking per-

formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then

when driving long distances in rain or slush.

The heat from the friction causes the brake

linings to warm up and dry. Do the same

thing after starting in very damp or cold

weather.

Wiper blades

Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper

blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the

10 Maintenance and service

}}

381

windscreen, impair the service life of wiper

blades.

For cleaning:

- Set the wiper blades to the service position,

see Wiper blades (p. 358).

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen

regularly with lukewarm soap solution or

car shampoo. Do not use any strong sol-

vents.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components

A special cleaning agent available from Volvo

dealers is recommended for the cleaning and

care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim

components, such as glossy trim mouldings.

When using such a cleaning agent the

instructions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and

rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and

rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is

necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could

wear away or damage the glossy surface

layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive

must not be used.

Rims

Only use rim cleaning agent recommended

by Volvo.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the

surface and cause stains on chrome-plated

aluminium rims.

Related information

•

Polishing and waxing (p. 381)

•

Cleaning the interior (p. 383)

•

Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 382)

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull

or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it

is at least one year old. However, the car can

be waxed during this time. Do not polish or

wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you

begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt

and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-

rit. More stubborn stains can be removed

using fine rubbing paste designed for car

paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with

liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on

the packaging carefully. Many preparations

contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and

rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and

rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is

necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could

wear away or damage the glossy surface

layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive

must not be used.

10 Maintenance and service

382

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by

Volvo should be used. Other treatment

such as preserving, sealing, protection,

lustre sealing or similar could damage the

paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by

such treatments is not covered by Volvo

warranty.

Related information

•

Car wash (p. 380)

Water and dirt-repellent coating

The windows are treated with a surface coa-

ting that improves visibility in difficult weather

conditions.

Water and dirt-repellent coating*

There is natural wear of the water-

repellent coating.

Maintenance:

•

Never use products such as car wax,

degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as

this could ruin their water-repellent prop-

erties.

•

Take care when cleaning so as not to

damage the glass surface.

•

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when

removing ice – only use plastic ice scra-

pers.

•

Treatment with a special finishing agent

available from Volvo dealers is recom-

mended in order to maintain the water-

repellent properties on the side windows.

This should be used first after three years

and then each year.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove

ice from the windows. Use the heating to

remove ice from the door mirrors, see Win-

dows and rearview and door mirrors -

heating (p. 103).

Related information

•

Car wash (p. 380)

10 Maintenance and service

}}

383

Rustproofing

The car received a thorough and complete

rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body

are made of galvanised sheet metal. The

underbody is protected by a wear-resistant

anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating

rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the

exposed members, cavities, closed sections

and side doors.

Inspection and maintenance

The car's anti-corrosion protection does not

normally need to be maintained, but keeping

the car clean always helps to further reduce

the risk of corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic

cleaning solutions must always be avoided on

the glossy trim components. Any stone chips

should be rectified as soon as they are dis-

covered.

Related information

•

Paint damage (p. 384)

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and treat stains at once for best results. Vac-

uuming is important prior to using cleaning

agents.

IMPORTANT

•

Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.

dark jeans and suede garments) may

stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is

important to clean and treat these

parts of the upholstery as soon as

possible.

•

Never use strong solvents such as

washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit

to clean the interior, since this may

damage the upholstery as well as

other interior materials.

•

Never spray the cleaning agent directly

onto components that have electrical

buttons and controls. Wipe them

instead using a moistened cloth con-

taining the cleaning agent.

•

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage

the fabric upholstery.

Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery

Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care

product for fabric upholstery and ceiling

upholstery which, when used in accordance

with the instructions, preserves the properties

of the upholstery. The fabric care product is

available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.

Leather upholstery

Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre-

serve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery is a natural product that

changes and acquires a beautiful patina over

time. Regular cleaning and treatment are

required in order that the properties and col-

ours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo

offers a comprehensive product, Volvo

Leather Care Kit/Wipes, for the cleaning and

treatment of leather upholstery which, when

used in accordance with the instructions, pre-

serves the leather's protective coating.

To achieve best results, Volvo recommends

the cleaning and application of the protective

cream once to four times per year (or more if

required). The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes

is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.

Leather steering wheel

Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the

leather steering wheel with protective plastic.

Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recom-

mended for cleaning the leather steering

wheel.

Interior plastic, metal and wood parts

A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly

moistened with water, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior

parts and surfaces.

10 Maintenance and service

384

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong

stain removers. A special cleaning agent

available from Volvo dealers can be used for

more difficult cleaning.

Seatbelts

Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe-

cial textile cleaning agent is available from a

Volvo dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry

before allowing it to retract.

Inlay mats and floor mat

Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning

of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use

a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the

inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat

straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at

each pin.

WARNING

Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and

check before setting off that the mat by

the driver's seat is firmly affixed and

secured in the pins so that it does not get

caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for

stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor

mats must be cleaned with agents recom-

mended by a Volvo dealer.

Related information

•

Car wash (p. 380)

Paint damage

Paint is an important part of the car's rust-

proofing and should therefore be checked

regularly. The most common types of paint-

work damage are stone chips, scratches, and

marks on the edges of wings, doors and

bumpers.

Touching up minor paintwork damage

To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint-

work should be rectified immediately.

Materials that may be needed

10 Maintenance and service

385

•

Primer

- a special adhesive primer in a

spray can is available for e.g. plastic-

coated bumpers.

•

base coat and clear coat - are available in

spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks

•

Masking tape.

•

fine sand paper

Colour code

The label for colour code is located on the

car's door pillar and is visible when the right-

hand rear door is opened.

Exterior colour code

Any secondary exterior colour code

It is important that the correct colour is used.

For product label location, see Type designa-

tions (p. 387).

Repairing minor paint damage such as

stone chips and scratches

G021832

Before work is started, the car must be clean

and dry as well as at a temperature above

15 °C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Then remove the tape

to remove any loose paint.

If the damage has reached down to a

metal surface (sheet steel), it is preferable

to use a primer. In the event of damage to

a plastic surface, an adhesive primer

should be used for better results - spray

into the spray can's cap and brush thinly.

2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a

very fine polishing agent may be carried

out locally if required (e.g. if there are any

uneven edges). Clean the surface thor-

oughly and allow to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine

brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with

base coat and clear coat once the primer

has dried.

4. For scratches, proceed as above, but

mask around the damaged area to pro-

tect the undamaged paintwork.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down

to the meal and an undamaged layer of

paint remains in place, fill in with base coat

and clear coat as soon as the surface has

been cleaned.

Related information

•

Rustproofing (p. 383)

If required.

Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

SPECIFICATIONS

11 Specifications

}}

387

Type designations

Type designation, vehicle identification num-

ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car,

can be read on a label in the car.

11 Specifications

388

Label location

The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle

identification and engine numbers can facili-

tate all contact with an authorised Volvo

dealer regarding the car and when ordering

spare parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification

number, permissible maximum weights

and code designation for exterior colour

11 Specifications

389

and type approval number. The decal is

positioned on the door pillar, and will be

visible when the right-hand rear door is

opened.

Label for A/C system.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code and engine serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number (VIN Vehicle

Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented in

the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated

in the owner's manual should be exact

replicas of those in the car. They are

included to show their approximate

appearance and location in the car. The

information that applies to your particular

car can be found on the decal on the car.

Related information

•

Weights (p. 391)

•

Engine specifications (p. 393)

11 Specifications

390

Dimensions

Measurement of car length, height, etc. can

be read in the table.

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2835

B Length 4854

C Load length, floor,

folded seat

1927

D Load length, floor 1094

E Height 1493

F Load height 368

Dimensions mm

G Front track

1588

1578

H Rear track

1585

1575

I Load width, floor 1130

J Width

1861 (1876

)

Dimensions mm

K Width including door

mirrors

2106

L Width including folded-

in door mirrors

1907

with 16" wheel

with 17" wheel

with Keyless drive*

11 Specifications

391

Weights

Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read

on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank

90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,

and towball load (p. 392) (when a trailer is

hitched) influence the load capacity and are

not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -

Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to

cars in the standard version - i.e. a car

without extra equipment or accessories.

This means that for every accessory added

the loading capacity of the car is reduced

correspondingly by the weight of the

accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load-

ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/

Summum equipment levels, as well as

other accessories such as Towbar, Load

carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary

lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven engine block

heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover,

Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-

taining the kerb weight of your own partic-

ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change

depending on how heavily it is loaded and

how the load is distributed.

For information on label location, see Type des-

ignations (p. 387).

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

Related information

•

Towing capacity and towball load

(p. 392)

11 Specifications

392

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Towing capacity and towball load

Towing capacity and towball load for driving

with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

NOTE

The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing

bracket is recommended for trailers heav-

ier than 1800 kg.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine

Engine code

Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

All All All 1200 50

T5 B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

T5 B4204T15 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

D4 D4204T5 Manual, M66 1800 90

D4 D4204T5 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 387).

Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

Related information

•

Weights (p. 391)

•

Driving with a trailer* (p. 294)

11 Specifications

393

Engine specifications

Engine specifications (output etc.) for each

respective engine alternative can be read in

the table.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine

code

Output

(kW/rpm)

Output

(hp/rpm)

Torque

(Nm/rpm)

No. of cylin-

ders

Bore

(mm)

Stroke

(mm)

Swept vol-

ume

(litres)

Compres-

sion ratio

T5 B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/1500–4800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1

T5 B4204T15 162/5500 220/5500 350/1500–4000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1

D4 D4204T5 133/4250 181/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1

Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 387).

Related information

•

Coolant - grade and volume (p. 397)

•

Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 395)

11 Specifications

394

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-

mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.

Below are some examples of adverse driving

conditions.

Check the oil level (p. 345) more frequently for

long journeys:

•

towing a caravan or trailer

•

in mountainous regions

•

at high speeds

•

in temperatures colder than -30 °C or

hotter than +40 °C.

The above also apply to shorter driving dis-

tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse

driving conditions. It provides extra protection

for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the

engine's service intervals all engines are

filled with a specially adapted synthetic

engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil

has been made very carefully with regard

to service life, starting characteristics, fuel

consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in

order that the recommended service inter-

vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed

grade of oil for both filling and oil change,

otherwise you will risk affecting service life,

starting characteristics, fuel consumption

and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-

ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed

grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are

carried out at an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Related information

•

Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 395)

•

Engine oil - general (p. 344)

11 Specifications

}}

395

Engine oil - grade and volume

Engine oil grade and volume for each respec-

tive engine alternative can be read in the

table.

Volvo recommends:

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine

Engine code

Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T5 B4204T11 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0w20 approx. 5.9

T5 B4204T15 approx. 5.9

D4 D4204T5 approx 5.2

Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 387).

11 Specifications

396

Related information

•

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 394)

•

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 345)

11 Specifications

397

Coolant - grade and volume

Approved coolant volume for each respective

engine alternative can be read in the table.

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by

Volvo mixed with 50% water

, see the pack-

aging.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine

Volume

(litres)

T5 B4204T11

8,3 (8,7

)

T5 B4204T15

D4 D4204T5

8,9 (9,2

)

Engine code, component and serial number can be read

on the engine; see Type designations (p. 387).

Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.

Related information

•

Coolant - level (p. 348)

Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

11 Specifications

398

Transmission fluid - grade and volume

The prescribed transmission fluid and volume

for each respective gearbox alternative can be

read in the table.

Manual gearbox

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

M66 approx. 1.45 BOT 350M3

NOTE

The gearbox oil does not need to be

changed under normal driving conditions.

However, it may be necessary under

adverse driving conditions.

Automatic gearbox

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

TG-81SC

approx. 6.6

approx. 7.5

AW1

Petrol engines

Diesel engines

NOTE

The gearbox oil does not need to be

changed under normal driving conditions.

However, it may be necessary under

adverse driving conditions.

Related information

•

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 394)

•

Type designations (p. 387)

11 Specifications

399

Brake fluid - grade and volume

The medium in a hydraulic brake system is

called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer

pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master

brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders,

which in turn act on a mechanical brake.

Prescribed grade: DOT 4

Volume: 0.6 litres

Related information

•

Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 349)

Power steering fluid - grade

Power steering fluid is the denomination of

the medium used in the car's power steering

system.

Prescribed grade: Power steering fluid rec-

ommended by Volvo.

Related information

•

Power steering fluid - level (p. 350)

11 Specifications

400

Fuel tank - volume

Fuel tank volume for each respective engine

alternative can be read in the table.

Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Petrol engine approx. 70 Fuel - petrol (p. 290)

Diesel engine approx. 70 Fuel - diesel (p. 290)

Related information

•

Filling up with fuel (p. 288)

•

Engine specifications (p. 393)

11 Specifications

401

Specifications for air conditioning

Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and

lubricants in the air conditioning system can

be read in the tables below.

A/C decal

The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.

Refrigerant

Weight Prescribed grade

800 g R134a

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pres-

surised refrigerant R134a. This system

must only be serviced and repaired by an

authorised workshop.

Compressor oil

Volume Prescribed grade

60 ml PAG SP-A2

Related information

•

Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 351)

•

Type designations (p. 387)

11 Specifications

402

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in

litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams

per km.

Explanation

gram/km

litre/100 km

Urban driving

Extra-urban driving

Combined driving

manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data is

missing then it is included in the enclosed

supplement.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

S80

T5 (B4204T11) - - - - - -

(D4204T5)

- - - - - -

(D4204T5)

116 4.4 94 3.6 102 3.9

11 Specifications

403

S80

(D4204T5)

- - - - - -

(D4204T5)

131 5.1 103 3.9 113 4.3

Does not apply to the low-emissions variant.

This only applies to the low-emissions variant.

Fuel consumption and emission values in the

table above are based on specific EU cycles

that apply to cars with kerb weight in the

basic version and without extra equipment.

The car's weight may increase depending on

equipment. This, as well as how heavily the

car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and

carbon dioxide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel

consumption compared with the table's val-

ues. Examples of this are:

•

The driver's driving style.

•

If the customer has specified wheels

larger than those fitted as standard on the

model's basic version, then resistance

increases.

•

High speed results in increased wind

resistance.

•

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,

weather and the condition of the car.

Even a combination of the above-mentioned

examples can result in significantly improved

consumption. For further information, please

refer to the regulations referred to

Large deviations in fuel consumption may

arise in a comparison with the EU driving

cycles

which are used in the certification of

the car and on which the consumption figures

in the table are based.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a

trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-

nation with fuel grade are factors that

could affect the car's performance.

Related information

•

Economical driving (p. 293)

•

Weights (p. 391)

Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007

(Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the

engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd

gear (applies to cars with up to 18-inch wheels). The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with legal

requirements. CO

emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for

emissions.

11 Specifications

404

Tyres - approved tyre pressures

Approved tyre pressures for each respective

engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these

are not always available in all markets.

S80

Engine

Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1-3 persons Max. load

ECO pressure

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All engines

225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17

0 - 160 220 210 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 270 270 -

205/60 R 16

235/40 R 18

235/40 R 19

0 - 160 230 210 260 260 260

160 + 270 270 290 290 -

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

Economical driving.

In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.

WARNING

19-inch wheels must never be used on

cars that are not equipped with the R-

Design or Sport chassis options. The use

of 19-inch wheels on cars with standard

chassis constitutes a safety risk, with a

risk of vehicle damage, and it impairs the

car's driving characteristics.

Related information

•

Tyres - dimensions (p. 308)

•

Tyres - air pressure (p. 306)

•

Type designations (p. 387)

11 Specifications

405

12 Alphabetical Index
12
406
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 193
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 89
Active chassis - FOUR-C......................... 183
Active main beam...................................... 87
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 89
Active Yaw Control.................................. 184
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 183
Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 193
change cruise control functionality..... 202
deactivate........................................... 200
fault tracing......................................... 205
function............................................... 194
managing speed................................. 197
overtaking........................................... 200
overview.............................................. 196
radar sensor........................................ 203
setting the time interval...................... 198
standby mode..................................... 199
temporary deactivation....................... 199
Additional heater
electric........................................ 144, 145
fuel-driven........................................... 144
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 80
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 33
driver's side.................................... 31, 39
passenger side......................... 32, 33, 39
AIRBAG ............................................... 31, 32
Airbag system............................................ 30
warning symbol.................................... 29
Air cleaning
material............................................... 126
passenger compartment.... 124, 125, 126
Air conditioning........................................ 133
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade............................... 401
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 351
Air distribution.......................................... 127
Recirculation....................................... 134
table.................................................... 136
Air quality system IAQS........................... 126
Alarm................................................ 178, 180
alarm indicator.................................... 179
alarm signals....................................... 180
automatic re-arming........................... 180
checking the alarm............................. 163
reduced alarm level............................ 181
remote control key not working.......... 180
Alcohol lock............................................. 248
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 125
All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 267
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 267
Approach lighting.............................. 93, 161
Automatic car washes............................. 380
Automatic gearbox.......................... 261, 264
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 261
towing and recovery........................... 300
trailer................................................... 295
Automatic relocking................................. 173
AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 267
B
Backrest..................................................... 77
front seat, lowering............................... 77
rear seat, folding................................... 79
Bag holder .............................................. 154
Battery............................................. 286, 360
jump starting....................................... 258
maintenance....................................... 360
overload.............................................. 286
remote control key/PCC..................... 167
symbols on the battery....................... 362
warning symbols................................. 362
BLIS................................................. 242, 243

12 Alphabetical Index
12
407
Bonnet, opening...................................... 342
Book service and repair........................... 337
Boot lid.................................................... 175
Locking/unlocking.............................. 175
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 349
Brake fluid
grade and volume............................... 399
Brake light.................................................. 90
Brakes.............................................. 278, 280
Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 279
brake light............................................. 90
brake system...................... 278, 279, 280
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 280
emergency brake lights........................ 90
filling brake fluid.................................. 350
handbrake........................................... 281
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 279
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 352
C
Camera sensor................................ 213, 224
Car care................................................... 380
Leather upholstery.............................. 383
Cargo area
loading................................................ 151
load retaining eyelets.......................... 154
Car key memory...................................... 158
Car upholstery......................................... 383
Car washing............................................. 380
Catalytic converter................................... 292
Recovery............................................. 300
Chassis settings...................................... 183
Checking the engine oil level................... 344
Children
child safety locks.................................. 42
child seat and airbag............................ 47
child seats and side airbags................. 36
location in car....................................... 47
safety.............................................. 36, 42
Child safety locks............................ 177, 178
Child seats................................................. 42
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 48
recommended...................................... 43
size classes for child seats with ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 48
types..................................................... 50
upper mounting points for child seats.. 52
City Safety™............................................ 211
Cleaning
automatic car wash............................ 380
car washing........................................ 380
rims..................................................... 381
seatbelts............................................. 384
upholstery........................................... 383
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 125
Climate control
actual temperature............................. 124
auto-regulation................................... 132
general................................................ 123
personal preferences.......................... 126
sensors............................................... 124
temperature control............................ 132
Clock, adjustment...................................... 70
CO
2
 emissions......................................... 402
Collision..................................................... 40
Collision warning............................. 218, 219
Collision warning system
function............................................... 219
general limitations............................... 223
operation............................................. 222
Pedestrian detection........................... 221
Radar sensor.............................. 203, 211
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake....................................................... 218
Colour code, paint................................... 385
Combined instrument panel................ 60, 61

12 Alphabetical Index
12
408
Compass................................................. 104
calibration........................................... 104
Condensation in headlamps.................... 380
Controls, lights........................................... 82
Control symbols................................... 61, 63
Coolant
volume and grade............................... 397
Coolant, checking and filling................... 348
Cooling system........................................ 285
overheating......................................... 285
Crash, see Collision................................... 40
Cruise control.......................................... 191
deactivate........................................... 193
managing speed................................. 191
resume set speed............................... 193
temporary deactivation....................... 192
Cyclist detection...................................... 220
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 125
D
Daytime running lights............................... 85
Deadlock.................................................. 176
deactivation........................................ 176
temporary deactivation....................... 176
Defroster.................................................. 133
Detachable towbar
storage................................................ 296
Diesel....................................................... 290
run out of fuel..................................... 291
Diesel particle filter.................................. 292
Dimensions.............................................. 390
Dipstick, electronic.......................... 345, 347
Direction indicator..................................... 91
Direction indicators.................................... 91
direction of rotation................................. 305
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 266
Display lighting.......................................... 84
Distance Warning.................................... 208
Limitations.......................................... 209
Symbols and messages..................... 210
Door mirrors............................................. 101
Driveable punctured tyres........................ 321
Driver Alert Control.................................. 228
operation............................................. 229
Driver Alert System.................................. 228
Driving...................................................... 287
cooling system.................................... 285
with a tailer......................................... 294
with boot lid open............................... 286
Driving in water........................................ 285
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 392
towing capacity.................................. 392
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 129
Eco Cruise............................................... 276
EcoGuide................................................... 64
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 24
Economical driving.................................. 293
ECO pressure.......................................... 404
Electrical socket...................................... 150
cargo area........................................... 155
Electrical system...................................... 366
Electric parking brake
low battery voltage............................. 281
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 129
Emergency equipment
first aid kit........................................... 316
warning triangle.................................. 314
Emergency puncture repair............. 323, 324
action.................................................. 325
inflating the tyres................................ 328
rechecking.......................................... 327

12 Alphabetical Index
12
409
Emergency puncture repair kit
location............................................... 324
overview.............................................. 325
sealing fluid......................................... 329
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 402
Engine
deactivate........................................... 254
overheating......................................... 285
start..................................................... 253
Start/Stop........................................... 268
Engine and passenger compartment heater
messages........................................... 142
timer.................................................... 140
Engine block heater................................. 138
Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater
direct start.......................................... 139
immediate stop................................... 140
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 348
oil........................................................ 344
overview.............................................. 342
power steering fluid............................ 350
Engine oil......................................... 344, 394
adverse driving conditions.................. 394
filter..................................................... 344
grade and volume............................... 395
Engine specifications............................... 393
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 206
Driver Alert Control............................. 230
Lane Departure Warning..................... 234
see Messages and symbols....... 206, 283
Error messages in BLIS........................... 245
ERS - Remote Start................................. 255
exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 286
External dimensions................................ 390
F
Fan
ECC.................................................... 132
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 214
First aid.................................................... 316
First aid kit............................................... 316
Fluids, capacities...... 360, 397, 398, 399,
400, 401
Fluids and oils.................. 397, 398, 399, 401
Fog lamp
rear........................................................ 89
Foot brake............................... 278, 279, 280
FOUR-C - Active chassis......................... 183
FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 24
Fuel.................................................. 289, 290
fuel consumption................................ 402
fuel economy.............................. 306, 307
fuel filter.............................................. 291
Fuel-driven heater
timer.................................................... 140
Fuelling
filling................................................... 288
fuel cap............................................... 288
fuel filler flap....................................... 288
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 288
Fuel tank
volume................................................ 400
Fuse box.................................................. 367
Fuses....................................................... 367
cargo area........................................... 376
changing............................................. 367
cold zone............................................ 378
engine compartment.......................... 368
General............................................... 367
Start/Stop........................................... 378
under glovebox........................... 372, 374

12 Alphabetical Index
12
410
G
Gearbox................................................... 259
automatic.................................... 261, 264
manual................................................ 259
Gear indicator.......................................... 260
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 266
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-
gagement................................................. 266
Geartronic................................................ 261
Glass
laminated/reinforced............................. 24
Glovebox................................................. 149
locking................................................ 174
Gross vehicle weight............................... 391
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 260
H
Handbrake............................................... 281
Hazard warning flashers............................ 90
Headlamp control...................................... 82
Headlamp levelling.................................... 84
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 94
Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 94
Active Bending Lights .......................... 94
Halogen headlamp............................... 94
Headlamps............................................... 352
head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 79
lowering................................................ 80
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 99
Heating
rearview and door mirrors.................. 103
rear window........................................ 103
seats................................................... 130
steering wheel....................................... 82
windscreen......................................... 103
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 19
High engine temperature......................... 285
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 99
Hill Start Assist........................................ 267
Home safe light duration........................... 93
Horn........................................................... 81
I
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 126
Immobiliser.............................................. 159
Indicator symbols...................................... 65
Inflatable curtain.................................. 36, 39
Information button, PCC.................. 162, 163
Information display.............................. 60, 61
Inlaid mats............................................... 150
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 84
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car................................ 54
right-hand drive car.............................. 57
Instruments and controls..................... 54, 57
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Air cleaning......................................... 126
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 92
Interior rearview mirror............................. 103
automatic dimming............................. 103
Intermittent wiping..................................... 98
Internet-connected car
book service and repair...................... 337
J
Jack......................................................... 315
Journey statistics..................................... 121
Jump starting........................................... 258

12 Alphabetical Index
12
411
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 391
Key................................................... 157, 159
Key blade......................................... 164, 165
Keyless drive.... 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 253
Keyless - locking..................................... 170
Keyless start (keyless drive)..... 168, 169,
170, 171, 172, 253
Keyless - unlocking................................. 171
Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 81
Key positions............................................. 75
L
Labels...................................................... 387
Laminated glass......................................... 24
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 351
Lane assistance
operation..................................... 232, 233
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)....... 231, 232
Laser sensor............................................ 215
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 383
Light indications, PCC............................. 163
Lighting.................................................... 351
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 89
approach lighting.......................... 93, 161
automatic lighting, passenger com-
partment............................................... 92
bulbs, specifications........................... 357
controls................................................. 92
daytime running lights.......................... 85
display lighting...................................... 84
headlamp levelling................................ 84
home safe lighting................................ 93
instrument lighting................................ 84
in the passenger compartment............. 92
main/dipped beam............................... 86
position/parking lamps......................... 85
rear fog lamp........................................ 89
tunnel detection.................................... 86
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 352
bulb holder, rear................................. 355
cargo area........................................... 356
dipped beam (cars with halogen head-
lamps)................................................. 353
direction indicators, front.................... 354
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps)......................................... 354
main beam (cars with halogen head-
lamps)................................................. 354
number plate lighting.......................... 356
vanity mirror........................................ 357
Loading
General............................................... 151
load retaining eyelets.......................... 154
long load............................................. 152
roof load............................................. 153
Lock
locking................................................ 173
unlocking............................................ 173
Lockable wheel bolts............................... 310
Lock confirmation ................................... 159
Locking/unlocking
glovebox............................................. 174
inside.................................................. 173
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 86
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 87
maintenance
Rustproofing....................................... 383
Manual gearbox....................................... 259
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 260
Towing and recovery.......................... 300
trailer................................................... 295
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 261
Max. roof load.......................................... 391
Memory function in seat............................ 78

12 Alphabetical Index
12
412
Menus
Combined instrument panel............... 107
menu overview.................................... 108
Messages................................................ 109
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 206
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 217, 226
Driver Alert Control............................. 230
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater........................... 142
Lane Departure Warning..................... 234
Messages in BLIS.................................... 245
Messages in the information display....... 108
Meters
fuel gauge....................................... 60, 62
speedometer................................... 60, 62
tachometer..................................... 60, 62
misting
attending to the windows................... 123
Misting
condensation in headlamps............... 380
Mood lighting............................................. 93
MY CAR................................................... 110
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 394, 395
Oil level low.............................................. 344
Output...................................................... 393
outside temperature gauge....................... 69
Overheating..................................... 285, 294
Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 24
P
PACOS....................................................... 33
Paddle on the steering wheel.................... 81
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 385
damage and touch-up........................ 384
Panel lighting............................................. 84
Panic function.......................................... 161
Park Assist....................................... 235, 237
backward............................................ 236
fault indicator...................................... 238
function............................................... 235
parking assistance sensors................ 238
Park assist camera.................................. 239
settings............................................... 241
Parking brake........................................... 281
Passenger compartment filter................. 125
Passenger compartment heater.............. 138
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................. 160
range........................................... 163, 168
Pedestrian detection................................ 218
Personal Car Communicator................... 163
Petrol grade............................................. 290
Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 107
Polishing.................................................. 381
Position/parking lamps.............................. 85
Power guide............................................... 64
Power seat................................................. 78
Powershift gearbox.......................... 264, 300
Power steering fluid
grade................................................... 399
Power sunroof......................................... 105
Power windows......................................... 99
Privacy locking......................................... 165
Q
Queue Assist............................................ 200
Queue assistance.................................... 200

12 Alphabetical Index
12
413
R
Radar sensor........................................... 194
Limitations.......................................... 203
Rain sensor................................................ 98
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 355
Rear seat
Heating............................................... 130
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................. 104
door.................................................... 101
electrically retractable......................... 102
heating................................................ 103
interior................................................. 103
Rear window
heating................................................ 103
Recommendations during driving............ 287
Recommended child seats
table...................................................... 43
Recovery.................................................. 302
Refrigerant............................................... 351
Regeneration........................................... 292
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 367
Remote control immobiliser..................... 160
Remote control key................. 157, 158, 159
battery replacement............................ 167
detachable key blade................. 164, 165
functions............................................. 160
loss..................................................... 157
range........................................... 162, 168
Remote control key system, type appro-
val............................................................ 181
Remote Start - ERS................................. 255
Resetting, trip meter........................ 114, 118
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 102
Resetting the power windows................. 100
Retractable power door mirrors............... 102
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 260
Road sign information............................. 188
Limitations.......................................... 190
operation............................................. 188
Roof load, max. weight............................ 391
Rustproofing............................................ 383
S
Safety lock
children................................................. 42
Safety mode.............................................. 40
moving the car...................................... 42
start attempt......................................... 41
Sealing fluid............................................. 329
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 77
Seatbelt...................................................... 26
loosen................................................... 27
pregnancy............................................. 28
putting on............................................. 27
rear seat................................................ 28
seatbelt reminder.................................. 28
seatbelt tensioner................................. 29
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 28
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 29, 39
Seats.......................................................... 77
head restraints, rear.............................. 79
heating................................................ 130
Heating............................................... 130
lowering the front backrest................... 77
lowering the rear backrest.................... 79
power.................................................... 78
ventilated front seats.......................... 131
Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST)........ 321
Sensus....................................................... 74
Service position....................................... 358
Service programme................................. 337
Set time interval....................................... 208
Side airbag SIPS.................................. 35, 39
SIPS airbag................................................ 35
Skidding................................................... 287
Ski hatch.................................................. 153

12 Alphabetical Index
12
414
slippery driving conditions....................... 287
Soot filter................................................. 292
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 292
spare wheel............................................. 311
installation........................................... 313
Speed ratings, tyres................................. 309
Spin control............................................. 184
Stability and traction control system 184,
186
operation............................................. 184
Stability system....................................... 184
Stains....................................................... 383
Start/Stop................................................ 268
function and operation....................... 268
the engine does not stop.................... 270
Steering force, speed related.................. 183
Steering force level, see Steering force... 183
Steering lock............................................ 254
Steering wheel........................................... 80
heating.................................................. 82
keypad.................................................. 81
paddle................................................... 81
steering wheel adjustment.................... 80
Stone chips and scratches...................... 384
Storage spaces
glovebox............................................. 149
tunnel console.................................... 149
Storage spaces in the passenger com-
partment.................................................. 147
Sun blind.................................................. 101
Sunroof
opening and closing........................... 105
pinch protection.................................. 107
sunscreen........................................... 106
ventilation position.............................. 106
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................. 106
Switching off the engine.......................... 254
Symbols
indicator symbols..................... 61, 63, 65
warning symbols............................. 61, 63
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 206
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 217, 226
Driver Alert Control............................. 230
Lane Departure Warning..................... 234
System
tripping.................................................. 39
T
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 124
Temperature control................................ 132
TM - Tyre Monitor.................................... 322
Tools........................................................ 315
Total airing function......................... 123, 174
Towbar
detachable, attachment...................... 297
detachable, removal........................... 299
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 296
Towbar - detachable
attachment/removal.................... 297, 299
Towing..................................................... 300
towing eye.......................................... 301
Towing bracket........................................ 296
specifications...................................... 297
Towing capacity and towball load........... 392
Towing eye.............................................. 301
TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring.... 316,
317, 319
Traction control........................................ 184
Trailer....................................................... 294
cable................................................... 294
driving with a trailer............................ 294

12 Alphabetical Index
12
415
Transmission............................................ 259
Transmission oil
volume and grade............................... 398
Transponder.............................................. 19
Tread depth............................................. 310
Tread wear indicators.............................. 306
Trip computer.......... 111, 112, 116, 120, 121
Trip meter.................................................. 69
Trip meter, resetting........................ 114, 118
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 205
Tunnel console........................................ 149
12 V socket......................................... 150
cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 149
Tunnel detection........................................ 86
Type approval
radar system....................................... 246
remote control key system................. 181
tyre pressure monitoring..................... 330
Type designations................................... 387
Tyre dimension........................................ 308
Tyre load index........................................ 309
Tyre pressure label.................................. 306
Tyre pressure monitoring. 316, 317, 319, 322
Adjust.................................................. 318
arming................................................. 320
deactivate........................................... 320
driveable punctured tyres (SST)......... 321
low tyre pressure................................ 321
recommendations............................... 320
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 305
maintenance....................................... 304
pressure...................................... 306, 404
puncture repair................................... 323
specifications...................................... 404
tread depth......................................... 310
tread wear indicators.......................... 306
tyre pressure monitoring..... 316, 317,
319,  322
winter tyres......................................... 310
U
Unlocking
from the inside.................................... 173
from the outside................................. 173
Unlocking with the key blade................... 171
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 92, 150
Ventilation................................................ 127
Vibration damper..................................... 296
Volvo ID..................................................... 21
Volvo Sensus............................................. 74
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 194
collision warning system.................... 222
stability and traction control system.. 184
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS....................................... 67
alternator not charging......................... 67
Fault in brake system........................... 67
Low oil pressure................................... 67
Parking brake applied........................... 67
seatbelt reminder............................ 28, 67
Warning................................................ 67
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 222
Warning symbols........................... 61, 63, 67
Warning triangle....................................... 314
Washer fluid............................................. 360
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 99
Washers
washer fluid, filling.............................. 360
windscreen........................................... 99

12 Alphabetical Index
12
416
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 382
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 382
Waxing..................................................... 381
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 391
Wheel bolts.............................................. 310
lockable.............................................. 310
Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 308
Wheel rims
cleaning.............................................. 381
Wheels
installation........................................... 313
removal............................................... 311
snow chains........................................ 310
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 37
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 38
seating position.................................... 38
whiplash protection........................ 37, 39
Window
sun blind............................................. 101
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 382
Windscreen
heating........................................ 103, 133
Windscreen washing.................................. 99
Windscreen wiper...................................... 98
rain sensor............................................ 98
Winter driving........................................... 287
Winter tyres.............................................. 310
Wiper blades............................................ 358
changing............................................. 359
Cleaning.............................................. 359
Service position.................................. 358
Wipers and washing.................................. 98

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Volvo S80 - 2016 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 12,81 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Volvo S80 - 2016

Volvo S80 - 2016 User Manual - German - 448 pages

Volvo S80 - 2016 User Manual - Dutch - 436 pages

Volvo S80 - 2016 User Manual - French - 432 pages

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Volvo S80 - 2016 Manual

Product: